Period & Year /periodandyear section Year-end closing and period closing with help of automation 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Period & Year Year-end closing and period closing with help of automation Read more about the product here: . Help /periodandyear/help section Here you will find the help documentation for Period & Year. 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Help Here you will find the help documentation for Period & Year. Choose the area you want to learn more about from the menu to the left or use the search field to find different topics.

We are available to you in our chat if you need help besides the learning found in Period & Year.

Our opening hours are between 09:00 - 15:00.

You can also send us an email on support.py@visma.com.

Included in your subscription are several digital courses. You have access to them on learning universe.

 Start page /periodandyear/help/start-page section Import accounting data. Lock periods. Copy data between periods and run auto checks. 2024-09-30T16:52:08+02:00 # Start page Import accounting data. Lock periods. Copy data between periods and run auto checks. The start page of Period & Year gives you an overview of the status of the reconciliation of the company that you are working with. You can quickly see how much of the reconciliation that is done, and how much is left to do. It is also where you import new accounting data from ERP or from a SIE4 file, SAF-T file or an Excel file, where you lock periods and where you run the auto checks. Read more in the topics below: Import accounting data /periodandyear/help/start-page/import section 2025-02-21T16:41:02+01:00 # Import accounting data There are several ways to import accounting data into Period & Year. Read more about the different alternatives below. To import data, simply click the button **Setup import source** at the top of the page and choose which type of import you would like to do. You can also import data under **Settings - Settings**.

The status of the import can be seen in Settings - Import settings.

> [!NOTE] Mapping of reference account with ERP import > Period & Year automatically suggests linking to a reference account with different priorities depending on whether a client account has been manually created in Period & Year, or whether it is imported from an import source. > >When importing via an import source, the reference account is linked based on the following priority: > >1. Import source mapping (standard mapping for selected import source defined by Period & Year) >2. Periode & Year mapping > >Read more about [Chart of accounts.](/periodandyear/help/settings/chart-of-accounts) ## Tripletex *To setup import:* : 1. Select import source **Tripletex** in the list. 2. Paste your Tripletex Employee Key or Accounting office key for authentication and save your changes. - To open up for API-access and create an employee key please [read this information in Tripletex](https://hjelp.tripletex.no/hc/no/articles/4409557117713#aktivering_av_api_tilgang_i_klient). - The application name should be Period & Year. - It is also possible to create an accounting office key for multiple clients. [Please read this information on how to proceed](https://hjelp.tripletex.no/hc/no/articles/10961043417233). 3. Select **Import from Tripletex** to start the import. ## PowerOffice Go *To setup import:* : 1. Select import source **PowerOffice Go** in the list. 2. Paste your Poweroffice Go **Client key** for authentication and save your changes. To create a client key, log in to PowerOffice Go and go to **Settings **- **Extensions**, select **Add extensions** and **Visma Period & Year** from the drop down. Copy the displayed client key. 3. Click **OK** to save. 4. Select **Import from PowerOffice Go** to start the import. ### Import of agricultural clients When importing agricultural clients, Period & Year also imports the associated agricultural departments as part of the chart of accounts. The agricultural department is distinguished by 2 digits after the general ledger account separated by a period punctuation mark. Agricultural departments: - 10 Finance - 20 Agriculture - 30 Forestry - 60 Other industry Examples of general ledger accounts including agricultural department: | Complete account number and name | Belongs to the following agricultural department | | -------- | ------- | | 3000.20 Sales revenue, grain, seeds, straw fodder (taxable) | 20 Agriculture | | 3000.30 Sales revenue, special timber, (taxable) | 30 Forestry | | 3000.60 Sales revenue, taxable | 60 Other industry | In the case of sole proprietorships, on the other hand, all transactions linked to agricultural department 90 Private will be imported and linked to the following earmarked 2 accounts: - 2089 Net capital primary industry accounts department private - 8989 Private profit and loss accounts (PowerOffice agriculture) ### Export of agricultural clients Export of manual vouchers and system vouchers will also include agricultural department as part of the closing entries. For example: - Debit 8975.60 - Private use of business vehicle - Credit 7099.60 - Private use of business vehicle (recognized as income) ## eAccounting *To setup import:* : 1. Select import source **eAccounting** in the list. 2. Select **Import from Visma eAccounting** to start the import. : > [!NOTE] The user in Period & Year must also be an administrator in eAccounting to complete the import. ## Visma Business *To setup import:* : 1. Select import source **Visma Business** in the list. 2. Paste your Visma Business client id and pairing key for authentication and save your changes.

When importing from Visma Business, an "agent" must be installed in advance for communication between Period & Year (cloud) and Visma Business (local installation). Click on this link for more information on how to install the agent and how to receive a pairing key.

3. Click the button **Import from Visma Business** to start the import. ## Visma Net *To setup import:* : 1. Select import source **Visma Net** in the list. 2. Click on **Connect client**. 3. Select which client you want to link in the client list that appears in Visma Net. : > [!NOTE] The user in Period & Year must ensure that they have access to the same clients in Visma Net and Period & Year in order to be able to connect the clients and later run imports. 4. Select branches if the client you are connected to uses multiple branches. :

The clients and/or branches in Visma Net and Period & Year MUST use the same organization number.

: 5. Click on **Save changes**. The client is now connected to the associated client in Visma Net and ready for import. : 6. Click on the button **Import from Visma Net** to start the import. : > [!NOTE] Reconnect client The connection to the client in Visma Net is valid for 3 months. You must then reconnect to import new accounting data. ## Business NXT *To setup import:* : 1. Select import source **Business NXT** in the list. 2. Select **Import from Business NXT** to start the import. : : > [!NOTE] The user in Period & Year must ensure that the clients in Business NXT and Period & Year use the same organization number. ## 24SevenOffice *To setup import:* : 1. Select import source **24SevenOffice** in the list. 2. Enter your ERP **User name** and **Password**and save your changes. 3. Select **Import from 24SevenOffice** to start the import. ## DNB Regnskap *To setup import:* : 1. Select import source **DNB Regnskap** in the list. 2. Select **Import from DNB Regnskap** to start the import. 3. Fill in the username and password to login to DNB Regnskap. > [!NOTE] The login to DNB Regnskap is valid for 45 days then you must reconnect to import new accounting data. 4. Click **Allow** to give Period & Year access to your data in DNB Regnskap. 5. Select which client to import from the client list in DNB Regnskap. 6. Click **Continue** to start the import process and be redirected to Period & Year. ## Duett Økonomi *To setup import:* : 1. Select import source **Duett Økonomi** in the list. 2. Paste your Duett Økonomi **Client API key** for authentication and save your changes.

Client API key can be found in the following menu in Duett Economy: Settings - Company setup integrations

Read more about activation of the integration at [Duett Økonomi](https://duett.no/regnskapsprogram/integrasjoner/visma-periode-ar). 3. Click **Save changes**. 4. Click **Import from Duett Økonomi** to start the import. ## Eika Regnskap *To setup import:* : 1. Select import source **Eika Regnskap** in the list. 2. Click **Import from Eika Regnskap** to start the import. 3. Fill in the username and password to login to Eika Regnskap. > [!NOTE] The login to Eika Regnskap is valid for 45 days then you must reconnect to import new accounting data. 4. Click **Allow** to give Period & Year access to your data in Eika Regnskap. 5. Select which client to import from the client list in Eika Regnskap. 6. Click **Continue** to start the import process and be redirected to Period & Year. ## SpareBank 1 Regnskap *To setup import:* : 1. Select import source **SpareBank 1 Regnskap** in the list. 2. Select **Import from SpareBank 1 Regnskap** to start the import. 3. Fill in the username and password to login to SpareBank 1 Regnskap. > [!NOTE] The login to SpareBank 1 Regnskap is valid for 45 days then you must reconnect to import new accounting data. 4. Click **Allow** to give Period & Year access to your data in SpareBank 1 Regnskap. 5. Select which client to import from the client list in SpareBank 1 Regnskap. 6. Click **Continue** to start the import process and be redirected to Period & Year. ## Unimicro *To setup import:* : 1. Select import source **Unimicro** in the list. 2. Select **Import from Unimicro** to start the import. 3. Fill in the username and password to login to Unimicro. > [!NOTE] The login to Unimicro is valid for 45 days then you must reconnect to import new accounting data. 4. Click **Allow** to give Period & Year access to your data in Uni Economy. 5. Select which client to import from the client list in Unimicro. 6. Click **Continue** to start the import process and be redirected to Period & Year. ## Xledger *To setup import:* : 1. Select import source **Xledger** in the list. 2. Paste your Xledger *API token*. - The API token can be found under the following menu options in Xledger and requires the user to have the role of administrator: Administration > System Access > GraphQL > API Tokens - It is recommended to create your own named API token for the use of Period & Year and which respectively has read and write access to the following scopes: | Scope | Read access | Write access | | :---------------- | :------: | :----: | | *Common:* | | | | - Company | x | | | - Entity | x | | | - ObjectValue | x | | | - Period | x | | | - PeriodStatusItem | x | | | - Url | x | | | *General ledger:* | | | | - Account | x | | | - Account balance | x | | | - GLImportItem | x | x | | - JournalEntry | x | | | - Transaction | x | | | - TransactionHeader | x | | 3. Click **Save changes**. 4. Click **Import from Xledger** to start the import. > [!NOTE] The user in Period & Year must ensure that the clients in XLedger and Period & Year use the same organization number. ## SAF-T file *To set up import:* : 1. Select import source **SAF-T file** in the list. *The import supports the following file formats:* - SAF-T files in XML format. - SAF-T files in XML format packed in ZIP format. 2. Select **Import from SAF-T file** and **Select file** button to select your file. 3. Click **Continue** to start the import process. ## SIE4 file *To set up import:* : 1. Select import source **SIE4** file in the list. 2. Select **Import from SIE4 file** and **Select file** button to select your file. 3. Click **Continue** to start the import process. ## Microsoft Excel To set up import: : 1. Select import source **Microsoft Excel** in the list. When importing from Microsoft Excel, it is important that the file has the following format layout. | | | | | | | |----|----|----|----|----|----| | Column A2 | Column B2 | Column C2 | Column C1 | Column D2 | Column D1 | | Account number | Account description | Closing balance | Year | Closing balance | Year | ![](./img/ExcelImportFormat.JPG) **Account number** - One row for each account in the trial balance for the actual accounting year. **Account description** - Assigned account name from the accounts (ERP system). **Closing balance** - Closing balance on the actual account for the imported accounting year. **Year** - Year-end closing year, can be last year and/or this year. When importing deviating accounting years, the following format must be used in the heading for the year: dd.mm.yyyy-dd.mm.yyyy ![](./img/ExcelImportDeviatingYear.JPG) Import from Excel does not include any transactional data, only annual balances. This means that it is more relevant for Year-end closing than for Period-end. An excel file can contain up to two accounting years, which makes it possible to import the current and previous year from the same Excel file. If you choose to import two financial years in separate Excel files, you must ensure that you import the previous year before the current year. This is necessary for the program to calculate the correct opening balance for the current year.

A standard client chart of accounts based on the reference chart of accounts in Period & Year is created automatically during import.

2. Click on **Import from Microsoft Excel** and the **Select file** button to select your file. 3. Click **Continue** to start the import process. > [!NOTE]Last three financial years When importing data from the ERP system, all accounting data from the last three financial years that you have created in the ERP system is imported into Period & Year. Deviating accounting year /periodandyear/help/start-page/import/deviating-accounting-year page 2024-10-14T16:23:18+02:00 # Deviating accounting year For seasonal businesses, you have the option in Period & Year to prepare annual report with deviating financial years. For example, it could be a ski resort where you want to have the winter season in its entirety in a financial year. The financial year can then, for example, be the period from 1 July to 30 June. Annual report entities that are branches of, or subsidiaries in Norway of, a foreign enterprise that uses a different financial year than the calendar year, can choose to use deviating financial years in order to have the same financial year as the foreign enterprise. Period & Year supports the import of clients with deviating accounting years from Total, Finale and Altinn.

All areas should be reviewed after conversion to Period & Year, and we point out that certain elements under the following areas must be filled in manually/checked:

  • Trial balance; check alternative links

  • Various information - State aid, relevant public support is added manually

  • Property, check calculated wealth values from the Tax Agency

  • Financial products, check that financial products are displayed under the right tab and tick the exemption method if relevant

  • Taxi and cargo transport businesses; taximeter type is added manually

  • Accommodation and public house; any sales revenue in cash and cash register type are added manually

  • Group contributions, attachment and treatment rule must be entered manually

  • Wealth, overridden values from RF-1028 Tax declaration must be added to the field Other wealth from commercial activities

  • Salary and pension costs, relevant additional lines for correction of reconciliation are added manually

When importing to a new deviating accounting year, it may happen that the client has a balance on the reference account 2500 "Betalbar skatt, ikke fastsatt". This balance may apply to the previous deviating accounting year\'s allocated payable tax that has not yet been paid. If that is the case, the relevant balance must be reposted from the reference account 2500 "Betalbar skatt, ikke fastsatt" to reference account 2510 "Betalbar skatt, fastsatt". This is to avoid errors in this year\'s taxable cost. After reposting, you must go to **Wealth** and correct the relevant amount in the manual field on the row \'Code 2510 Payable tax, determined\'. This is to avoid the amount being erroneously included in the company\'s wealth. #### Procedure in Period & Year {#procedure-in-period-year} Importing accounting data that spans over two calendar years will be interpreted by Period & Year as a deviating fiscal year and this is displayed under **Settings** in the heading of imported data where the relevant period is displayed, for example 2023/2024. On the **Start page**, you enter the deviating financial year in the same way as when preparing an ordinary year-end closing. When you enter the period **Year-end closing**, please note that constants and other amount limits apply to the income year in which the deviating financial year expires. This is because it is the tax rules for the income year/calendar year in which the deviating financial year expires that must be used. This applies, for example, to depreciation rates and other rates/amount limits that are important for determining the tax base. Prepare the year-end closing and submit the **Annual report** as soon as this has been completed and determined. When the next year-end closing version is ready in Period & Year, you can submit the **Tax return** when it opens up for submission to Altinn. Please note that there may have been changes to the program in connection with the new year-end closing version, which means that some data will have to be changed in order to match the previously submitted annual report and the determination of the tax return. After the tax return has been submitted for the previous year-end closing period, you can import the following year\'s deviating financial year and begin the preparation of the year-end closing and submission of the annual report. Read more about [Client with deviating fiscal year.](/periodandyear/help/client/client-companies/deviating-accounting-year). Reporting periods /periodandyear/help/start-page/periods page 2024-09-30T16:52:08+02:00 # Reporting periods When data has been imported into Period & Year, the start page will show all periods of all financial years that have been imported according to selected reporting period when the client was created. It is possible to change rerporting period when working with period closing in Period & Year. Read more about [Change reporting period](/periodandyear/help/settings/company-information/change-reporting-period).

The period that you are currently working with can be seen on all views in Period & Year, in the top right corner of the page.

## Lock periods When you have completed the reconciliation of a period, you lock it on the start page.

A period must be locked before you can start working with the next period.

It is possible to add data to a period that is not yet started, such as an external appendix, however you cannot add amounts. If you need to add more information to a period that is already locked, it can be unlocked temporarily. The next period will then be paused, so that you only work in one period at a time. You can add external appendices and add accounts to appendices in a paused period, but you cannot add amounts. You can always view locked periods. If a period is locked, the checks will not be run for this period, so the results of the checks will remain the same. Copying of data between periods /periodandyear/help/start-page/copying-between-periods page 2024-09-30T16:52:08+02:00 # Copying of data between periods Only appendices with the setting **Yes, with data** are copied between regular periods (P1-P2 up to P11-P12). When P12 is locked and the year-end period (P13) is started, the following is copied from P12 to P13: - Account statuses. - Statuses and comments in the checklist. - All appendices created during P12 (regardless of setting).

All external appendices with the setting Yes, with data to year-end period created during the year are also copied to P13.

Also, the following rules applies when copying between P12, P13 and P1: - If P12 is locked and P13 is not started, appendices with the setting **Yes, with data** are copied from P12 to P1 when P1 is started. - If P12 is locked and P13 is started, appendices with the setting **Yes, with data** are copied from P13 to P1 when P1 is started. - If P13 is locked and P1 is started, appendices are copied from P13 to P1. Run auto checks /periodandyear/help/start-page/run-checks page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Run auto checks The automated checks in Period & Year can be run from the page **Transaction analysis**. The outcome of the checks are shown in the overview and appendices in **Reconciliation BS**, and in the overview in **Analysis IS**, as well as under **Transaction analysis**.

Period & Year comes with a set of default checks. These cannot be changed or deleted. They can, however, be disabled. You can also add your own checks. Read more in Check settings.

 Period and year-end closing /periodandyear/help/taxation section Work with Reconciliation BS/Analysis IS. Export closing entries to ERP. Financial statements and Reports. Information and tax. Complete and submit annual report 2025-03-25T07:49:38+01:00 # Period and year-end closing Work with Reconciliation BS/Analysis IS. Export closing entries to ERP. Financial statements and Reports. Information and tax. Complete and submit annual report When you work with period closing and year-end closing you can use the program sections [Reconciliation BS](/periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs), [Analysis IS](/periodandyear/help/taxation/analysis-is), [Closing entries](/periodandyear/help/taxation/closing-entries), [Financial statements](/periodandyear/help/taxation/financial-statements) and [Reports](/periodandyear/help/taxation/reports). When you work with year-end closing you can also work with [Information and tax (impersonal)](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal), [Information and tax (personal)](/periodandyear/help/taxation/personal), [Information and tax (participant taxed)](/periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed) and [Annual report](/periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report). Trial balance /periodandyear/help/taxation/trial-balance page View imported trial balance, edit account settings, download trial balance to Excel or Finale Konsolidering. 2024-09-30T16:52:08+02:00 # Trial balance View imported trial balance, edit account settings, download trial balance to Excel or Finale Konsolidering. In **Year-end closing - Trial balance** you will find a trial balance for this and last year. For each client account it is possible to see which reference account it is mapped to. By hovering over the rows you will see a pen icon in the **Edit**column. If you click on this icon you will be able to edit the current mapping. Select **Show All** to show all accounts. > [!TIP] You can download chart of accounts and trial balance to excel by clicking on the **Download trial balance as excel** --icon ![](./img/DownloadAsExcelIcon.PNG) in the upper right corner. It is also possible to download a text file supported for import to Finale konsolidering. ## Field explanations Client chart of accounts and Description : Client account plan with **Account number** and **Account description**. Read more in [Chart of accounts](/periodandyear/help/settings/chart-of-accounts). Reference account : Reference accounts that are currently mapped to the client accounts. If you wish to change these mappings, click on the edit icon to make your changes. Edit : Open the dialog to edit your client account mapping. Imported values : Imported values contain all imported balance values for this year. Year-end postings : Year-end postings contains values posted through manual and/or system vouchers. This year (Year) : This column contains the closing balance on the client account. Last year (Year) : This column contains last year\'s closing balance. Reconciliation BS /periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs section Account analysis, appendices and automated reconciliation of VAT & fees. 2024-10-14T16:23:18+02:00 # Reconciliation BS Account analysis, appendices and automated reconciliation of VAT & fees. **Reconciliation BS** is located under both **Period closing** and **Year-end closing**. When you have selected an account or an account group on the left side of the page, and navigate between the views **Overview** and **Documentation**, that account or account group will remain highlighted and the relevant information for that account or account group is shown in each view. Read more about the different views in the topics below. Overview, reconciliation BS /periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/overview section 2024-10-31T15:49:19+01:00 # Overview, reconciliation BS **Reconciliation BS - Overview** is located under both **Period closing** and **Year-end closing**. The overview in **Reconciliation BS** lists all the balance accounts that have transactions recorded on them up to and including the period that you are currently working with.

The columns that are shown differ depending on the size of the screen that you are working on. On a smaller screen, only the most important columns are shown.

## Expand the level of detail in the Reconciliation BS You can expand the level of detail in **Reconciliation BS - Overview** by drilling down to the journal entries recorded on the accounts. Amounts that are available for drill-down are underlined and will change their colour to blue when you hover over them in the overview. Click on an amount available for drill-down to open a dialogue named **Account analysis**, which displays all the journal entries attached to that specific account. In **Account analysis**, the opening balance for the selected account and period is shown above the journal entry list, while the closing balance for the selected account and period is displayed at the bottom of the list. The journal entry list contains entry date and number, along with the current change, the closing balance after each journal entry and a transaction text. From within **Account analysis**, it is possible to select a different account in the account selector in the top left. You can also adjust the period displayed in the period selector in the top right. Click on the arrow next to a journal entry in the list to expand it and display a more detailed view of that particular entry. This view contains the debit and credit accounts, the booked amounts and the transaction text. ### View attachments in the account analysis To view an attachment to a journal entry in the account analysis, click on the paper clip icon in the **Attachments** column. Choose which document you want to preview in the dialogue box that opens. In the preview window, you can download the attached document by clicking on the **Download** button and then easily drag it into an external appendix. It is also possible to create a new external appendix, to which the document is automatically linked by selecting **Add to appendix** in viewing mode. ## Field explanations Reconciliation amount : You can choose to enter the reconciliation amount either directly on the overview, or on the appendices. If you have an integration with eAccounting, some of the amounts in this column will be automatically filled in when you import accounting data. Reconciliation difference : If there is a difference between the closing balance and the reconciliation amount on an account, the difference will show up in this column. You can choose to create a closing entry for this difference by clicking on the blue icon in the column **Reconciliation difference**. Any closing entries that you have created can be seen under **Closing entries**. Read more in [Closing entries](/periodandyear/help/taxation/closing-entries). Documentation : If an account or an account group has a documentation linked to it, the paper clip icon in this column will be blue, otherwise it will be grey. When you click on a grey paper clip icon you are able to go directly to the documentation for that account or account group, or add documentation. : To add documentation, click on the paper clip icon, select **Add documentation** and choose which documentation you want to add. : When you have selected a document and click on **Add** you are redirected to the view **Documentation** and can continue to work with the documentation as usual. If you add a document to an account, that account will automatically be added to the document that is created. No account will be added if you add a document to an account group. : When you click on a blue paper clip icon, a list of all the documentation linked to that account is shown, as well as the link to the summary. Auto checks : This column shows the result of the automated checks that have been run. : A red icon indicates that the check has found something. When you click on the icon you will get more detailed information. : An orange icon indicates that the check could not run. An example of this is that the check is supposed to compare previous periods, but there are no previous periods imported into Period & Year. : A green icon indicates that a check has been run, but nothing was found. : Divergent check results can be marked as done using the button **Mark check as done**. When you mark a check result as done, the icon changes its appearance and becomes grey with a green check mark in the lower right corner. : You only need to mark a check result as done once, which means that if you mark a check result for an account in the reconciliation BS as done, the same check check result will also be marked as done in **Transaction analysis**. : If a check result no longer is up to date due to a subsequent change, it will lose its status as done and the icon changes its appearance to indicate that the result needs to be updated. : Read more in [Auto checks](/periodandyear/help/transaction-analysis/auto-checks). Checklist status : This column indicates the status of the task list for that account. : A grey icon indicates that no tasks have been marked as done, a blue icon indicates that some tasks have been marked as done, and a green icon indicates that all tasks are marked as done. The icon is also a short cut to the tab **Checklist**. Hover over the icon to see how many tasks are completed. Done : When you have finished reconciling an account you mark it as **Done**. If you mark an account group as done, all accounts belonging to that account will be marked as done. Quality assurance : The functionality for internal quality assurance, available in the **QA** column, provides support when documenting the quality assurance done at your accounting office. : After reviewing the work done on an account or account group, the person who is the quality assurer can log in and go to the column **QA** in the right and click on the icon to change the status of the account or account group. There are two choices available: **Approved** and **Not approved**. To revert the status of an account or account group, select **Reset status**. : When you select **Approved** for an account or account group, its status icon in the **QA** column turns green. Hover over the icon to display the date and the time for the approval, along with the quality reviewer's name. If the quality reviewer has been deleted from the accounting office, they will be displayed as **Unknown user**. : When you select **Not approved** for an account or account group, the status icon in the **QA** column turns orange and you will be able to add a comment. Hover over the icon to display the date and the time for when the status was set, along with the quality reviewer's name. If a comment was entered, this will be displayed in the side panel. : When you select **Reset status**, the status icon in the **QA** column turns grey and returns to its original value. Reconciliation plan /periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/overview/reconciliation-plan page 2024-09-30T16:52:08+02:00 # Reconciliation plan When a client is connected to a reconciliation template, you will be able to filter the balance in the **Balance reconciliation** view according to what the frequency of the template is set up with and other properties. The reconciliation plan can easily be turned off to display accounts that are defined outside the reconciliation plan. When the reconciliation plan is turned off, the balance reconciliation will display all accounts with a balance. Completion and/or Quality Assurance of Accounts can be done using the two columns on the far right of the balance reconciliation window. The same functionality will apply when a reconciliation plan is deactivated for the period. If an account is completed/quality-assured outside the reconciliation plan and then the reconciliation plan is activated, those accounts will appear in the reconciliation plan along with the accounts defined in the reconciliation template.

Changing the reconciliation plan on a client

For users without admin access, it is possible to change the reconciliation template on the client. This is done under Settings and Company Information. Changing the template will affect the current open period and the subsequent start of new periods.

> [!NOTE] > If you wish to change the template for a reopened period, the change will only apply to the reopened period if the following period is paused. Read more about [Templates for reconciliation plan.](/periodandyear/help/administration/templates-for-reconciliation) Documentation, reconciliation BS /periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/appendices section 2024-10-14T16:23:18+02:00 # Documentation, reconciliation BS **Reconciliation BS - Documentation** is located under both **Period closing** and **Year-end closing**. Under **Reconciliation BS - Documentation**, you work with documentation that facilitate both calculations and reconciliations for your accounts. There are different documentations that you can use: [summary](/periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/appendices/main), [documentation](/periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/appendices/sub), [external documentation](/periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/appendices/external) and [automatically generated documentation](/periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/appendices/automatically-generated). Summary /periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/appendices/main page 2024-10-14T16:23:18+02:00 # Summary When you import accounting data, either from eAccounting or a SAF-T file or from a SIE4 file, a summary is created for all account groups. You can add rows to each summary. If a reconciliation difference occurs, you can create a closing entry by clicking on the blue icon in the column **Reconciliation difference**.

If you have manually added rows on a main appendix, you can copy these to the next period. The default setting copies the data to the next period. However, you can choose not to copy the data by changing the setting at the bottom of the screen. The setting you choose is kept for future periods until you change it. The data is transferred to the next period when you start it. If you change the setting in a locked period, the changes will not be transferred to the next, already started, period.

 Documentation /periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/appendices/sub page 2024-10-14T16:23:18+02:00 # Documentation Documentation can be created in two ways. Either directly from the view **Overview**, or from the view **Documentation**. To create a documentation from the view **Overview**, click on the paper clip icon in the column **Documentation** on the account or the account group. To create a documenation from the view **Documentation**, select the account or the account group and click on the paper clip icon on the right side of the page. The list shows the most common documentations for that account or account group. Select the document you want to create and fill in the information.

If a documentation is added from an account, that account number will be pre-selected as Account in the documentation. If a documentation is added from an account group, Account will be empty.

 External documentation /periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/appendices/external page 2024-10-14T16:23:18+02:00 # External documentation The way to upload one or several files to an account or account group in **Reconciliation BS** or **Analysis IS**, is to create an external appendix. You can do this in two ways: 1\. Drag the files from your computer and drop them directly on the account or account group. ![](./img/ExternalAppendicesAlt1.gif) 2\. From the **Overview** or **Documentation** view, click on the clip icon and select **Add external documentation**. Then select the files to add. ![](./img/ExternalAppendicesAlt2.gif)

When you drop files on an account group or have no account selected, the attchment will be linked to the account group.

It's possible to link several accounts to the same file. You can even link accounts from different account groups.

You can upload a maximum of 12 files to the same appendix. Each file can be a maximum of 10 MB.

The supported file types are PDF, Word, Excel and image files. Note that if you download a Word or Excel file for editing, you must remove the old file before you upload the updated version. If you choose to copy the documentation with data to a future period, all of its attachments are copied. If you click on the link for the uploaded file, the document will be downloaded. If you only want to see the contents of the document, you can instead easily preview the document by clicking on the image icon to the right of the link to the uploaded document. To delete an attached file, click on the trash bin next to the file. An external appendix can also be created from the **Account analysis** dialogue, which is opened when you click on an underlined amount (which means that the account has journal entries attached to it). Open the attachment that you wish to add to an external appendix and select **Add to document** in viewing mode.

Note that the printout will not work if a password protected PDF is uploaded to the appendix along with other files. In order to include the file in the printout, the password must be removed.

 Automatically generated documentation /periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/appendices/automatically-generated page 2024-10-14T16:23:18+02:00 # Automatically generated documentation Period & Year generates some documentation automatically, when you have an integration with eAccounting. This means that the amount in the column **Reconciliation amount** in the overview is automatically filled in and a documentation is added when you import accounting data from eAccounting. The automatically generated appendices are **Accounts receivable ledger**, **Accounts payable ledger**, **Doubtful debt** and **Allocation of costs and revenue** Copying of documentation to future periods /periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/appendices/copying-to-future-periods page 2024-10-14T16:23:18+02:00 # Copying of documentation to future periods You can choose to copy your documentation with or without data to a future period. The options for copying are found at the bottom right of each document. The copying will occur when the period to which the documentation shall be copied is started. ## Summary - **Yes**: all manually added rows will be copied to the next period. - **No**: no manually added rows will be copied.

Yes is the default option.

## External documentation - period closing - **Yes, with data (periodically ongoing)**: the documentation is copied to the next period with name, selected account, reconciliation amount and uploaded files. - **Yes, with data (until year-end)**: the documentation is copied to the next period with name, selected account, reconciliation amount and uploaded files. Copying will proceed until the end of the current financial year. - **Yes, with data only to year-end period**: the documentation is copied to the year-end period (not the periods in between) with name, selected account, reconciliation amount and uploaded files. - **Yes, without data (periodically ongoing)**: the documentation is copied to the next period with name and selected account. - **Yes, without data (until year-end)**: the documentation is copied to the next period with name and selected account. Copying will proceed until the end of the current financial year. - **No, do not copy**: the documentation is not copied at all.

Yes, with data (periodically ongoing) is the default option.

## External documentation - year-end closing - **Yes, with data (periodically ongoing)**: the documentation is copied to the next period with name, selected account, reconciliation amount and uploaded files. - **Yes, with data to next year-end period**: the documentation is copied to the next year-end period (not the periods in between) with name, selected account, reconciliation amount and uploaded files. - **Yes, without data (periodically ongoing)**: the documentation is copied to the next period with name and selected account. - **Yes, without data to next year-end period**: the documentation is copied to the next year-end period (not the periods in between) with name and selected account. - **No, do not copy**: the documentation is not copied at all.

Yes, with data (periodically ongoing) is the default option.

## Other documentation - period closing - **Yes, with data (periodically ongoing)**: the documentation is copied to the next period with name, selected account and all the information in the appendix. - **Yes, with data (until year-end)**: the documentation is copied to the next period with name, selected account, reconciliation amount and uploaded files. Copying will proceed until the end of the current financial year. - **Yes, without data (periodically ongoing)**: the documentation is copied to the next period with name and selected account. - **Yes, without data (until year-end)**: the documentation is copied to the next period with name and selected account. Copying will proceed until the end of the current financial year. - **No, do not copy**: the documentation is not copied at all.

Yes, with data (periodically ongoing) is the default option.

## Other documentation - year-end closing - **Yes, with data (periodically ongoing)**: the documentation is copied to the next period with name, selected account and all the information in the appendix. - **Yes, with data to next year-end period**: the documentation is copied to the next year-end period (not the periods in between) with name, selected account and all information in the appendix. - **Yes, without data (periodically ongoing)**: the documentation is copied to the next period with name and selected account. - **Yes, without data to next year-end period**: the documentation is copied to the next year-end period (not the periods in between) with name and selected account. - **No, do not copy**: the documentation is not copied at all.

Yes, with data (periodically ongoing) is the default option.

## Copy documentation from previous period Once a documentation has been copied and then updated in a previous period, it can be re-copied to the active period. 1\. In the active period, go to the documentation that you want to update. 2\. Select **Copy previous**. 3\. In the dialog box that appears, answer **Yes**. The documentation from the previous period will be copied and replace the documentation in the active period. VAT & fees, reconciliation BS /periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/vat-and-fees section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # VAT & fees, reconciliation BS VAT from 2022 /periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/vat-and-fees/vat2022 page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # VAT from 2022 The module for VAT reconciliation is found under **VAT & fees - VAT** in the reconciliation balance sheet. It is automatically updated with accounting data imported to Period & Year. The module for VAT reconciliation in Period & Year consists of the same sections and rows that are used in the VAT return in Norwegian Tax Administration. It is automatically updated with the accounting data imported to the program, and gives you a good overview of the company's registered VAT, the VAT reported to Norwegian Tax Administration, and possible differences between the registered and the reported amounts. You will also find information about payments and/or repayments that are made. The reconciliation appendix **VAT specification** is created automatically from the VAT reconciliation as default. You can use it for continuous reconciliation, as well as reconciliation at year-end.

The VAT reconciliation is based on the usage of account 2740 for VAT settlement.

VAT return submitted can be imported from Altinn, and must be downloaded before the active period is reconciled. It is important to download from Altinn before starting the reconciliation work. Periods that are locked will not be affected by data being imported from Altinn. ## Selection of VAT period The selection of VAT period is made by the accounting system when reporting the VAT return and is updated in Period & Year when downloading the VAT return from Altinn. Information about this can be found at the top left of the **VAT** screen under **VAT & Taxes** in the balance sheet reconciliation. In Period & Year, viewing for **Monthly**, **Bi-monthly** and **Yearly** is supported. **Bi-monthly** is often the standard option. If monthly VAT reconciliation, a column is created for each month. If bi-monthly VAT reconciliation, a column is created for Jan-Feb, a column for Mar-Apr, and so on ### Changing VAT periods during an ongoing financial year It is possible to change VAT periods during an ongoing financial year, but as mentioned earlier, this must be done in the accounting system in connection with reporting the VAT return. When changing VAT periods, note that: - Previous reconciliation periods will not be affected by the change. - It is not possible to change VAT periods in locked reconciliation periods. ## The structure of the VAT reconciliation The module for VAT reconciliation consists of rows of general ledger accounts and VAT codes. Bookkept values on the general ledger accounts in the 27xx series appear in the column for Bookkept, and reported values on the VAT codes appear in the column for VAT return. It has the same structure as when reporting a VAT return to Norwegian Tax Administration/Altinn. ### Which accounts are mapped to which rows? InPeriod & Year, client accounts are connected to reference accounts. Each row with client accounts in the VAT reconciliation is mapped to a reference account, which in turn determines which one of the client accounts that are respectively displayed under the grouping of **Outgoing tax** and **Incoming tax**. Only accounts with registered transactions are displayed. ### Display transactions It is possible to display the journal entries that are registered on the accounts in the VAT reconciliation. Underlined amounts are clickable and when you click on one of those, the **Account analysis** dialogue is opened. In this dialogue, all of the transactions that have been registered on the account are listed. ## Field explanations Bookkept : The **Bookkept** column is automatically updated with values retrieved from account balances. If any of the account values are changed, the VAT module shall be updated as long as the period is ongoing. VAT return : In the **VAT return** column, the values reported to Norwegian Tax Administration are imported from Altinn. : If a bi-monthly or yearly VAT period has been reported, the last month in the period must be ongoing in order for you to show a value here. During ongoing, but not yet finished, VAT periods, preliminary amounts are displayed in this column to avoid differences. : These preliminary amounts are the same as the ones that are displayed on the corresponding rows in the **Bookkept** column. Difference : The values in the **Difference** column are calculated and filled out automatically, using the formula Bookkept minus Reported. Total due (+) / returned (-) : The program automatically calculates the total VAT debt or VAT recoverable, based on the registered input and output VAT, on the row **Total. due (+) / returned (-)**. The source system for VAT return : When downloading from Altinn, you get information about which accounting system has been used when reporting the VAT return. This is shown per. VAT period in column for VAT return Payment information : Payments or repayments are registered under this section with amount, voucher number and payment date. The amount is entered in the VAT period which the payment/repayment concerns, and not in the period when the payment/repayment was made. : [Example]{.underline} : If you have a VAT debt for January/February and the payment is made on April 10th. When you perform the VAT reconciliation in March and April, you register the payment in the column for January/February and select April 10th as payment date. Reconciliation documentation : The reconciliation appendix **VAT specification** is created automatically from the VAT reconciliation as default. You can deactivate (and reactivate) this functionality down to the left. The appendix is connected to the client account that is mapped to reference account 2740. : If any of the amounts in the VAT reports are changed, the appendix is updated automatically with the changes as long as the period is ongoing. : If you want to change any of the values on the appendix, you must do so via the VAT reconciliation. : To remove the appendix from an ongoing period, you must deactivate its auto-generation from the VAT reconciliation. : Depending on your selected VAT period, the appendix will be created: : - For each month, if you have selected the monthly VAT period. - In the last month of each two months, if you have selected thebi-monthly VAT period. - In the year-end period, if you have selected the yearly VAT period. VAT until 2021 /periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/vat-and-fees/vat page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # VAT until 2021 The module for VAT reconciliation is found under **VAT & fees - VAT** in the reconciliation balance sheet. It is automatically updated with accounting data imported to Period & Year. The module for VAT reconciliation in Period & Year consists of the same sections and rows that are used in VAT report of the [Tax authority]{.mc-variable .MyVariables.Tax_authorities .variable}. It is automatically updated with the accounting data imported to the program, and gives you a good overview of the company's registered VAT, the VAT reported to [Tax authority]{.mc-variable .MyVariables.Tax_authorities .variable}, and possible differences between the registered and the reported amounts. You will also find information about transfers to the account for VAT settlement, and payments and/or repayments made. The reconciliation appendix **VAT specification** is created automatically from the VAT reconciliation as default. You can use it for continuous reconciliation, as well as reconciliation at year-end.

The VAT reconciliation is based on the usage of account 2740 for VAT settlement.

VAT report submitted can either be registered manually or imported from Altinn. If the active period is reconciled before the VAT report is submitted to Altinn, data must be registered. Later, data for this period will be updated with data sent to Altinn using the function for importing VAT data from Altinn. Periods that are locked will not be affected by data being imported from Altinn. ## Select a VAT period Before you get started, you need to select a VAT period for the company. This is done at the top of the left hand panel. You can choose between **Monthly**, **Bi-monthly** and **Yearly**. **Bi-monthly** is the default selection. If you choose monthly VAT reconciliation, one column for each month is created. If you choose bi-monthly VAT reconciliation, one column for Jan-Feb, one column for Mar-Apr, and so on, are created. ### Changing VAT periods during an ongoing financial year It is possible to change VAT periods during an ongoing financial year, even when the previous reconciliation months are locked. When changing VAT periods, note that: - Previous reconciliation periods will not be affected by the change. - Manually added values from the previous VAT periods will not be copied to the new VAT period. - It is not possible to change VAT periods in locked reconciliation periods. ## The structure of the VAT reconciliation The module for VAT reconciliation consists of different sections with numbered rows. This is the same structure that is used in [Tax authority]{.mc-variable .MyVariables.Tax_authorities .variable}s VAT report. ### Which accounts are mapped to which rows? In Period & Year, client accounts are connected to reference accounts. Each row in the VAT reconciliation is mapped to one or more reference accounts, which in turn determine which one of the client accounts that are displayed under each row. Only accounts with registered transactions are displayed. Click on a row to view its underlying accounts. ### Display transactions It is possible to display the journal entries that are registered on the accounts in the VAT reconciliation. Underlined amounts are clickable and when you click on one of those, the **Account analysis** dialogue is opened. In this dialogue, all of the transactions that have been registered on the account are listed. ## Field explanations Transferred VAT : When input and output VAT have been transferred to and recorded on the account for VAT settlement, the transferred VAT will be displayed on a separate row below each affected VAT account. Bookkept : The **Bookkept** column is automatically updated with values retrieved from account balances. If any of the account values are changed, the VAT module shall be updated as long as the period is ongoing. Reported : In the **Reported** column, the values reported to [Tax authority]{.mc-variable .MyVariables.Tax_authorities .variable} are imported from Altinn or entered manually.If you have selected a bi-monthly or yearly VAT period, or yearly VAT period, the last month in the period must be ongoing in order for you to enter a value here. During ongoing, but not yet finished, VAT periods, preliminary amounts are displayed in this column to avoid differences. : These preliminary amounts are the same as the ones that are displayed on the corresponding rows in the **Bookkept** column. Difference : The values in the **Difference** column are calculated and filled out automatically, using the formula Bookkept minus Reported. VAT due (+) or returned (-) : The program automatically calculates the total VAT debt or VAT recoverable, based on the registered input and output VAT, on the row **Total. VAT due (+) or returned (-)**. : Payments or repayments are registered on the row below. An automatic recalculation of the remaining debt or recoverable is then performed. The amount is entered in the VAT period which the payment/repayment concerns, and not in the period when the payment/repayment was made. : Example : You have a VAT debt for January and the payment is made on April 10th. When you perform the VAT reconciliation in March and April, you register the payment in the column for January/February and select April 10th as payment date. Reconciliation documentation : The reconciliation appendix **VAT specification** is created automatically from the VAT reconciliation as default. You can deactivate (and reactivate) this functionality down to the left. The appendix is connected to the client account that is mapped to reference account 2740. : If any of the amounts in the VAT reports are changed, the appendix is updated automatically with the changes as long as the period is ongoing. : If you want to change any of the values on the appendix, you must do so via the VAT reconciliation. : To remove the appendix from an ongoing period, you must deactivate its auto-generation from the VAT reconciliation. : Depending on your selected VAT period, the appendix will be created: : - For each month, if you have selected the monthly VAT period. - In the last month of each two months, if you have selected the bi-monthly VAT period. - In the year-end period, if you have selected the yearly VAT period. Salaries and Salary Taxes /periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/vat-and-fees/salares-salary-taxes page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Salaries and Salary Taxes The function **Salaries and Salary Taxes** is available for **Period closing** and **Year-end closing** and is found under **Reconciliation BS - VAT & fees**. Employer tax reconciliation is an automated reconciliation of data from various sources: Reconciling the basis for salary taxes by comparing: - Basis for salary taxes based on the book amounts in the accounts. - Basis for salary taxes reported on A-messages sent to Altinn. Reconciliation of the period\'s Salary taxes by comparing: - Estimated salary taxes based on the book amounts in the accounts. - Estimated salary taxes from reporting on A-messages sent to Altinn. Reconciliation of salary taxes due by comparing: - Chargeable salary taxes in the accounts (account with reference account 2770). - Reporting of salary taxes on last term on A-messages sent to Altinn. Reconciliation of payroll reporting by comparing: - Salary payments etc. in the period based on amounts in the accounts. - Salary payments etc. during the period reported on A-messages submitted to Altinn. Cost accounts and debt accounts from the accounts are identified from the accounts reference account in the client\'s account plan in Period & Year. The feature for retrieving data from Altinn automatically fills in an order (form A-06) that generates a message (A07) for each month and for the year so far, which is retrieved in the background from Altinn. This information contains information about both salary, basis for salary taxes and salary taxes that are filled out in the reconciliation. By extracting data from Altinn and the financial system and comparing it, the reconciliation is performed and documented for account 2770 Unpaid salary taxes. The only thing the user needs to do is check and enter voucher information (voucher number, date and amount) for when payment of the term is made. By checking to **Create Salary tax appendix Automatically**, reconciliation attachments will be produced for account 2770 Unpaid salary taxes. If there are differences in reconciliation, it may be advisable to first check that all relevant expense and balance accounts are linked to the correct reference account. Linking to a reference account is what ensures that an account is correctly identified in terms of reporting and employer duty. The reference accounts used are as follows: Cost Accounts liable to salary taxes basis and payroll reporting basis : | Reference accounts | Account name | |----|----| | 5000 | Wages & salaries to employees, variable, ENIC, reportable | | 5005 | Agreed tariff allowances, variable, ENIC, reportable | | 5090 | Accruals account wages and salaries, variable, ENIC, reportable | | 5091 | Accrued salaries, variable, ENIC, reportable | | 5092 | Holiday pay, variable, ENIC, reportable | | 5099 | Other salary items, variable, ENIC, reportable | | 5100 | Wages, regular, ENIC, reportable | | 5105 | Agreed tariff allowances, regular, ENIC, reportable | | 5190 | Accruals account wages, regular, ENIC, reportable | | 5192 | Holiday pay, regular, ENIC, reportable | | 5199 | Other salary items, regular, ENIC, reportable | | 5200 | Free car, ENIC, reportable | | 5210 | Free phone, ENIC, reportable | | 5220 | Free newspaper, ENIC, reportable | | 5230 | Free housing, ENIC, reportable | | 5240 | Interest-rate advantage, ENIC, reportable | | 5250 | Insurance, ENIC, reportable | | 5251 | Group life insurance, ENIC, reportable | | 5252 | Accident insurance, ENIC, reportable | | 5253 | Personal conseq Insurance, ENIC, reportable | | 5254 | Industrial injury insurance, ENIC, reportable | | 5280 | 5280 Other benefits, ENIC, reportable | | 5300 | Share of profit, bonuses | | 5330 | Directors\' remuneration ENIC re | | 5430 | Running persions, ENIC, reportable | | 7103 | Car allowance, reportable, ENIC | Balance accounts used for time-limitation of payable and reporting benefits : | Reference accounts | Account name | |--------------------|------------------------------------------| | 2931 | Provision for salary, not reported, ENIC | | 2940 | Holiday pay ENIC, reportable | | 2945 | Unpaid holiday pay ENIC | Payroll reporting basis, not included in ENIC basis : | Reference accounts | Account name | |--------------------|--------------------------------------| | 5281 | Other benefits, reportable, not ENIC | | 5390 | Other reportable remuneration | | 5421 | Pensions, reportable, not ENIC | | 7100 | Car allowance, reportable | | 7130 | Travel expenses, reportable | | 7150 | Subsistence expenses, reportable | Reimbursement of sick pay and other reimbursement that reduces the basis for employer\'s social security contributions : | Reference accounts | Account name | |--------------------|---------------------------------| | 5800 | Reimbursement sickness benefits | | 5890 | Other salary reimbursement | Pension costs which are included in ENIC basis but not in payroll reporting basis : | Reference accounts | Account name | |--------------------|------------------------------------| | 5425 | Mandatory Occupation Pension (OTP) | Balance account for payable employer\'s contribution : | Reference accounts | Account name | |--------------------|----------------------------------| | 2770 | Unpaid employer\'s contributions | Balance accounts for accrued ENIC on accrued salary and holiday pay : | Reference accounts | Account name | |--------------------|---------------------------------| | 2780 | Employer\'s contr accrued wages | | 2785 | Employer\'s contr Holiday paym | ENIC Cost accounts : | Reference accounts | Account name | |--------------------|----------------------------------------| | 5400 | Employee insurance contribution (ENIC) | | 5405 | ENIC of holiday payments | Tax Withholding /periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/vat-and-fees/tax-withholding page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Tax Withholding The function **Tax Withholding** is available for **Period closing** and **Year-end closing** and is found under **Reconciliation BS - VAT & fees**. Reconciliation of **Tax Withholding** is an automated reconciliation of data from five different sources: - Tax Withholding (reference account 2600 in the chart of accounts) - Bank deposits, tax withholdings (reference account 1950 in the chart of accounts) - Reporting of A-messages to Altinn (A07 Reconciliation information) - Payment voucher for the bimonthly payment of Tax Withholding (currently registered manually) - Due deduction and contribution deduction (reference account 2610 and 2620 in the chart of accounts) The feature for retrieving data from Altinn automatically fills in an order (form A-06) that generates a message (A07) for each month and for the year so far, which is retrieved from Altinn. This information contains information on payroll, payroll taxes and tax deductions that are used in the reconciliation. By fetching data from Altinn and the financial system, and then comparing this, the reconciliation is performed and documented for account 1950 Bank deposits and account 2600 Tax withholding. The only thing the user needs to do is check and enter voucher information (voucher number, date and amount) for when payment of the term. By checking to **Create Tax Withholding specification appendix automatically**, reconciliation attachments will be produced for account 2600 Tax Withholding and 1950 Tax Withholding Deposit. The reconciliation can be made for each month, but it is always made for pair of months as it is in the rules for the payment terms. The reconciliation appendix for balance accounts is connected to account 2600, where the reconciliation amount for tax withholding for the term is shown. The amount will be the reported amount for last term collected from Altinn. If this amount is the same amount as the unpaid tax withholding on account 2600, then it will not be a difference on the account. The reconciliation appendix for balance accounts is also connected to account 1950, but without amount. Then, it is easy to show if the tax withholding amount on the account is the same as the amount on account 1950 Bank deposits. If account 1950 Bank deposits contains a provision for withholding tax or contribution tax, this will be taken into account and deducted when reconciling tax withholding. Analysis IS /periodandyear/help/taxation/analysis-is section Income statement with data for selected period, account analysis and appendices. 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Analysis IS Income statement with data for selected period, account analysis and appendices. **Analysis IS** is located under both **Period closing** and **Year-end closing**. When you have selected an account or an account group on the left side of the page, and navigate between the views **Overview** and **Appendices**, that account or account group will remain highlighted and the relevant information for that account or account group is shown in each view. Read more about the different views in the topics below. Overview, analysis IS /periodandyear/help/taxation/analysis-is/overview page 2024-10-14T16:23:18+02:00 # Overview, analysis IS **Analysis IS - Overview** is located under both **Period closing** and **Year-end closing**. The overview in the view **Analysis IS** shows the income statement with data up to and including the period that is selected on the start page. It compares the figures for the current financial year with the equivalent figures from the previous financial year, and shows the difference as a percentage.

A difference that has a positive effect on the profit/loss is shown in green, and a difference that has a negative effect on the profit/loss is shown in red.

The applicable auto checks are also be visible in this view. ## Expand the level of detail in the Analysis IS You can expand the level of detail in **Analysis IS - Overview** by drilling down to the journal entries recorded on the accounts. Amounts that are available for drill-down are underlined and will change their colour to blue when you hover over them in the overview. Click on an amount available for drill-down to open a dialogue named **Account analysis**, which displays all the journal entries attached to that specific account. In **Account analysis**, the opening balance for the selected account and period is shown above the journal entry list, while the closing balance for the selected account and period is displayed at the bottom of the list. The journal entry list contains entry date and number, along with the current change, the closing balance after each journal entry and a transaction text. From within **Account analysis**, it is possible to select a different account in the account selector in the top left. You can also adjust the period displayed in the period selector in the top right. Click on the arrow next to a journal entry in the list to expand it and display a more detailed view of that particular entry. This view contains the debit and credit accounts, the booked amounts and the transaction text. ### View documents in the account analysis To view an attachment to a journal entry in the account analysis, click on the paper clip icon in the **Documentation** column. Choose which document you want to preview in the dialogue box that opens. In the preview window, you can download the attached document by clicking on the **Download** button and then easily drag it into an external document. It is also possible to create a new external documentation, to which the document is automatically linked by selecting **Add to document** in viewing mode. ## Field explanations Documentation : If an account or an account group has a document linked to it, the paper clip icon in this column will be blue, otherwise it will be grey. When you click on a grey paper clip icon you are able to go directly to the main documentation for that account or account group, or add a document. : To add a document, click on the paper clip icon, select **Add documentation** and choose which appendix you want to add. : When you have selected an appendix and click on **Add** you are redirected to the view **Documentation** and can continue to work with the document as usual. If you add a documentation to an account, that account will automatically be added to the document that is created. No account will be added if you add a document to an account group. : When you click on a blue paper clip icon, a list of all the documentation linked to that account is shown, as well as the link to the main document. Auto checks : This column shows the result of the automated checks that have been run. : A red icon indicates that the check has found something. When you click on the icon you will get more detailed information. : An orange icon indicates that the check could not run. An example of this is that the check is supposed to compare previous periods, but there are no previous periods imported into Period & Year. : A green icon indicates that a check has been run, but nothing was found. : Divergent check results can be marked as done using the button **Mark check as done**. When you mark a check result as done, the icon changes its appearance and becomes grey with a green check mark in the lower right corner. : You only need to mark a check result as done once, which means that if you mark a check result for an account in the reconciliation BS as done, the same check check result will also be marked as done in **Transaction analysis**. : If a check result no longer is up to date due to a subsequent change, it will lose its status as done and the icon changes its appearance to indicate that the result needs to be updated. : Read more in [Auto checks](/periodandyear/help/transaction-analysis/auto-checks). Checklist status : This column indicates the status of the task list for that account. : A grey icon indicates that no tasks have been marked as done, a blue icon indicates that some tasks have been marked as done, and a green icon indicates that all tasks are marked as done. The icon is also a short cut to the tab **Checklist**. Hover over the icon to see how many tasks are completed. Done : When you have finished reconciling an account you mark it as **Done**. If you mark an account group as done, all accounts belonging to that account will be marked as done. Quality assurance : The functionality for internal quality assurance, available in the **QA** column, provides support when documenting the quality assurance done at your accounting office. : After reviewing the work done on an account or account group, the person who is the quality assurer can log in and go to the column **QA** in the right and click on the icon to change the status of the account or account group. There are two choices available: **Approved** and **Not approved**. To revert the status of an account or account group, select **Reset status**. : When you select **Approved** for an account or account group, its status icon in the **QA** column turns green. Hover over the icon to display the date and the time for the approval, along with the quality reviewer's name. If the quality reviewer has been deleted from the accounting office, they will be displayed as **Unknown user**. : When you select **Not approved** for an account or account group, the status icon in the **QA** column turns orange and you will be able to add a comment. Hover over the icon to display the date and the time for when the status was set, along with the quality reviewer's name. If a comment was entered, this will be displayed in the side panel. : When you select **Reset status**, the status icon in the **QA** column turns grey and returns to its original value. Documentation, analysis IS /periodandyear/help/taxation/analysis-is/appendices page 2024-10-14T16:23:18+02:00 # Documentation, analysis IS **Analysis IS - Documentation** is located under both **Period closing** and **Year-end closing**. Under **Analysis IS - Documentation** you can add documentation as basis for your income statement accounts. You are only able to add external documentation. To add external documentation to an account, select **Documentation - Add documentation** or click on the paper clip icon on the selected account\'s row in the overview. You can connect the documentation to several accounts, but the first account must belong to the account group under which the documentation was added.

You can upload a maximum of 12 files to the same documentation. Each file can be a maximum of 10 MB.

You can also link external documentation to an account group. You do this by not selecting a specific account on the documentation. The supported file types are PDF, Word, Excel and image files. Note that if you download a Word or Excel file for editing, you must remove the old file before you upload the updated version. If you choose to copy the documentation with data to a future period, all of its attachments are copied. To delete an attached file, click on the trash bin next to the file. An external documentation can also be created from the **Account analysis** dialogue, which is opened when you click on an underlined amount (which means that the account has journal entries attached to it). Open the attachment that you wish to add to an external documentation and select **Add to document** in viewing mode.

Note that the printout will not work if a password protected PDF is uploaded to the appendix along with other files. In order to include the file in the printout, the password must be removed.

 Checklists & comments /periodandyear/help/taxation/checklists-comments section Work with checklists and create new/view/delete or reply to a comment. 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Checklists & comments Work with checklists and create new/view/delete or reply to a comment. The checklist and the functionality for adding comments to accounts and account groups are located in the side panel, which is accessed by clicking on the comment icon in the upper right. You can work with checklists and comments under **Reconciliation BS** and **Analysis IS**. Click on the tabs at the top of the side panel to switch between the two features. When you click on the comment or the checklist icon in the overview, the side panel opens and you are automatically transferred to the right tab. It is also possible to add comments to check results in the **Check results** dialogue. ## Checklist The checklist helps you to document the work you have done. Under the tab **Checklist** in the side panel, the task list for the account group that is selected in the overview is shown. You can also open the checklist by clicking on the checklist icon in the overview. To add a comment to a task, click on the row or on the comment icon in the **Actions** column and enter your comment. See the **Comments** section below for further information on how to add, edit and delete comments. To mark a task as done, click on the check mark in the **Actions** column. Click on the check mark again to undo this action. When a task has been marked as done, the column **Checklist status** will be updated in the overview. A task can be marked as **N/A**, which means that it is not applicable for this period. The marking will be removed when you start the next period. You can modify the checklist to show only the tasks you want. Click on **Edit checklist** in the bottom of the side panel to do this. In this view, you can choose which tasks are active and if you want them active only for the period reconciliation, year-end reconciliation or both. You can add your own tasks to the checklist. This is also done in the **Edit checklist** view. The tasks you add yourself can be activated and deactivated in the same way as the standard tasks, and can also be deleted. The tasks that you have added yourself have a blue icon in the task list so that they can be easily identified. ## Comments Adding comments to accounts and account groups is also handled via the side panel - either by selecting the tab **Comments** in the side panel or by clicking on the comment icon in the overview. Comments can also be added to check results in the **Check results** dialogue. Comments are commonly entered in the current reconciliation period for documentation purposes, but it is also possible to add comments in future, not yet started periods to be used as reminders. You can also see comments from previous periods, 12 months back in time. You can also tag your comments with **To customer** and/or **To QA**. If you do that, you can then make a selection on these in the **Report centre** or by clicking **[View all comments](/periodandyear/help/taxation/checklists-comments/view)** in the side panel. From the **View all comments** dialogue you can create a PDF or copy the information. Read more in the topic [Create new comment](/periodandyear/help/taxation/checklists-comments/create). Create new comment /periodandyear/help/taxation/checklists-comments/create page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Create new comment You can create comments under **Period closing** and **Year-end closing** when working with **Reconciliation BS** or **Analysis IS**. 1. Select the account row or account group row that you wish to add a comment to. 2. Click on the comment icon in the column **Comments** or click on the comment icon in the upper right to open the side panel. 3. Enter the comment in the text box. 4. Tag the comment with **To customer** and/or **To QA** if you want to be able to make a selection of these in the **Report center**. 5. Save the comment by pressing Enter or clicking outside the text box.

The comment is saved in the selected reconciliation period along with the name of the person who wrote it and the date it was saved. It will be displayed in the side panel next time it is opened and the account or account group for which it was written is selected. When an account group is selected not only the comments connected to the account group itself are displayed, but also any comments added to the accounts that belong to the account group.

When a comment has been added to an account or account group, the comment icon turns blue for that particular account or account group.

If you want to see a summary of your comments, you click View all comments. Read more in the topic View comments.

 Edit comment /periodandyear/help/taxation/checklists-comments/edit page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Edit comment Comments is located under both **Period closing** and **Year-end closing** when you work with **Reconciliation BS** and **Analysis IS**. 1. Click on the pen icon next to a comment in the side panel to edit it.

Only comments written in the current period can be edited, if it is unlocked. A comment can only be edited by the person who wrote it.

2. Save the edited comment by pressing Enter, clicking outside the text box or clicking on the green checkmark. Regret your changes by clicking on the red cross.

The edited comment is saved in the current reconciliation period along with the name of the person who edited it and the date it was saved.

 View comments /periodandyear/help/taxation/checklists-comments/view page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # View comments Via the side panel, you can get an overview of the comments you have created. You can then save the information as a pdf, or copy it to paste in an email to the customer. You find comments when you work with **Reconciliation BS** and **Analysis IS**. Do as follows: 1. Click on the comment icon in the column **Comments** or click on the comment icon in the upper right to open the side panel. 2. Click on **View all comments**. 3. Choose if you want to include comments from **Reconciliation BS** and/or **Analysis IS**. 4. Choose if you want to include some of the tags or not. 5. Click on **Download PDF** if you want to create a pdf file with your comments. 6. Click on **Copy to clipboard** if you want to copy the information and use it in an email to your customer. Delete comment /periodandyear/help/taxation/checklists-comments/delete page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Delete comment Comments is located under both **Period closing** and **Year-end closing** when you work with **Reconciliation BS** and **Analysis IS**. 1. Click on the trash bin icon next to a comment in the side panel to delete it.

Only comments written in the current period can be deleted, if it is unlocked. A comment can only be deleted by the person who wrote it.

 Reply to a comment /periodandyear/help/taxation/checklists-comments/reply page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Reply to a comment Comments is located under both **Period closing** and **Year-end closing** when you work with **Reconciliation BS** and **Analysis IS**. 1. Click on the reply icon to the right of a comment to reply to it.

It is only possible to reply to comments in the current (unlocked) or a future reconciliation period.

2. Save the reply by pressing Enter, clicking outside the text box or clicking on the green checkmark. Undo your reply by clicking on the cross.

A reply can only be edited or deleted in the current (unlocked) or a future reconciliation period and by the user who wrote it.

If a comment has a reply, the reply must be deleted before the comment can be edited or deleted.

 Information and tax (impersonal) /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal section Information about the company, tax calculation and allocations for limited liability company, etc with accounting type 2. 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Information and tax (impersonal) Information about the company, tax calculation and allocations for limited liability company, etc with accounting type 2. In **Year-end closing - Information and tax** you register/update information about the company, as well as finding what you need to calculate **Business income**, **Taxable result** and **Accounting result after tax**.

Pre-populated values are updated automatically in Information and tax, however if necessary you can click the refresh-icon to refresh values in information and tax. Clicking the icon will start a full recalculation of values. During the process the button will be disabled but as soon as the calculation is completed the button will be available again.

 Information /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Information In **Information and tax - Information** you register information about the company and enter basic values as input for the tax calculation. Company /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/company section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Company In the left menu below **Company** you register/update **Client information**, **Various information**, **Accounting office**, and **Auditor**. This information is automatically transferred to fields in the tax forms. Client information /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/company/client-information section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Client information In **Client information**, some fields are populated automatically based on information that appears under **Settings - Company information**. If you want to change this section, click the **Change company information** link and edit as desired. Some client information can also be imported from the [Brønnøysund Register Centre](https://www.brreg.no/). Registered client information on the clients corporate identity number will be fetched.

When you start the year-end period for the first time, the import from the Brønnøysund Register Centre will be performed automatically.

To import data, simply click the button**Import from BrReg.no** at the bottom of the page in **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information**. The button is available in the following menus: - Client information - Accounting office - Auditor Fill in the other fields under **Client information** manually.

The value in Number of man-years is transferred to notes in the Annual report.

 Foreign companies with limited tax liability to Norway /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/company/client-information/foreign-companies-limited-tax-liability page 2025-01-21T08:20:42+01:00 # Foreign companies with limited tax liability to Norway This functionality replaces the previous form RF-1045 Statement of accounts. For the function to be available, the following setup must be specified: - Company type NUF (Norwegian-registered foreign enterprise) - Municipality number 2312 Sokkel (wrong municipality number will cause a validation error.) - Tick ​​mark in company information for **Foreign company with limited tax liability to Norway (formerly RF-1045).** The check box is only available for NUF. (Norwegian-registered foreign enterprise) If you check \'YES\' in this choice, user must confirm this by entering the company number.

NB! The choice generates the deactivation of all areas and deletes all data that may be in them, and which is not relevant to the company type.

#### The following areas will remain - Withdrawal of assets or liabilities from Norwegian territory - Goods - Accounts receivable - Tax depreciation - Profit/Loss Account - Interest limitation - Controlled transactions and balances For taxable depreciations, it will be possible to limit this to the number of days the operating assets in question have been part of the taxable business. All other work areas will be removed and any data that may have been registered in these will be permanently deleted. System vouchers will be deactivated so that allocations etc. will have to be registered manually. The branch accounts are filled in under **Annual accounts - Information and tax - Financial statement.** Values from here are transferred to **Tax calculation**. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. IFRS and simplified IFRS /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/company/client-information/ifrs page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # IFRS and simplified IFRS Accounting principles are defined under **Information and tax - Information** and the menu item **Client information** in the left-hand menu. IFRS or Simplified IFRS can be selected in **What rules are used in the preparation of the annual accounts?**. #### Reference accounts that are special for companies with IFRS and simplified IFRS - 1151 Assets classified as held for sale (IFRS) - 1180 Investment properties (IFRS) - 1490 Biological assets (IFRS) - 3850 Change in value of investment properties (IFRS) - 3870 Change in value of biological assets (IFRS) - 8880 Change in value adjustment reserve (IFRS) - 8881 Actuarial gains and losses on benefit plans (IFRS) - 8882 Other income and expenses related to enterprises (IFRS) - 8883 Net gain and loss on equity instruments (IFRS) - 8884 Change in fair value due to own credit risk (IFRS) - 8890 Tax related to items not to be reclassified (IFRS) - 8891 Currency translation differences (IFRS) - 8892 Change in fair value of the hedging instrument in cash flow hedging (IFRS) - 8893 Net gains and losses on financial assets measured at fair value (IFRS) - 8894 Net change in hedging costs (IFRS) - 8895 Tax related to items that can be reclassified (IFRS) #### Reference accounts that are special for companies with full IFRS - 2054 Reserved ordinary dividend (IFRS) - 2055 Deferred additional dividend (IFRS) - 2056 Reserved extraordinary dividend (IFRS) Dividend : If the company uses simplified IFRS, the dividend function and the accounts used are the same as for NGAAP. : If the company applies full IFRS, dividends are allocated to equity accounts 2054, 2055 and 2056, which then replace accounts 2800, 2801 and 2802, Group contribution : If the company uses simplified IFRS, the group contribution function and the accounts used are the same as for NGAAP. : If the company applies full IFRS, amounts are recorded in group contributions in the group contribution function, and these are taken into account in the tax calculation, but the group contribution is not accounted for as automatic postings, in contrast to simplified IFRS and NGAAP. : With full IFRS, the group contribution will affect provisions for payable tax, but Period & Year includes the amounts from group contributions as an element under **Other temporary differences that affect deferred tax** in the function for temporary differences. Should this produce a different result than expected, the amount can be overridden in the function for temporary differences on the separate card **Differences affecting deferred tax**. Assets classified as held for sale : Reference account 1151 is used for this type, and this account is shown as a separate group under current assets in the schedule. Change in value investment properties : Reference account 3850 is used for this type, and this account is shown with operating profit before and after changes in value of investment properties. Other profit components for IFRS : The reference accounts in the 88 series are used for this: : - 8880 Change in value adjustment reserve (IFRS) - 8881 Actuarial gains and losses on benefit plans (IFRS) - 8882 Other income and expenses related to enterprises (IFRS) - 8883 Net gain and loss on equity instruments (IFRS) - 8884 Change in fair value due to own credit risk (IFRS) - 8890 Tax related to items not to be reclassified (IFRS) - 8891 Currency translation differences (IFRS) - 8892 Change in fair value of the hedging instrument in cash flow hedging (IFRS) - 8893 Net gains and losses on financial assets measured at fair value (IFRS) - 8894 Net change in hedging costs (IFRS) - 8895 Tax related to items that can be reclassified (IFRS) : The desired accounting lines with the desired line text are edited in the layout plan by dividing the accounting line into several accounting lines, where you can edit the texts yourself. Biological assets : Reference account 1490 is used for this type, and the amount is included in a separate line in temporary differences. Tax values ​​for biological assets are recorded directly in temporary differences by overriding the field for tax value of biological assets. : Change in value of biological assets in the income statement uses reference account 3870. Various information /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/company/various-information page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Various information In **Various information**, you register information that is automatically transferred to the tax return. Select **Yes** for the conditions relevant to the company and answer the questions in the underlying section that then appear. See [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Accounting office /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/company/accounting-office page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Accounting office Information about the **Accounting office** can be imported from the [Brønnøysund Register Centre](https://www.brreg.no/) or filled out manually. Registered information about the Accounting office on the clients corporate identity number will be fetched. All information can be edited if needed. To import data, simply click the button**Import from BrReg.no** at the bottom of the page in **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information**. The button is available in the following menus: - Client information - Accounting office - Auditor Auditor /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/company/auditor page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Auditor **Auditor** appears in the menu on the left if you answered **Yes** to the question **Is the company subject to audit?** under **Client information**. Information about the **Auditor**can be imported from the [Brønnøysund Register Centre](https://www.brreg.no/) or filled out manually. Registered information about the auditor on the clients corporate identity number will be fetched. All information can be edited if needed. To import data, simply click the button**Import from BrReg.no** at the bottom of the page in **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information**. The button is available in the following menus: - Client information - Accounting office - Auditor Basis values /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values section 2025-03-25T07:49:38+01:00 # Basis values ## Basis values In the left menu under **Basis values**, you register values to calculate tax values. All areas are not displayed in the left menu by default. There is an auto setting which makes some areas in **Basis values** visible dependent on account balance or previous values. Click on **Edit feature areas** to edit the auto settings or show a menu which is not displayed.

You can’t hide a feature area if it contains data. If an are is locked due to existing values in this area, you should delete data first.

 Goods /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/goods page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Goods The **Overview** tab shows accounting values and tax values of goods this year and last year. The accounting value is displayed at the client account level and is summed per inventory group and in total. Tax values displayed here are the result of entries on the **Calculated taxable value** tab. Click **Show All** to see all associated client accounts with zero values. In the **Calculated taxable value** tab, you calculate the tax value of goods. Adjust accounting value for dead stock and other adjustments to get tax value. Last year\'s tax value is entered manually the first year, and is populated automatically later years. Tax value is automatically transferred to relevant subjects and to **Changes in temporary differences**. Click **Show all** to see all inventory groups with associated client accounts with zero values. See [Items, fields and subjects in new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Account receivables /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/account-receivables page 2025-03-25T07:49:38+01:00 # Account receivables ## Account receivables The **Overview** tab shows accounting value and tax value of accounts receivable this year and last year. Accounting value is displayed at client account level. The tax value displayed here is a result of entries on the **Calculated taxable value** tab. Click **Show all** to see all associated client accounts with zero values. On the **Calculated taxable value** tab, you calculate the tax value of accounts receivable. The system calculates tax write-down for the **Calculate based on formula** option. Nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced trade debtors, confirmed losses on trade debtors, and sales revenue are automatically populated. If the amount in **Sales revenue** has both credit sales and cash sales, fill in the relevant amount for cash sales in the fields **Of which cash**. This because cash sales shall not be included in the calculation of tax write-downs of nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced trade debtors. You can see which client accounts are part of an automatically populated field by hovering over a value field and clicking on the symbol that appears. Select **Show accounts**. In the same menu you can also select **Override amount**. Last year\'s values ​​are entered manually the first year, and are populated automatically later years when you select **Copy year-end data from previous year** under **Maintenance - Import data**. If the company is newly established, a 2% tax write-down of nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced trade debtors may be required, at the end of the establishment year and the following two income years. Select the option **Use 2% write-down (newly established business)**, and the system automatically calculates tax value based on this choice. Values ​​from the **Calculated taxable value** tab are automatically transferred to **Changes in temporary differences**. Fixed asset register /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/fixed-assets-register page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Fixed asset register

The fixed asset register is available for companies with full accounting obligations. Companies with limited accounting obligations only have the function for tax depreciation and automatic posting of tax depreciation available

Click on **Add fixed asset**(+ symbol) in the upper right corner to create a new fixed asset.

Import fixed assets from excel

Click on the Import fixed asset from excel –icon in the upper right corner to start the import wizard. The import requires the information to be in a specific format. A template can be downloaded from the dialog.

  1. Drop or browse for the excel file you want to import (*.xlsx or *.xls).
  2. Select Replace or add content.
  3. Click Next to load and validate data.
  4. Select the rows you would like to import and click Import.
  1. Click Close to return to the fixed asset register.
In the dialogue, you can fill in the current information on the fixed asset. You can select depreciation type under **Tax-related depreciation**. Based on the selected depreciation type, Period & Year suggests relevant options that can be selected. For example, if the depreciation type **Balance depreciation** is selected, you can select the relevant **balance group** from the drop-down.

On the basis of the selected depreciation type in the fixed asset register, a detail card will be created automatically under Tax-related depreciation. Values from the fixed asset register will automatically be transferred to the applicable detail card (for example new acquisition and disposal).

The first tab displays an overview of all the fixed assets in the fixed asset register.

If a fixed asset has been sold and is to be transferred to the Profit/Loss account, this will happen automatically. If several profit/loss accounts have been created, select the relevant one in a drop-down menu in the detail card under tax depreciation.

Under the tab **Depreciation**, you can specify how many months to depreciate. We indicate that when selecting the correct number of months, there are no differences between the depreciation of the fixed asset register and the booked value of depreciation. Based on what is defined of depreciations under this tab, systemvouchers are created and update the accounting automatically.The documentation of the systemvouchers can be found in the report **Closing entries** in **Report center**. Under the tab **Reconciliation**, a reconciliation of the booked values according to the fixed asset register compared to the booked values to the accounting is displayed. If differences are shown in this view, this indicates a follow-up of fixed assets that indicate which accounts there are differences on. This allows you to detect and correct for any differences. Under the tab **Notes - Tangible fixed assets**, a note for tangible fixed assets and intangible assets is displayed. The dialogue **Edit fixed asset** is displayed by clicking on the relevant fixed asset in the view **Overview**. The system makes automatic calculations based on the information you enter in the dialogue. The amounts must be registered with a positive sign.

You can chose to create a system voucher for bookkeeping impairments registered in the fixed asset register. This is done by selecting Create system voucher which appears under Impairment in the detail card.

The system calculates a depreciation percentage based on registered information in the field **Effective life**. Initially, the year-end closing calculates 12 months of depreciation unless there is new acquisition and disposal, where we calculate depreciation from the month of the new acquisition and even the month of disposal. Each fixed asset must be linked to an existing account. The options that appear in the drop-down menu are existing fixed assets accounts in the balance sheet. If you want to add a new account, this must be done under **Settings** and **Client chart of accounts** for it to be available in the drop-down menu in the dialogue. Based on which account that is chosen, the system will suggest whether or not the fixed asset is tax depreciable. This is only intended as a guidance and as a user you must always consider our suggestion. Similarly, an asset group is also suggested based on account selection. Please note that if you do not have the correct mapping on an account in your balance, this may result in incorrect suggestion of the asset group. The system also suggests which account regarding accounting depreciation that is current for the fixed asset. Tax-related deprecations /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/tax-related-depreciations page 2025-03-25T07:49:38+01:00 # Tax-related deprecations Tax-related deprecations should be completed and submitted with the new tax return for businesses.

The registration page for balance depreciation is dynamic in relation to what is registered. Fields are only displayed if they are relevant in the situation, depending on registration in other fields.

For example, fields for transfer to profit and loss account will only appear in cases where they are relevant, e.g. if the realization date is set for balance group e, or if balance group b has a negative value in the depreciation basis, while balance groups a, c, d and j according to the tax rules never have a transfer to profit and loss account, and therefore will never show fields for transfer of profit or loss to profit and loss account.

Follow the instructions below to calculate tax depreciation. 1. Click **Add entry**, the symbol at the top right to create new depreciations. 2. Select type of entry: **Reducing balance depreciation**, **Non-depreciable** or **Linear depreciation**. An entry is created in a separate tab. 3. Fill in relevant fields. You can delete an entry by pressing the **Delete** button at the bottom of each tab. The first tab shows an **Overview** of created depreciations grouped by type of depreciation and a summation of all tax-related depreciations. Tax related depreciations is automatically transferred to **Temporary differences**. See [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field explanations ## Balance depreciation Id : A numeric id is suggested when you create a new taxable depreciation. Asset group : Select the asset group to which the fixed asset belongs. Balance basis per 01.01 : Enter a positive or negative balance from 31.12 last year. Calculated impaired value of discontinued assets : If the balance must be reduced by the impaired value of an asset. Enter the calculated value here. Cost price - new acquisitions : Enter the cost price for operating assets acquired during the income year. Fixed assets must be entered here if it is assumed to have a useful life of at least 3 years and the cost price of the fixed asset is NOK 15,000 (including VAT if there is no right to deduct) or higher. For buildings acquired during the income year, the cost price shall be divided between the building balance and the balance j for fixed technical installations. Cost price - improvements : Enter costs on existing or newly acquired fixed assets in their entirety. Maintenance can be expensed directly. If you choose to activate higher maintenance costs, further information must be provided. In the case of expenses on buildings acquired during the income year, the cost price shall be divided between the building balance j for fixed, technical installations. Government grants etc : Enter public subsidies, with the exception of investment subsidies to the districts in accordance with regulations issued by the King, to be written down on the cost price. Adjustment of input VAT : Enter any change in cost price as a result of an adjustment of input VAT in accordance with the VAT Act. Remuneration (sales value on withdrawal) : Upon realization and withdrawal of fixed assets in group a, b, c, d or j, it is possible to write-down the whole value or parts of the value on the balance in the relevant group instead of the income recognition. Return of investment grants to districts : Return of investment grants to districts is calculated automatically based on registered values. The value can be overridden. Recognized direct revenue this year : Enter the part of the consideration etc. (by withdrawal the turnover value) which is entered directly to income in the realization year according to the Tax Act § 14-44 (1) and which thus shall not affect the basis for the year\'s balance depreciation, income recognition or transfer to profit and loss account. Basis for the year\'s balance depreciation, etc. : Here is the basis for this year\'s depreciation. The value is calculated based on registered values. Depreciation this year (including start depreciation) : This year\'s balance depreciation is calculated here. Remaining positive balance below NOK 15,000 will be deducted in full. The calculated value can be overridden. Income this year of negative balance : Negative balance recognized as income in balance groups a, c, d or j with at least the group\'s depreciation rate. The value is calculated based on registered values. The remaining negative balance below NOK 15,000 will be recognized as income in full. The calculated value can be overridden. Basis balance transferred to next year : The remaining positive balance as of 31.12. this year. which will be transferred to balance basis 1.1 next year. The same applies to the remaining negative balance in groups a, c, d and j. The value is calculated based on registered values. Fixed asset grants after regulations from government : Enter any grants for investment in the districts. Profit and loss account /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/profit-loss-account page 2025-03-25T07:49:38+01:00 # Profit and loss account ## Profit and loss account (impersonal) Profit and Loss should be completed and submitted with the company tax return if you have a loss account after the realisation of fixed assets etc. Follow the instructions below to calculate any profits or loss . 1. Click **Add profit- or loss account**, the symbol at the top right to create new accounts. An account is created in a separate tab. 2. Fill in relevant fields.

You can delete an account by clicking the Deletebutton at the bottom of each tab.

The first tab shows an overview of created accounts and a summation of all profit and loss accounts. The tax values of profit and loss accounts are automatically transferred to relevant subjects in business information. See [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field explanations Profit and loss account ID : A numeric id is suggested when you create a new Profit-/loss account. Municipal : Relevant when there are several industries in several municipalities. Balance per 31.12. transferred from last year\'s profit and loss account : Enter the balance as of 31.12 in the previous income year, from the profit and loss account. \+ Total gain on realization and withdrawal : Enter all gains from the realization of fixed assets. Gain on realization of entire livestock on a farm upon termination of branch of operation : Enter all gains from the realization of entire livestock on a farm upon termination of branch of operation Incoming value from acquired profit and loss account : Enter any incoming value from acquired profit and loss account. Value of realized profit and loss account : Enter value of realized profit and loss account \- Total loss on realization and withdrawal : Enter all losses from the realization of fixed assets. = Basis for the year\'s income / deduction : Basis for this year\'s income / deduction recognition is calculated automatically based on registered values. \+ Maximum 20% as income deduction. Any remaining amount less than NOK 15,000 for deductions. : The value is calculated based on registered values. The field can be overridden by hovering over the field and selecting **Override amount**. Minimum 20% as income. Any remaining amount less than NOK 15,000 as income : The value is calculated based on registered values. The field can be overridden by hovering over the field and selecting **Override amount**. Balance profit and loss account per 31.12 transferred to next year. : The value is calculated based on registered values. Percentage for this year\'s income recognition or this year\'s income deduction : The rate for the current year is displayed. Credit deduction /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/credit-deduction page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Credit deduction Credit deductions can be claimed by companies that are considered tax-resident in Norway according to Norwegian law and tax treaty. If the company has income or assets abroad - and are taxed both in Norway and abroad, a deduction can be claimed in Norwegian equalized tax for the tax part paid abroad. The credit deduction is limited to the lowest of; - The calculated Norwegian tax on the total foreign income and/or foreign assets - The amount that is actually paid in tax abroad in the same income year as the income/wealth is taxable in Norway Credit deductions are distributed among the following categories; - Income from NOKUS/low tax countries - Other foreign income - Other - including deductions in Norwegian tax when taxation of dividends etc. from foreign subsidiaries A separate tab has been created for each of these categories in the system.

Select 'Credit deduction abroad' in Client information to see Credit deduction in Basic values.

In the tax return, information must be filled in that shows that the company is entitled to a credit deduction. This is done in **Information and tax -Information - Credit deductions**. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Interest limitation /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/interest page 2025-02-10T18:15:25+01:00 # Interest limitation In **Year-end closing - Information on tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Interest limitation.** The area is automatically available if the company has net interest costs in the balance over NOK 5,000,000.00. The area can also be added manually from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the tax authorities for the calculation loop to work.

The work area replaces the former RF-1315 and RF-1509. With regard to Exemption rule RF-1509, the area is expanded by ticking yes for: **Does the company make use of an exception rule at either company level or national level (including domestic group)?** The area consists of both manual fields and pre-calculated fields from the accounts and from calculated values from skatteetaten. #### The following fields are taken from the balance sheet/accounts - Total interest costs (e.g. Interest on fixed tax) - Total interest income (e.g. Interest on fixed tax) - Income/loss before deduction for any provided group contribution - Provided group group contribution to deductions in ordinary income - Calculated other income (shipping company) - Addition for tax depreciation - Remuneration recognized directly as income for depreciated operating assets #### The following fields are calculated/received from skatteetaten Calculation of total net interest expenses : - Net interest expenses : - Total interest expenses including guarantee expenses to related parties, and total interest income from related parties : - Total net interest expenses to related parties : - Net interest expenses to companies etc. in the group : - Net interest expenses to other related parties (outside the group) Basis of calculation for interest deduction limit : - Addition for tax depreciation : - Directly recorded income for depreciated assets : - Calculation basis for interest deduction limit : - Deduction for group contributions that are not to be included in the calculation basis This year\'s addition or deduction in income : - Net interest expenses - Interest deduction limit - Corrected interest rate : - Difference between this year\'s interest expenses and interest deduction limit - This year's increase in income. Total cut-off of the year's interest costs - This year's deduction from income. Interest costs deducted in previous years, but which can be deducted this year because the interest deduction limit exceeds net interest costs - Adjustment of income Forwarding of interest deductions from this year : - Addition to income - Carried forward interest costs from previous years within the year's permitted interest deduction - Deduction from income - Adjustment for businesses assessed as a partnership or companies with NOKUS that have a loss - Carryforward of disallowed interest deduction - Share of the year's interest costs that the company can carry forward to later years Proportion of this year\'s interest expenses that the company can carry forward : - For deduction this year - Remaining for carryforward Information about chosen exemption rule, Norwegian part of the group, and domestic group : - Equity ratio in the consolidated financial statements as a percentage. Information about company accounts / consolidated balance sheet for the Norwegian part of the group and calculation of equity ratio : - Adjusted equity in the company or Norwegian part of the group (specified below) - Adjusted total assets in the company or Norwegian part of the group (specified below) - Equity ratio for the company or Norwegian part of the group Specification of adjustments to the accounting principles of the consolidated financial statements : - Total change in equity / total change in total assets - Effect on equity - Effect on total assets Adjustment of company accounts / consolidated balance sheet for the Norwegian part of the group : - Overall increase in equity - Overall decrease in equity - Overall increase in total assets - Overall decrease in total assets **Carryforward of cut off interest deduction:** Tax value for previous years\' cut off deduction and tax value for the remaining deduction to be carried forward this year are automatically transferred to **Tax Calculation/Temporary Differences/Deferred Tax Differences, Deferred Tax.**

Incorrect completion in work area:

If the user by mistake has activated the work area and filled in data, but wants to close it, there is a reset button at the bottom of the work area.

See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Hydroelectric plants /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant section 2024-09-20T08:09:24+02:00 # Hydroelectric plants In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Hydroelectric plant.** The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.** On clients imported in 2023 from Altinn, Finale Årsoppgjør or Total Årsoppgjør, activation will be done automatically if there is a power plant in tax form RF-1151.

Import from Altinn, Finale Årsoppgjør or Total Årsoppgjør for the income year 2022

For the income year 2023, imports of historical data for income year 2022 can be made from either Altinn, Finale Årsoppgjør or Total Årsoppgjør.

Please note that imports will not be able to specify the correct type of fixed asset for special fixed assets in power plants, but use the lifetime (67 years / 40 years) to select a type that has the same lifetime (power station (67 years) or mechanical equipment (40 years) This must be changed manually to the correct type. This is done by registering the change directly on the individual fixed asset.

The area consists of the following registration pages that have conditions that specially apply to hydroelectric plants: - Hydroelectric plant - Separate fixed assets in power plants - Acquisitions of separate fixed assets - Separate fixed assets under construction - Taxable depreciations in power plants

Note that these area requires logging in with an active connection to the tax authorities.

#### Reference account codes specifically for power companies Here is a list of account codes that are specific to power companies - 1117 Electrotechnical equipment in power companies (balance group g) - 1118 Separate fixed assets in power plants under construction - 1119 Separate fixed assets in power plants - 1218 Separate fixed assets in power plants under construction - 1219 Separate fixed assets in power plants - 1577 Natural resource tax brought forward - 2501 Payable natural resource tax, not offset - 2502 Land rent tax payable, not offset - 8301 Natural resource tax - 8302 Basic interest tax #### Tax calculation The tax calculation function contains a separate card **Payable tax for hydroelectric power plants**. This function retrieves values ​​from tax calculations carried out by the Tax Administration, which are shown on the separate card **Tax calculation from the Skatteetaten**. At the bottom of this tab, accounting for tax expense is shown, where accounts entered show the desired tax amount, and automatic postings will adjust the account balance to match the amounts entered.

It is possible to override which tax cost is to be posted, so that you can have the tax cost that you have calculated posted in cases where the annual accounts have already been submitted.

 Hydroelectric plant /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant/hydroelectric-plant page 2024-09-20T08:09:24+02:00 # Hydroelectric plant In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Hydroelectric plant.** The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.** The power plant overview contains a summary of calculated values ​​from the property tax base, natural resource tax and ground rent income before and after coordination with other group companies. #### Coordination of ground rent income in the group The power plant overview contains registration of coordination with other companies in the group, and values ​​registered have an effect on the final coordinated ground rent income. #### Hydroelectric plant This menu item contains a list of hydroelectric plants, and these are created by clicking on the plus icon in the upper right. Two different types of hydropower plants can be created here: - With rent income (10,000+ kVA) - Without rent income (\< 10,000 kVA) Hydropower plants without ground rent income : These power plants may have associated special operating assets in power plants. : Other tax-related depreciation can also be linked to the hydropower plant, and will be included as part of the property tax basis and the asset calculation for the power plant. Balance depreciation in balance groups a, c, d and g will be included as asset value of the power plant if they are linked to a power plant, and will otherwise be included as assets from the balance groups, as in other companies if they are not linked to a power plant. : The property tax base and asset value are calculated from the tax-depreciated value of the special operating assets in the power plant. Hydroelectric plant with ground rent income : These are power plants that calculate ground rent income and natural resource tax. Property tax base and asset values ​​are calculated according to the special rules for the present value of calculated future cash flows according to the rules in the Tax Act. Calculation of values for power companies : Calculations of these values are made technically by submitting values ​​to the Tax Administrations calculation functions, and making use of the Tax Administrations calculations of all the different calculated fields for power companies. This also requires that you log in to the Tax Administration functions within the program to identify yourself. #### Ground rent income Ground rent income is on a separate tab in **Ground rent income** at the individual hydroelectric plant. Specification of gross rent income : Total annual production is recorded under the power plant information. Other data is recorded on a separate tab **Ground rent income** with the exception of power delivered in accordance with contract and profit from the realization of special fixed assets used in power production. Contract income : Power delivered according to contract is registered on separate tab **Contract revenue** at the individual power plant. Contract income is an overview per contract, and here it is possible to import data from Excel. :

Import from Excel

The import button can be found at the top right, to the left of the plus button for creating a new power plant. By pressing the import button, a dialog appears where you can download an Excel template for this import function. It is necessary to use this Excel template to import data.

When importing, there are two choices:

(1) Add imported data to the existing content and (2) Delete existing data and replace it with imported data.

Profit from the realization of special fixed assets used in power production : Amounts are calculated automatically by the Tax Administration on the basis of data on special operating assets in power plants. Specification of deductions in ground rent income : Deductions in ground rent income consist of both data that is registered and data that is calculated by the Tax Administration on the basis of other data from the client\'s business specification and tax return. Some calculations are commented on below. Tax-related depreciation of fixed assets used in power production : These are depreciation both on special operating assets in power plants and other tax-related depreciation (balance depreciation and linear depreciation otherwise). These are depreciations on the elements that are not directly deducted from the ground rent income at the time of investment. Loss on realization of a special fixed asset used in power production : Amounts are calculated automatically by the Tax Administration on the basis of data on special operating assets in power plants. Investment cost related to power production : These are elements that are stated as directly deducted from the ground rent income at the time of investment both on special operating assets in power plants and other tax-related depreciation (balance depreciation and linear depreciation otherwise). This year\'s calculated corporation tax on business subject to ground rent : Amounts are calculated automatically by the Tax Administration on the basis of data on business specification and tax return. This year\'s application of carried forward calculated negative corporation tax : Amounts are calculated automatically by the Tax Administration on the basis of data on business specification and tax return Carry forward negative ground rent income from before 2007 : Value carried forward from previous years must be registered here, while interest and application to deductions in positive ground rent income is calculated by the Tax Administrationy and automatically entered into the registration form. Calculated company tax and calculated negative company tax to carry forward : Calculations of calculated fields are obtained from the Tax Administration calculations, and are obtained from the Tax Administration calculation functions. #### Natural resource tax Natural resource tax is on a separate tab in **Natural resource tax** at the individual hydroelectric plant. Values from previous years are taken from tax returns from previous years, and can also be registered manually. Distribution of municipalities is done by registering a distribution key between the municipalities. Distribution keys can be any number, and are distributed based on the municipality\'s distribution key divided by the total distribution key for all municipalities if there are more than one municipality. It is not necessary to register a distribution key if there is only one municipality in the list. #### Wealth/property tax Basis for calculation specifies gross sales revenue for the current year, and sums up deductions for costs and ground rent tax. Gross sales revenue, gross operating costs and deductions for ground rent tax from the previous four years are taken from the previous year\'s tax return, and are not specified beyond this (new from 2023). The present value calculation itself is carried out by the Tax administration, and is entered in Period & Year from the Tax Administrations calculations. The present value of future replacement costs appears as the sum of values from the following objects linked to the power plant: - Separate operating assets in power plants, value of the individual acquisition - Balance depreciation See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Separate fixed assets in power plants /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant/separate-fixed-assets-power-plants page 2024-09-20T08:09:24+02:00 # Separate fixed assets in power plants In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Separate fixed assets in power plants.**. The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the Tax Administration.

Separate fixed assets in power companies consist of the following structures: - Fixed asset - Acquisitions related to the fixed asset The fixed asset contains information about the municipality and whether the investment cost is directly expensed in ground rent taxation. If a fixed asset is to have varying information about it, it must be split into several fixed assets. Disposal is registered on the fixed asset itself and not on the acquisitions. All investments are placed on the acquisition object, which is an underlying object of the fixed asset. The fixed asset also contains a separate profit and loss account, which is also included in the calculation of temporary differences. Fixed asset register : It is possible to register acquisitions of fixed assets in power companies in the **Fixed assets register**. In such cases, it is indicated that there is a \'Separate fixed assets in power plants\', and the desired parameters are registered. Acquisitions of separate fixed assets : This menu gives you the following options: : 1\. Import to Excel : 2\. Export to Excel : 3\. Filtered view : Filtering can be done on: : 1\. Power plant : 2\. Construction equipment : 3\. Base rate treatment : 4\. Acquisition year : There is a spreadsheet template for importing both new special fixed assets and acquisitions of existing special fixed assets in power companies. : There is an export function for this too, where export is made in the same format as import, so that you can export data, then modify data and import data again. :

The import function allows you to add:

1. Separate operating assets in power plants

2. Acquisition of a new or existing special operating asset in a power plant

See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Acquisitions of separate-fixed-assets /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant/acquisitions-separate-fixed-assets page 2024-09-20T08:09:24+02:00 # Acquisitions of separate-fixed-assets In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Acquisitions of separate-fixed-assets** The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the Tax Administration.

Acquisitions of separate fixed assets : This menu gives you the following options: : 1\. Import to Excel : 2\. Export to Excel : 3\. Filtered view : Filtering can be done on: : 1\. Power plant : 2\. Construction equipment : 3\. Base rate treatment : 4\. Acquisition year : There is a spreadsheet template for importing both new special fixed assets and acquisitions of existing special fixed assets in power companies. : There is an export function for this too, where export is made in the same format as import, so that you can export data, then modify data and import data again. :

The import function allows you to add:

1. Separate operating assets in power plants

2. Acquisition of a new or existing special operating asset in a power plant

See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Separate fixed assets under construction /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant/separate-fixed-assets-under-construction page 2024-09-20T08:09:24+02:00 # Separate fixed assets under construction In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Separate fixed assets under construction** The area is manually activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the Tax Administration.

This is a registration that is made in order to get the tax value included in the calculation of temporary differences. There is a separate menu item for this. Value 01.01. is not used for anything other than information. They are included in the calculation of the tax value of temporary differences per 01.01., but values ​​here are normally already overridden when transferring to the new year. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Balance depreciations etc. in power plants and fixed asset register /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant/balance-depreciation-in-power-plants page 2024-09-20T08:09:24+02:00 # Balance depreciations etc. in power plants and fixed asset register In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Balance depreciations etc. in power plants**. The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the Tax Administration.

#### Balance depreciation Balance depreciation : Balance depreciation, ordinary straight-line depreciation and non-depreciable tax fixed assets all have power plant information for fixed assets belonging to power plants. : Each depreciation object (e.g. a balance in balance depreciation) has a tick for the fact that it applies to hydropower plants, where you can tick this off. If this object concerns hydropower plants, there is also information about: : - Investment directly expensed in ground rent taxation : If you have investments that are both directly expensed and that are depreciated in the ordinary course of basic income taxation, you must divide them into two different balances. This also applies to cumulative balances, e.g. balance group d. : - Power plant : Here you choose which power station the object belongs to. If you have several power plants, you must have a balance for each of the power plants, also on aggregate balances such as e.g. balance group d. : - Is a fixed asset under construction (Choice Yes/No, where No is the default value) : - Calculated fields that are calculated by the Norwegian Tax Agency and read into the depreciation object: - This year\'s exempt income - Present value of future replacement costs Consumer price index-adjusted investment cost - Consumer price index-adjusted investment cost - Remaining life - Part of the year\'s investment cost that is directly expensed in ground rent income (registered). Balance depreciation etc. in power companies : There is a separate menu with an overview of all balance depreciation in the company, where you can see the special power plant fields. In this screen, you can filter on power plants and on basic interest treatment. : In this menu, you can export the existing balance depreciation, make adjustments to these in Excel, and import data back. You can choose to import everything, or only import data that applies to the specific power plant fields. : It is also possible to import data from Excel without performing an export first. In such cases, a template is used for import which is displayed for download when the import function is selected. #### Fixed asset register Separate operating assets in power companies acquired in previous years : Fixed assets that are of the type special fixed asset in power companies do not have an indication/link to fixed asset if it was acquired in previous years. : Access from previous years must be registered in the fixed asset register without reference to which specific fixed asset this belongs to. In order to update a special fixed asset in a power plant, you must therefore register previous years\' acquisitions in two places, both in the asset catalog and in an overview of acquisitions for a special fixed asset in a power company. : Any disposal of such a fixed asset must be registered both in the fixed assets register and in special fixed assets in power companies. Access/improvement to Separate fixed assets in power plants acquired in the current year : A special fixed asset in a power plant consists of a main fixed asset and one or more acquisitions of these. The fixed asset register can only enter references to a main operating asset that already exists. New operating assets must therefore first be registered in an overview of special fixed assets in power plants. After this has been done, you can enter the year\'s expenses for these. : The year\'s access can, if desired, if you use the fixed asset register in Period & Year, be registered in the fixed asset register and linked to the operating asset, so that it is only registered in one place. : If an access is deleted in the fixed asset register, it will also be deleted as an acquisition in the special fixed asset in the power company. The import function in the fixed asset register : In the case of imports into the fixed asset register, there is only support for imports of acquisitions in previous financial years. When importing this year\'s acquisitions, the following applies: : - The acquisition is marked with **Accounting presentation**. - The acquisition must also be imported in the function for importing acquisitions for special fixed assets in power companies. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Import of hydroelectric plant /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant/import-power-plant page 2024-09-20T08:09:24+02:00 # Import of hydroelectric plant #### Import Here is an overview of import functions that exist, and which are important for hydroelectric plants: Fixed asset register : In the case of imports into the facilities register, there is only support for imports of acquisitions in previous financial years. When importing this year\'s acquisitions, the following applies: : The acquisition is marked with **Accounting presentation**. : The acquisition must also be imported in the function for importing acquisitions for special fixed assets in power companies. Contract income in ground rent income : There is a spreadsheet template for importing contract income, which makes it easier if you have a certain amount of these. This can be found at the individual power plant on the separate **Contract income** tab. Acquisitions of special fixed assets : There is a spreadsheet template for importing both new special fixed assets and acquisitions of existing special fixed assets in power companies. : There is an export function for this too, where export is made in the same format as import, so that you can export data, then modify data and import data again. Balance depreciation etc. in power companies : In this menu, you can export the existing balance depreciation, make adjustments to these in Excel, and import data back. You can choose to import everything, or only import data that applies to the specific power plant fields. : It is also possible to import data from Excel without performing an export first. In such cases, a template is used for import which is displayed for download when the import function is selected. Shipping company taxation /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/shipping-company-taxation page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Shipping company taxation In **Year-end closing - Information on tax - Information - Basic values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Shipping company taxation** The area is automatically available if the company has stated YES that the company runs shipping operations and that it must be processed according to the special shipping taxation rules in § 8-10 of the Tax Act. The area can also be added manually from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the tax authorities for the calculation loop to work.

The work area replaces the former tax form RF-1197 - Tonnage taxation. The area consists of both manual fields and pre-calculated fields from the accounts and from calculated values from skatteetaten. #### The following fields are taken from the balance sheet/accounts - None #### The following fields are calculated/received from skatteetaten Information on EEA registered tonnage : - Taxable gain upon entry into the tonnage tax scheme Income supplement for high equity : - Total adjusted assets : - Average total adjusted assets Interest deduction and deductible currency loss/taxable currency gain : - Share of financial assets from underlying company at the beginning and end of the year - Average - Deductible interest expense - Average short-term currency gain - Average short-term currency loss for interest to other related parties cut off - Taxable realised long-term currency gain established from 2005 onwards - Deductible realised long-term currency loss established from 2005 onwards - Total taxable currency gain - Total taxable currency loss Calculation of tonnage tax : - Total tonnage tax in own company - Total tonnage tax Gain account : - Basis for current year income recognition - Recognition of gain account (calculated standard with 20%) - Outgoing value Calculation of financial income/financial deficit : - Total financial income - Total financial expenses

Incorrect completion in work area:

If the user by mistake has activated the workspace and filled in data but want to close it, some actions must be taken. All data the user has entered manually must be removed/deleted.

If the area contains registered ​​or overwritten values, the area will be locked and data may be kept on the preview of the tax return. Remove all manually recorded data and close the workspace from the area selector.

See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Onshore wind parks /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/onshore-wind-parks section 2025-03-28T16:20:53+01:00 # Onshore wind parks Onshore wind power can be activated for a client by opening **Edit areas** under **Year-End closing** - **Information and Tax** - **Information**. The feature consists of two menu items: - Onshore wind parks - Contracts in onshore wind farms Individual wind farms are registered in the **Onshore wind parks** menu. > [!NOTE]Read more about 'Resource rent tax on onshore wind power' >The Tax Administration has a dedicated information page for [Resource Rent Tax on onshore wind power](//www.skatteetaten.no/en/business-and-organisation/reporting-and-industries/industries-special-regulations/kraft/vindkraft/grunnrenteskatt-pa-landbasert-vindkraft/), which is important to familiarize yourself with. ### Menu Onshore wind parks On the **Information** tab, it is important to register the correct values in the field **Installed capacity in MW according to the concession** and in the field **Number of turbines**, as these fields are crucial for determining tax liability for resource rent income. On the **Income** tab and the **Deductions** tab, some fields will be calculated based on registered contracts, while other values are entered manually. The calculations may be possible to override on some values. The **Resource Rent Tax** tab shows the sum of income from the **Income** tab, while the total deductions from resource rent income are the sum from the **Deductions** tab, plus corporate tax from the **Corporate Tax** tab. On the **Corporate Tax** tab, depreciation deductions must be calculated and registered. These fields are not calculated by the Tax Administration. These calculations are complex. The Tax Administration provides information on these calculations from the webinars held in the fall of 2024, available on [Tax administration pages](//www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/rapportering-og-bransjer/bransjer-med-egne-regler/kraft/vindkraft/grunnrenteskatt-vindkraft/#webinarer).

Calculations made from contracts and internally on the Wind parks tab require you to be logged into the Tax Administration system, as the Tax Administration’s calculations are linked to the menu item.

### Menu Contracts in onshore wind farms Here, the various contracts for the sale of wind power are registered. Information on income, gains, and losses from these contracts will be transferred to fields on the **Income** tab under **Onshore wind parks**. Make sure to specifically check that gains and losses are included. Gains and losses from early termination will be transferred to separate items on the income tab. #### Investment cost (direct deduction) The company can directly deduct the current year's costs related to onshore wind park from the basis for resource rent tax when the fixed asset is used in resource rent taxable activities. Information about fixed assets used in resource rent taxable activities must also be provided under the **Fixed assets** section. #### Depreciation of other fixed assets this year Depreciation of assets that are not directly deducted may be deducted from resource rent income according to special rules. Information on fixed assets used in resource rent taxable activities must also be provided under the **Fixed Assets** section. See separate instructions for these fields under [Fixed Assets in onshore wind parks](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/onshore-wind-parks/fixed-assets). #### Gains and Losses on realization of fixed assets When realizing assets that are to be depreciated in resource rent income, the rules for deductions when determining ordinary income in Chapter 14 of the Tax Act, along with the special rules for wind power plants, apply. For assets that have been directly deducted from resource rent income, the entry value should be set to zero kroner. ### Tax calculation and posting of tax expenses For onshore power parks, there are specific reference accounts for tax expenses and balance sheet tax: - 1591 Tax value of carried forward negative resource rent income for onshore wind power - 1592 Carried forward production fee for onshore wind power - 2505 Payable resource rent tax for onshore wind power, not yet assessed - 8305 Resource rent tax for onshore wind power In the tax calculation, the tax calculation from the Tax Administration will be read, and the following values are used: - Value from the field **Resource Rent Tax in onshoew wind power**: Payable tax to be credited to account with reference account 2505 Payable resource rent tax for land-based wind power, not yet assessed. - Value from the field **Carryforward production fee including interest**: Future tax due will be debited to the account with reference account 1592 Carryforward production fee for onshore wind power. - Value from the field **Carryforward negative resource rent income including interest**: Future tax due will be debited to the account with reference account 1592 Carryforward production fee for onshore wind power, with the field value multiplied by the resource rent tax rate, which for 2024 is 31.2%. - The offset to changes in the value of the mentioned 3 accounts will be the account with reference account **8305 Resource rent tax for onshore wind power**. The calculated values can be overridden in the tax expense page and will then be posted with the overridden value. Notes will also use the overridden value. If an account does not exist, the account will be created automatically. In the note to the public financial statements, the balance from the mentioned accounts will appear in both tax expense and balance sheet tax.

Wind parks companies with participant taxed

Companies with participant taxation will automatically calculate positive or negative resource rent income for participant reporting.

For participants in wind park companies with participant taxation, there are separate items in the participant statement where values can be registered, which will also be retrieved from a potentially pre-filled tax return with these items.

 Fixed assets in onshore wind power /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/onshore-wind-parks/fixed-assets page Fixed assets, depreciation and direct deduction 2025-05-21T14:33:14+02:00 # Fixed assets in onshore wind power Fixed assets, depreciation and direct deduction There are specific rules for adjusting the depreciation base for assets acquired before 01.01.2024, and these calculations must be made for each individual asset for non-depreciable assets, linearly depreciated assets, and for each balance for balance-depreciated assets. If an asset or balance concerns assets both within and outside the resource rent taxable activity, they must be split into two parts: one for resource rent taxable activity and one outside the resource rent area, to ensure that depreciation, gains, and losses within and outside the resource rent area can be reported separately in the future. Alternatively, separate reports outside of Period & Year with these calculations must be kept. The latter option will require overrides for individual assets or balances for each year, and it is not recommended. > [!NOTE]Read more about 'Fixed assets in onshore wind power' >The specific transition rules for fixed assets can be found on the Norwegian Tax Administration's website, under the section for [Resource rent tax on onshore wind power](//www.skatteetaten.no/en/business-and-organisation/reporting-and-industries/industries-special-regulations/kraft/vindkraft/grunnrenteskatt-pa-landbasert-vindkraft/). The cost price of tangible fixed assets reduces taxable income according to several different regulations that must be treated separately: - Depreciation, gains, and losses under the normal rules for calculating the company's general income - Depreciation of the adjusted depreciation base as of 01.01.2024, with one-fifth annual depreciation for resource rent income - Direct deduction of acquisitions that can be directly deducted from the resource rent income - Depreciation of assets that are to be deducted in the calculation of corporate tax in the resource rent income Taxable objects can be one of the following: - Balance depreciation of assets in balance group e-j (special balances for each unit) - Balance depreciation of the master balance in balance groups a, c, and d - Non-depreciable assets - Linearly depreciated assets #### Used in resource rent taxable activities Here, the company must specify whether the taxable object is an asset used in resource rent taxable wind power installations. It is recommended to separate the objects so that there are separate master balances in groups a, c, and d for each wind park and for those outside the resource rent taxation. For other assets with mixed use, it is also recommended to separate assets into their own objects for each wind park and areas outside the resource rent zones. No deduction is allowed for activation costs for the acquisition of land or other payments to landowners, rights holders, municipalities, etc., as mentioned in the Tax Act § 18-10 third paragraph letter a number 1 third sentence, nor for costs related to the acquisition of existing wind power installations. These objects must therefore be treated as objects outside the resource rent area. Wind power installations that are realized without taxation, cf. Tax Act § 18-10 seventh paragraph letter b, must be treated separately regarding the continuation of the seller's tax positions. If the depreciation applies to assets linked to several wind power installations, the depreciation must be allocated between the wind power installations. It is recommended that for Period & Year, one object is created for each wind power installation, so that automatic calculations can be applied without the need for overrides. #### Separate treatment of assets acquired before 2024 and assets acquired in 2024 or later Assets acquired before 01.01.2024 shall have a new depreciation base calculated, which is only used when determining resource rent income, and this new depreciation base is depreciated with one-fifth annually from 2024 to 2028. Acquisitions made from 2024 onward will be directly deducted from the resource rent income. It is recommended to separate balance depreciation and other taxable objects from previous years and new objects to ensure that assets acquired before 01.01.2024 and assets acquired in 2024 and later are not recorded on the same balance or the same taxable object, thus simplifying the calculation of taxable depreciation. #### Directly expensed investment costs These are taxable objects marked with **Yes, with direct deduction**, but the field can be overridden if desired. Overriding is not necessary if assets acquired before and after 01.01.2024 are kept separate. The direct expensed investment cost for resource rent income in this year is entered in this field as an amount in NOK. This applies to investments made from 01.01.2024. On the **Wind Power** tab **Deductions**, the directly expensed investment cost will be deducted from the corresponding field in the depreciation of taxable objects. On the **Wind Power** tab **Corporate Tax**, the directly expensed investment cost will be reversed and replaced by the regular taxable depreciation of the same objects marked with **Yes, with direct deduction**. This field can also be overridden. #### Fixed assets from previous years The taxable value as of 01.01.2024 and the adjustment of the balance as of 01.01.2024 according to the specific rules for wind power installations must be registered manually, and depreciation of the depreciation base will be distributed with one-fifth depreciation in 2024 and the following four years (2025-2028) until the recalculated taxable value is fully depreciated in the resource rent income. Depreciation in resource rent tax with one-fifth annually from taxable depreciation will automatically transfer to the field for depreciation under **[Wind Power Installations](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/onshore-wind-parks)** tab **Deductions**. > [!IMPORTANT] > On the **Wind Power**-tab **Corporate Tax**, depreciation in resource rent tax will be reversed and replaced by taxable depreciation under other rules. These depreciations must be calculated separately and registered on this page. > > The specific transition rules for assets can be found on the Norwegian Tax Administration's website, under the section for [Resource Rent Tax on onshore wind parks](//www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/rapportering-og-bransjer/bransjer-med-egne-regler/kraft/vindkraft/grunnrenteskatt-vindkraft/). Aquaculture /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/aquaculture section 2025-03-25T07:49:38+01:00 # Aquaculture In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** you will find the work area for **Aquaculture**. The area is activated by selecting \'Aquaculture\' from **Edit feature areas.** The area consists of the following registration pages that have conditions that specially apply to aquaculture enterprises: - Asset register - Tax depreciation - Aquaculture The **Summary-tab** contains a summary of calculated values from ground rent income before and after coordination with other group companies.

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the tax authorities.

#### Coordination of ground rent income in the group The **Summary-tab** includes registration of conditions affecting ground rent income, including coordination with other companies in the group, and the registered values affect the final coordinated ground rent income. #### Tax-related depreciations Under **Aquaculture taxation**, for each balance depreciation, straight-line depreciation, and non-depreciable objects, it is possible to choose how this will affect the calculation of ground rent income in aquaculture. Here are the following five options that determine the treatment in the calculation of ground rent income: - Yes, with direct deduction - Yes, with depreciation - Yes, partially - Yes, with depreciation - fixed asset acquired from related parties - Yes, partially - fixed asset acquired from related parties For choices marked with "partially", it must be stated how large a proportion applies to aquaculture, and the excess is considered outside the ground rent area. The choices made here will affect the amounts calculated in the fields of ground rent income: - Investment costs related to aquaculture activities - This year's depreciation on fixed assets used in aquaculture operations that are directly expensed - Tax depreciation of fixed assets from historical investment upon entry - Tax depreciation for operating assets in aquaculture operations #### Fixed asset register When registering in the asset register, the same five choices are available, so when registering an asset card, one can choose among these five, the choices of tax depreciation, and the system will filter on the choices, so one can only choose among balance deprecations, etc. that have stated the same selection as what one wishes to register as acquisition. #### Ground rent income Ground rent income is found under the choice **Aquaculture** under **Information and tax - Information**. Specification of gross rent income : Gross ground rent income must be registered in this menu. #### Registration of Volume Purchases and sales of live fish are recorded on the **Volume** tab together with a specification of the volume sold and the amount of harvested fish. Harvested fish must be divided between valuation by the price council and self-determination. Specification of Deduction in Ground Rent Income : Deduction in ground rent income consists of both data that are registered and data that are calculated by the Tax Administration based on other data in the aquaculture function and values from tax depreciation. #### Depreciation Depreciations and directly deducted investment cost are shown on the **Depreciation** tab with a specification of each tax object (balance deprecations or straight-line depreciated operational assets). Below, some calculations are commented upon. This Year\'s Calculated Corporate Tax on Ground Rent Taxable Operation : Calculated by the Tax Administration based on data in the industry specification aquaculture function. Carried Forward Calculated Negative Corporate Tax : Calculated by the Tax Administration based on data in the industry specification aquaculture function. Carry Forward Negative Ground Rent Income from Previous Years : The first year with ground rent income is 2023, so carrying forward from 2022 or earlier is not applicable. The first year of using the field is for 2024, where carrying forward from 2023 will be possible to register here. Calculated Corporate Tax and Calculated Negative Corporate Tax to Carry Forward : Calculations of calculated fields are obtained from the Tax Administration\'s calculations, and are sourced from the Tax Administration\'s calculation functions. #### Production Units On the **Production units** tab, an overview of the production units is registered along with information about the disposal and transfer of ground rent taxable aquaculture operation. #### Wealth of Aquaculture Permits Aquaculture permits are registered in the aquaculture function on the **Wealth** tab. Here, the sales value is registered, and other calculations happen automatically. The reference account for aquaculture permits is reference account number 1042 Aquaculture Permits. On the wealth tab, the wealth of aquaculture permits is shown on a separate line in the upper part of the image, while reference account 1042 Aquaculture Permits will show 0 in the wealth column in the lower part of the wealth image.

For sole proprietorships with aquaculture operations, the wealth of aquaculture permits must be manually registered along with account 1042 Aquaculture Permits under code 1020 Permanent concessions, patents, licenses, rights, etc.

#### Tax Calculation and Accounting of Ground Rent Tax The tax calculation is found under **Information and tax - Tax Calculation** under the left menu **Tax expense**. Accounts specially for tax on aquaculture operation (incorporated companies etc.): - 1578 Tax value of carried forward negative ground rent income for aquaculture - 2504 Payable ground rent tax for aquaculture, not offset - 8304 Ground rent tax for aquaculture Tax costs, the tab Tax Calculation from Skatteetaten will show the Tax Administration\'s calculation of ground rent tax from aquaculture operation, and will automatically, from the Tax Administration\'s calculations, post amounts in the posts in the **Tax Calculation** tab: - Calculated ground rent tax in aquaculture - Negative coordinated ground rent tax incl. interest addition to carry forward Coordinated ground rent tax comes from coordinated negative ground rent income multiplied by the tax rate. #### Participant report from participation in a company with participant taxation in aquaculture The Participant report is activated by going to the **Area Selector** under **Information and tax** and selecting the area **Participant in a partnership**. The area Participant in a partnership will automatically be activated if some partnership accounts are accounted for. When registering a participant in a partnership, one can tick off for **Participant in aquaculture activities,** and then register relevant items: - Share of positive resource rent revenue before coordination - Share of negative resource rent revenue before coordination - Share of production tax Note that these values are not automatically transferred to aquaculture operation, so data from participation in SDF within aquaculture must also be registered in the ground rent calculation for aquaculture.

Company with participant taxation within aquaculture, tasks for their own participants

The values for participants are found under the menu Information and tax - Participants and choose Participants in the left menu. For each participant, values that concern the aquaculture operation are found on the Wealth/Income tab. There is a separate section Participant in Aquaculture activities here with the values

  • Share of positive resource rent income before coordination
  • Share of negative resource rent income before coordination
  • Share of production tax
  • Share of positive resource rent income for companies with participant determination (SDF) before coordination, after base deduction

These values ​​are calculated. All values ​​can also be overridden on each of the participants.

 Aquaculture and ground rent /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/aquaculture/aquaculture-groundrent page Guide to records extracted from the Tax Administration help text. 2025-03-25T07:49:38+01:00 # Aquaculture and ground rent Guide to records extracted from the Tax Administration help text. ## Aquaculture activities and ground rent **The company’s share of maximum allowed biomass before base deduction** The company states its share of the total maximum allowed biomass for all companies that are included in the allocation of the base deduction. The share must correspond to the company’s own maximum allowed biomass. **The company’s share of base deduction** Positive resource rent income is reduced with a base deduction. The reduction happens after any coordination of resource rent income in groups. For the income year 2024, the base deduction is assessed to NOK 70 million. When calculating resource rent income, the base deduction must be adjusted downwards with the tax rate for general income, which amounts to NOK 54.6 million for the income year 2024. The base deduction can only be deducted from positive resource rent income. The base deduction can only be deducted once on group level. See an extended definition of groups in section 19-3 of the Taxation Act. The base deduction is allocated proportionally based on the maximum allowed biomass per company. An unused base deduction cannot be carried forward to later years. Nor can an unused base deduction in one company be transferred to or coordinated with another company in the group. **Negative resource rent tax upon discontinuation** The tax value of negative resource rent income upon discontinuation can be claimed as payment. Payments cannot be claimed in other circumstances where negative resource rent income arises. It is not a condition for payment that negative resource rent income is offset against positive resource rent income from other group companies. **Own production fee** The company can claim deductions in the resource rent tax for production fees on the production of fish, assessed according to the Excise Tax Act. The resource rent tax cannot be negative as the result of deducting a production fee. A production fee that has not been deducted cannot be deducted in a future income year. For taxpayers liable for resource rent tax, the production fee cannot be deducted from the ordinary income. An unused production fee can be transferred between companies in a group. The transfer right applies to private limited companies and equivalent companies and organisations that are comprised by the rules in chapter 19 of the Taxation Act. The conditions set out in section 10-4 of the Taxation Act to grant and receive group contributions must be fulfilled. An unused production fee in a company in a group is only deductible in the assessed resource rent tax of another company in the group. **Granted production fee to another company** If the company has granted a production fee to another company in the group, the amount is entered here. You must also provide information about the company that has received the production fee. **Received production fee from another company** If the company claims a deduction for a production fee in another company in the group, the amount is entered here. You must also provide information about the company that has transferred the production fee. **Granted resource rent income to another company** If the company has granted resource rent income to another company in the group, the amount is entered here. You must also provide information about the company that has received the resource rent income. **Received resource rent income from another company** If the company has received resource rent income from another company in the group, the amount is entered here. You must also provide information about the company that has granted the resource rent income. ### Income in gross resource rent income **The pen-side market value of sold fish multiplied by the slaughter volume - assessed by the company** Annual gross resource rent income must be set to the pen-side market value of sold salmon, trout and rainbow trout multiplied by the slaughter volume. The sales income is considered as gained when the fish passes the edge of the pen. If the fish is not sold at the edge of the pen, for example, because the fish is first sold to an external party after transport, slaughter, or preparation, the company must assess the pen-side market value for the 2024 income year itself. It must be adjusted for added value after the fish passes the edge of the pen so that the increase in value from activities after the sea phase is not included in the resource rent income. Increased sales value, for example, as a result of processing and further refinement, sales and marketing activities and transport, should not be included in the tax settlement price at the edge of the pen. When calculating the market value, all circumstances that may have affected the value at the edge of the pen must be taken into consideration. **The pen-side market value of sold fish multiplied by the slaughter volume - assessed by the Price Council** Annual gross resource rent income must be set to the pen-side market value of sold salmon, trout and rainbow trout multiplied by the slaughter volume. The sales income is considered as gained when the fish passes the edge of the pen. If the fish is not sold at the edge of the pen, for example, because the fish is first sold to an external party after transport, slaughter, or preparation, the company must assess the pen-side market value for the 2024 income year itself. It must be adjusted for added value after the fish passes the edge of the pen so that the increase in value from activities after the sea phase is not included in the resource rent income. Increased sales value, for example, as a result of processing and further refinement, sales and marketing activities and transport, should not be included in the tax settlement price at the edge of the pen. When calculating the market value, all circumstances that may have affected the value at the edge of the pen must be taken into consideration. **Harvest volume in kg (gutted fish)** The field refers to the number of kilograms of gutted fish. The company can use the conversion as referred to in the Regulations on Special Taxes § 3-24-2. **Income from the sale of live fish in the sea phase** By the sale of live fish in the sea phase, we mean sales where the fish is not taken out of the sea phase in the production process in connection with the sale. This can, among other things, be relevant for joint operation or co-localisation. For fish in the sea phase that is jointly owned by two or more parties, changes in the co-owner position against remuneration are considered as the sale of live fish for the party that has their co-owner share reduced. The gross income on the sale of live fish in the sea phase is assessed to the market value of the fish at the time of sale. **Gain on divestment of fixed assets** For the divestment of fixed assets that have been recognised directly as a deduction in the resource rent income, the input value must be set to NOK zero, so that the whole sales revenue will be taxed. The remuneration is to be included in the resource rent income for the year of divestment. It is not possible to defer the taxation, for example, by recognising the income on the profit and loss account. Upon the divestment of fixed assets that have not been recognised directly as an expense, the amount recognised as income must be included in the resource rent income in accordance with the ordinary rules on timing in chapter 14 of the Taxation Act. The calculation of the size of the gain is based on the remuneration upon divestment, less taxable value at the start of the year. Gain upon the divestment of aquaculture licences is not included in the resource rent income. In the case of divestment of depreciated fixed assets that are used partly in own activities subject to resource rent tax and partly in other activities, a share of the profit must be included in the resource rent income according to use. When calculating the share, this must be based on the use of the fixed asset in the previous income year. See separate calculation fields to be used for total divestment of aquaculture activities. **Gain on withdrawal of fixed asset** The same rules that apply to divestment also apply to the calculation of gain in connection with withdrawal of fixed assets. See the field for gain on divestment of fixed assets. **Other income** Here the company may enter any other income subject to resource rent tax that is not included in the above fields. The amount is explained in a separate text field. ### Deductions in gross resource rent income **Total operating costs** The company can claim deductions for incurred operating costs that regularly follow from the activities that are subject to resource rent tax in the sea phase. Examples of deductible operating cost are costs for - the purchase or production of hatchery produced fish for stocking - feed - keeping - prevention and treatment of lice, deceases, and similar - salary and other personnel expenses - energy - maintenance - insurance - administration - research and development - environmental measures - recapturing of escaped fish Deductions are not granted for costs for activities after the sea phase. **Share of remuneration on the purchase of licences, etc.** A deduction is given for 40 percent of the paid remuneration for purchases at the auctions in 2018 and 2020 and the fixed-price distribution in 2020. The deduction is distributed over the income years 2023 to 2027 with equal amounts. The amount is adjusted downwards with the tax rate for general income, which is 22 percent. This constitutes a deduction of 31.2 percent of paid remuneration (40 x (1-0.22) = 31.2 percent). The company must not adjust the amount in this field ("Share of remuneration on the purchase of licences, etc.") downwards by 22 percent. This is because the amount is included in the calculation of the calculated company tax pursuant to section 19-6, subsection 3, of the Taxation Act, and is therefore technically adjusted downwards with the tax rate for general income. **Remuneration for the purchase of live fish in the sea phase** Here you enter the cost price upon the purchase of live fish that were in the sea phase at the time of purchase. The purchase of live fish in the sea phase can, among other things, be relevant for joint operation or co-localisation. For fish in the sea phase that is jointly owned by two or more parties, changes in the co-owner position against remuneration are considered as the purchase of live fish for the party that has their co-owner share increased. The cost upon the purchase of live fish in the sea phase is assessed to the market value of the fish at the time of sale. **Property tax** The company can claim a deduction for property tax on floating fish farms at sea. This applies to physical installations such as, for example, - pens - floating modules - feeding machines - feeding storages - living space - sanitary facilities A partial deduction is given for facilities that are used partly for activities subject to resource rent tax. The distribution must be carried out in a way that is suitable for providing a correlation between the cost share and use for each activity. Property tax on other aquaculture facilities that are used for the food fish farming of salmon, trout and rainbow trout in the sea phase is deductible according to the degree the facility is linked to these activities. This applies to, for example, storage buildings onshore that are partly linked to the aquaculture activities that are subject to resource rent tax and partly linked to the taxpayer’s other activities. **Research tax** Research tax, assessed pursuant to the Act of 7 July 2000 no. 68 on tax for research and development in the fisheries and aquaculture industry, is deductible in the resource rent income. Market tax is not deductible in the resource rent income. **Investment cost (recognised directly as an expense)** The company can deduct the income year’s costs linked to floating fish farms at sea directly in the basis for resource rent tax, if the fixed asset is used exclusively in activities subject to resource rent tax. This includes physical installations such as pens floating modules feeding machines feeding storages living spaces sanitary facilities and similar anchor weights and similar for anchoring The direct deductibility also applies to other physical installations linked to the facility that are exclusively for use in the activities that are subject to resource rent tax. - This includes, for example, - facilities and installations that supply energy to the operation of the fish farming facility - working boats - systems for handling dead fish - water treatment systems - biomass measuring device - other electronic fixed assets that monitor the fish Information on fixed assets for use in activities subject to resource rent tax must also be given under the topic Fixed assets. See the special guidance for these fields under the topic Fixed assets. **This year’s depreciation of other fixed assets** This year’s depreciation of fixed assets that have not been recognised directly as a deduction can be deducted in the resource rent income pursuant to the ordinary rules of the Taxation Act when they are fully or partly used as input goods in the resource rent activities. This can apply to, for example, well boats that are used to deliver well boat services when the well boats are also used in the activities subject to resource rent tax. The same applies to facilities for hatchery produced fish for stocking and feeding production facilities, where the taxpayer produces hatchery produced fish for stocking or feed, both for own use and for sale. Information on fixed assets for use in activities subject to resource rent tax must also be given under the topic Fixed assets. See the special guidance for these fields under the topic Fixed assets. **Loss on divestment of fixed assets** Upon the divestment of fixed assets that are to be depreciated in the resource rent income, the rules on deduction upon assessment of ordinary income in chapter 14 of the Taxation Act applies. Upon the divestment of a fixed asset that have been recognised directly as a deduction in the resource rent income, the opening value is set to NOK zero. A loss upon the divestment of aquaculture licences is not deductible in the resource rent income. Upon the divestment of depreciable fixed assets that are used partly in activities subject to resource rent tax and partly in other activities, a share of the loss must be deducted in the resource rent income according to use. When calculating the share, this must be based on the use of the fixed asset in the previous income year. See separate calculation fields to be used for total divestment of aquaculture activities. **Loss on withdrawal of fixed assets** The same rules that apply to divestment apply to the calculation of loss in connection with withdrawal of fixed assets. See the field for loss on divestment of fixed assets. **Other deduction** Here the company may enter any other expenses that they claim a deduction for and that is not included in the above fields. The amount is explained in a separate text field. ### Taxes in resource rent **Calculated negative company tax to carry forward** If the calculated company tax is negative, it must be carried forward for deduction in calculated company tax for later income years. ### Non-depreciable operating assets, ground rent in aquaculture **Used in activities subject to resource rent tax** Here, the company must provide information about whether the relevant balance group includes fixed assets that are used in aquaculture activities subject to resource rent tax. **Investment cost directly recognised as a cost** Here you enter this year’s investment cost that has been recognised directly as a deduction in the resource rent income in NOK. **Tax value of purchases from related parties** Here the company provides information on continued tax value upon purchases from related parties in the current income year, stated in NOK. ### Straight-line depreciated operating assets, ground rent in aquaculture **Used in activities subject to resource rent tax** Here, the company must provide information about whether the relevant balance group includes fixed assets that are used in aquaculture activities subject to resource rent tax. **Investment cost directly recognised as a cost** Here you enter this year’s investment cost that has been recognised directly as a deduction in the resource rent income in NOK. **This year's depreciation in resource rent income on fixed assets that are depreciated ordinarily** Here you enter this year’s depreciation that is recognised directly as a deduction in the resource rent income in NOK. The amount entered here is the same amount that the company claims a deduction for in the resource rent income, which means the calculated deduction after any allocation between activities subject to resource rent tax and other activities. **Tax value of purchases from related parties** Here the company provides information on continued tax value upon purchases from related parties in the current income year, stated in NOK. ### Balance depreciated operating assets, ground rent in aquaculture **Used in activities subject to resource rent tax** Here, the company must provide information about whether the relevant balance group includes fixed assets that are used in aquaculture activities subject to resource rent tax. **Investment cost directly recognised as a cost** Here you enter this year’s investment cost that has been recognised directly as a deduction in the resource rent income in NOK. **This year's depreciation in resource rent income on fixed assets that are depreciated ordinarily** Here you enter this year’s depreciation that is recognised directly as a deduction in the resource rent income in NOK. The amount entered here is the same amount that the company claims a deduction for in the resource rent income, which means the calculated deduction after any allocation between activities subject to resource rent tax and other activities. **Tax value of purchases from related parties** Here the company provides information on continued tax value upon purchases from related parties in the current income year, stated in NOK. Additional information /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/additional-info section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Additional information In the menu on the left under **Additional information**, you enter information and values that are theme or industry specific. All areas are not displayed in the left menu by default. There is an auto setting which makes some areas in **Additional information** visible dependent on account balance or previous values. Click on **Edit feature ares** to edit the auto settings or show a menu which is not displayed.

You can’t hide a feature area if it contains data. If an are is locked due to existing values in this area, you should delete data first.

 Property /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/additional-info/property page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Property Click the **Add property** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new property by selecting a type of property. If you select **Norwegian real estate** you will see a dialog where you can search by address or cadastre to find you property. Click **Add**and the property is created in a separate tab. Fill in the fields that are displayed, the system only displays relevant fields based on selection in the registration. You can delete a property by clicking the **Delete property** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an **Overview**of created properties. Calculated wealth tax values are transferred to **Information and tax - Wealth**. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Accommodation and public house /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/additional-info/accomodation page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Accommodation and public house Accommodation and restaurants should be completed and submitted with the tax return for businesses. The information is used by the Norwegian tax authorities for statistics, analyzes etc. Click the **Add accommodation/restaurant** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new location. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The location is created in a separate tab. You can change the name/description for the accommodation/restaurant. You can delete a location by clicking the **Delete accommodation/restaurant** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created locations. The total inventory and income and withdrawal are summed up for all accommodations/restaurant. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Financial products /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/additional-info/financial-products page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Financial products Financial products should be submitted by limited companies with taxable gains, dividends and/or deductible losses on shares and other financial products. Financial products' includes shares, mutual funds, bonds, options and other derivatives, etc. Click on one of the tabs with financial products to add a new product. Registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the tax return for submission. Financial products are created in separate tabs per type. To add/delete products click on the +/- icons at the end of each row in each tab. Fill in the fields that are displayed. See [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information about financial products.

Basis for 3 % income / deduction is transferred to Information - Additional information - Exemption method - 3 % income.

Read more in Tax calculation.

 Exemption method /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/additional-info/exemption-method page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Exemption method Some values from**Information - Additional information - Financial products** are transferred automatically and used as basis when calculating the basis for 3 % income below exemption method.

Calculation of 3% income of positive basis is transferred to permanent differences.

Read more in Tax calculation.

 Taxis and cargo transport /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/additional-info/taxi-cargo-transport page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Taxis and cargo transport Taxi and cargo transport-should be completed and submitted with the new tax return for businesses. Start by adding a permission number and industry on the overview page. Then click the **Add vehicle** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new vehicle. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The vehicle is created in a separate tab and linked to a specific permission number. You can change the name/description for the vehicle.

The registration page for taxi and cargo transport is dynamic in relation to what is registered. Fields are only displayed if they are relevant in the situation, depending on industry.

You can delete a vehicle by clicking the **Delete vehicle** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created vehicles. The total income from driving are summed up for all vehicles. See [Tax return for taxi and freight transport.](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/hjelp-til-skattemelding/drosje/) Holding of shares in other companies /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/additional-info/holding-of-shares page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Holding of shares in other companies Click the **Add holding of shares** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new tab with holding of shares. The registration page for holding of shares is dynamic in relation to what is registered. Fields are only displayed if they are relevant in the situation, depending on registration in other fields. Holding of shares are created in separate tabs. You can delete a tab by clicking the **Delete holding of shares** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview and reconciliation of created holding of shares grouped on account with a summation of all items. Calculated wealth value is transferred to **Wealth.** See the [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Third party data /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/additional-info/thirdparty-information page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Third party data Third party data is used for prefill in the tax return and should be submitted to the Tax administration. In **Information - Additional information** you will find pages for registration of, - Minding and care of children - Donations to certain voluntary organization etc. - Payments to self-employed persons Third party data for Condominium flat owner and Housing cooperative can be found in **[Housing](/periodandyear/help/housing).**

Import third party data from excel

Click on the Import tasks from excel –icon in the upper right corner to start the import wizard. The import requires the information to be in a specific format. A template can be downloaded from the dialog.

  1. Drop or browse for the excel file you want to import (*.xlsx or *.xls).
  2. Select Replace or add content.
  3. Click Next to load and validate data.
  4. Select the rows you would like to import and click Import.
  1. Click Close to return to the main page.

Address information will be used for distribution but is not sent to the Tax administration and therefore not mandatory. Click on Generate PDF to download information letter. Generated PDF files are downloaded according to the default download space in your browser settings.

Lists with registered data can be found in **Reports**. Read more about [Third party data](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/rapportering-og-bransjer/tredjepartsopplysninger/). Participant in a partnership /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/additional-info/participant-in-a-partnership page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Participant in a partnership Click the **Add participant assignment** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new tab with participant in a partnership. Participant in a partnership are created in separate tabs. You can delete a tab by clicking the **Delete participant assignment** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created participant assignments with a summation of all assignments. Calculated **Net positive wealth before valuation discount** or **Negative net wealth (debt)s** is transferred to **Wealth.** See the [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Cooperative enterprises /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/additional-info/cooperative-enterprise page 2025-02-18T16:31:35+01:00 # Cooperative enterprises In **Year-end closing - Tax Information - Information - Additional Information - Cooperative Enterprises**, cooperative enterprises can provide information about the proportion of taxable income derived from the company\'s transactions with its own members. The area consists of both manual fields and pre-calculated fields from the accounting. You must calculate some values yourself based on whether they relate to Sales to or Purchase from members, Repayment to members in the same cooperative enterprise, and Carried forward deduction limit from previous years. See [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field Descriptions Dropdown menu containing the following enterprise types: 1. Consumer cooperative with a fixed point of sale, where more than half of the regular turnover is with the enterprise's members (sales/turnover to members). 2. Purchasing cooperative that distributes pre-determined goods among its members (sales/turnover to members). 3. Enterprise that exclusively or primarily purchases raw materials or fixed assets for use in agriculture, forestry, or fishing (sales/turnover to members). 4. Enterprise that exclusively or primarily deals in products from members' agricultural, forestry, or fishing operations (purchases from members). 5. Enterprise that exclusively or primarily processes products from members' agricultural or fishery operations (purchases from members). ### Area: Turnover * This is controlled by the selected cooperative enterprise type above. Sales to members in own cooperative enterprise (excluding VAT) / Purchases from members in own cooperative enterprise (excluding VAT) Here, net sales/turnover to / purchases from members in the cooperative enterprise are entered (automatically selected based on the chosen cooperative enterprise type above). * Sales to members in another cooperative enterprise (excluding VAT) / Purchases from members in another cooperative enterprise (excluding VAT) Here, net sales/turnover to / purchases from members in another cooperative enterprise are entered (automatically selected based on the chosen cooperative enterprise type above). * Other turnover (excluding VAT) Calculated residual amount (Total sales/turnover minus sales/purchase activity related to members). * Total turnover: Total sales/turnover/purchases retrieved from the trial balance (automatically calculated). ### Area: Taxable Business Income * Taxable business income for cooperative enterprises: This value is automatically retrieved from the tax calculation. * Share of turnover derived from members of the cooperative enterprise: Automatically calculated value. * Taxable business income from transactions with members of the cooperative enterprise: * Are the conditions for deduction of back payments met? Yes/No This selection indicates whether the cooperative enterprise meets the conditions outlined in Section 10-50 of the Tax Act and Section 4-27 of the Cooperative Societies Act. * Deduction limit from this year's business income with members of the cooperative enterprise: Automatically calculated value. * Allocated profit to the member capital account: Manually enter any amount of this year’s “Taxable business income from transactions with members of the cooperative enterprise” that is to be allocated to the member capital account. (Option for automatic system posting by selecting this.) * Available for distribution to members of the cooperative enterprise: Calculated from the two values provided above. ### Area: Bonus payments to members **From this year's profit**: Enter the amount to be back-paid to members of the cooperative enterprise from this year's available distribution. (Option for automatic system posting by selecting this.) **From the member capital account**: Enter the amount to be paid from previous allocations to the member capital account (under the conditions specified in Section 10-50, subsection 5 of the Tax Act, and Section 4-29, subsection 2 of the Cooperative Societies Act). > [!NOTE] > If the amount entered here exceeds the sum of "Available for payments to members of the cooperative enterprise" and "Carry-forward deduction limit from previous years", the excess will be recorded as "Addition for non-deductible back payment." > >The excess amount is added to taxable income. This value will appear under Tax Calculation / Other taxable income and will be included in the tax return. **From arrears fund**: Enter the amount you wish to pay from the arrears fund account. The payment does not result in a deduction from income. (Option for automatic system posting by checking this box.) ### Area: Limitation of deduction right for bonus-payments from the year's profit See previous note ### Area: Carryforward Deduction Limit Carry-forward deduction limit from previous years: Manual entry * (-) Applied deduction limit from previous years: Automatically calculated value * (+) Carry-forward deduction limit from this year's business income: Automatically calculated value * (-) Applied carried-forward deduction limit for bonus payments this year: Automatically calculated value: * (=) Carry-forward deduction limit to future years: Automatically calculated value Controlled transactions and balances /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/additional-info/controlled-transactions-balances page 2025-01-13T17:52:25+01:00 # Controlled transactions and balances In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Additional information** ​​- you will find the work area for **Controlled transactions and balances.** The area is automatically available if the company stated 'YES' that the company has transactions or balances with related parties above the amount limits, in **Information - Various information - Transactions and balances.**. The area can also be opened manually by using the **Edit feature** areas selector.

Note that inside the work area you must tick “Yes” if you have transactions over the amount limit to bring up areas for registering data. The area does not require logging in to the tax authority for 2024, unlike for 2023.

The work area replaces the previous form RF-1123 Controlled transactions and accounts outstanding. When the work area is opened, you get to the overview screen where you enter general information in editable fields as well as "drop down" menus. Each individual transaction type or balance is selected from drop-down menus in the respective tabs and amounts are entered. The specification and overview are then transferred to the tax return. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Discharge of asset or liability from Norwegian territory /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/additional-info/discharge-asset-liability page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Discharge of asset or liability from Norwegian territory In **Year-end closing - Information on tax - Information - Basic values**​ you will find the work area for **Discharge of asset or liability from Norwegian territory.** The area is selected manually by using the **Edit feature** areas selector. The work area replaces the previous form RF-1109 Removal from Norwegian tax jurisdiction. You manually register information about gains or losses for withdrawals and specifies relevant assets or liabilities from a list of various categories. Information from this work area will be filled in the business specification. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Tax calculation /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/tax-calculation section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Tax calculation In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Tax calculation**, you calculate **Business Income**, **Taxable result** and **Accounting result after tax**. In the menu to the left calculations from **Accounting result before tax** to **Accounting result after tax** are shown. You can click on each line in the calculation and make adjustments. You approve the calculation lines by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**. When the status is set to **Done**, the symbol changes colour to green and you can no longer make changes in the view to the right. If you have approved a section in the calculation view and later there are changes in pre-populated values, the status symbol will change colour from green to orange. Go through and check the updated values and approve again. The grey fields are populated by values generated by the system on reference account level. You can change the reference account for a client account in **Maintenance - Client chart of accounts**. Grey fields are fields with system generated values. To display which accounts that are mapped to a field, click on the menu icon that appears when you hold the cursor over a field and select **Show accounts**. If there are mapped accounts with no balances, you can display these as well by marking the checkbox **Include mapped accounts without balances** at the top of the dialogue. You can override a system generated value by clicking on the menu icon. Select **Override amount**. Overridden fields changes colour from grey to yellow. In order to set back the value, click on the field and the menu-symbol once more and select **Reset amount**. White fields are for manual input of values. When a field in the program has a corresponding field in a tax form, the amount you enter will be transferred to this form. The tax forms are found in **Year-end closing - Tax forms**. The calculations starts with **Accounting result before tax** in the menu to the left. Click on each of the posts below to make adjustments according to tax regulations for **Additional business income**, **Deduction business income** and **Changes in temporary differences**. In the view to the right, you can then check and adjust the different values. Approve the values by clicking on the status symbol in the column Done. The adjustments affect the **Total business income**, which corresponds to field 0999 in tax form RF-1167, and is transferred as field 201/222 in tax form RF-1028. Under **Total business income** you can make adjustments according to tax regulations for **Other taxable income and deductions**, **Application of forward losses** and **Other adjustments**. Click on each of these lines to check and adjust the different values in the view to the right. Approve the values by clicking on the status symbol in column **Done**. The adjustments affect the **Total taxable result**, which corresponds to post 260 in tax form RF-1028. The **Accounting result after tax** is calculated by subtracting the tax expense from **Accounting result before tax**. Click on the line **Tax expense** to check the calculation. Approve the calculation by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**. Go to **Allocation of result** to allocate the **Accounting result after tax**. Approve the allocation by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**. You can create closing entries manually by clicking on the scale symbol in the upper right or by navigating to **Year-end closing - Closing entries**. Select **Create**to manually create a closing entry. In **Closing entries**, you can see that the system has generated closing entries relating to changes in temporary differences, changes to equity and payable tax. These closing entries are updated when changes are made, unless the period has been locked. You can lock and unlock periods on the **Start page**. To be able to edit **Year-end closing - Information and tax**, the last ordinary period must be locked. For example, if the financial year is 01.01 - 31.12, the period December must be locked to enable editing in **Year-end closing**. ## Checklist The checklist, which is located in the side panel, is accessed by clicking on the icon in the upper right and helps you to document the work you have done. In the side panel, the task list for your selection in the left hand panel is shown. To add a comment to a task, click on the row or on the comment icon in the **Actions** column and enter your comment. To mark a task as done, click on the check mark in the **Actions** column. Click on the check mark again to undo this action. A task can be marked as **N/A**, which means that it is not applicable. You can modify the checklist to show only the tasks you want. Click on **Edit checklist** in the bottom of the side panel to do this. In this view, you can choose which tasks are active. You can add your own tasks to the checklist. This is also done in the **Edit checklist** view. The tasks you add yourself can be activated and deactivated in the same way as the standard tasks, and can also be deleted. The tasks that you have added yourself have a blue icon in the task list so that they can be easily identified. The checklist is available for print in **Year-end closing - Reports**. Choose which parts you want to include in your report in the left hand panel and select **Generate report - Download PDF**. Additional business income /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/tax-calculation/additional-business-income page 2025-03-21T16:03:40+01:00 # Additional business income Here you can specify costs from the income statement that are to be reversed and other items. Costs in the income statement relating to shares, units and other securities are reversed to specified fields, whereas taxable amounts for these items - where applicable - are re-entered in separate fields.

The individual available fields vary by company type. Only the fields that have numbers will be displayed. Data is transferred from other menus where data has been registered.

Click **Show all** to see all fields, including fields with a 0 value. ## Field explanations The following items are filled in on the basis of balances on relevant accounts: Non-deductible costs (representation, dues, gifts, other) : . Positive tax expense (Only relevant for impersonal companies) : . Interest expense on determined tax (not relevant for companies with participant determination) : . Accounting write-down of shares and other financial instruments this year : . Accounting loss on realization of shares and other financial instruments : . Accounting deficit on share in Norwegian companies with participant determination : . Accounting deficit on shares in foreign companies with participant determination : . Accounting loss upon realization of share in Norwegian companies with participant determination : . Accounting loss upon realization of shares in foreign companies with participant determination : . Loss share from investment in subsidiaries, associated companies and joint ventures (not relevant for sole proprietorships) : . Reversal of impairment of financial instruments measured at fair value : . Interest expenses recorded in the income statement for ENK (only relevant for sole proprietorships) : . The following items are filled in on the basis of registrations of shares in joint ventures with participant determination (not relevant for sole proprietorships, where such income is entered directly in the tax return): Share of taxable profit in Norwegian companies with participant determination : . Share of taxable profit in foreign companies with participant determination : . Taxable gain on realization of shares in Norwegian companies with participant determination : . Taxable gain on realization of shares in foreign companies with participant determination : . The following items are filled in on the basis of registrations under financial instruments and/or 3% income recognition (not relevant for sole proprietorships, where such income is entered directly in the tax return): Taxable gain on the sale of shares and other financial instruments : Taxable dividends on shares, etc. including surcharges pursuant to Section 16-30 (5) of the Tax Act : This field should be used if taxable gain from withdrawal from Norwegian tax jurisdiction has been made. The amount is retrieved from RF-1109. Business assessed as partnerships shall only fill in this field if it is marked in field 150 in RF-1109. This value is automatically transferred to RF-1167, field 0675. 3 percent of net tax-free income according to the exemption method and 3 percent of distributions from companies with participant determination : . The following records require manual registration: Reimbursed debt interest pursuant to Tax Act §§ 2-39 (2) and 6-91 : . Taxable gain on withdrawals from Norwegian tax territory : . Income supplement for conversion difference from accounting currency to Norwegian kroner : . Supplement for interest costs for which deductions are not required (not relevant for sole proprietorships) : . • Correction for proposed dividend from subsidiary/associate using the equity method (not relevant for sole proprietorships) : . • Other income supplements : . • Correction for proposed dividend from subsidiary/associate using the equity method (not relevant for sole proprietorships) : . The following items are only relevant for sole proprietorships, and are calculated automatically for these: Income supplement for private use of a company car : . The calculated entries can be overridden. **Total additional business income** is transferred to the calculation on left. Approve the values by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**. The values are automatically transferred to the business specification. Deduction business income /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/tax-calculation/deduction-business-income page 2025-03-25T07:49:38+01:00 # Deduction business income Here you can specify income from the income statement that are to be reversed and other items. Recorded income from shares, units and other securities are reversed to specified fields, whereas taxable amounts for these items - where applicable - are re-entered in separate fields.

The individual available fields vary by company type. Only the fields that have numbers will be displayed. Data is transferred from other menus where data has been registered.

Click **Show all** to see all fields, including fields with a 0 value. ## Field explanations The following items are filled in on the basis of balances on relevant accounts: Reversal of dividends recognized as income : . Group contribution recognized in profit or loss : . Negative tax expense : . Interest income on refunded tax : . Share of profit from investment in subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures : . Accounting gain on the sale of shares and other financial instruments : . Regnskapsmessig gevinst ved realisasjon av aksjer og andre finansielle instrumenter : . Accounting gain on the sale of shares and other financial instruments : . Accounting loss upon realization of shares in foreign companies with participant determination : . Accounting gain on realization of share in Norwegian company with participant determination : . Accounting gain on realization of share in Norwegian company with participant determination : . Issuance and establishment costs (individual taxpayers only) : . Return on life insurance recognized in the income statement (sole proprietorships only)ersonforetak) : . Interest income recorded in the income statement for ENK (sole proprietorships only) : . Own sick pay recognized as income in the income statement (sole proprietorships only) : . The following items are filled in on the basis of registrations of shares in joint ventures with participant determination (not relevant for sole proprietorships, where such income is entered directly in the tax return): Share of deductible losses in Norwegian companies with participant determination : . Share of deductible losses in foreign companies with participant determination : . Deductible loss upon realization of shares in Norwegian companies with participant determination : . Deductible loss upon realization of shares in foreign companies with participant determination : . The following items are filled in on the basis of registrations under financial instruments and/or 3% income recognition (not relevant for sole proprietorships, where such income is entered directly in the tax return): Deductible loss on sale of shares and other financial instruments : . The following records require manual registration: Deductible loss on withdrawals from Norwegian tax territory : . Income deduction for translation difference from accounting currency to Norwegian kroner : . Other income deductions : . The following records are filled in on the basis of registrations in relevant functions: Tax recovery of R&D deductions : . The calculated entries can be overridden. **Total deduction business income** is transferred to the calculation on the left hand side. Approve the values by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**. Changes in temporary differences /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/tax-calculation/changes-in-temporary-differences page 2025-03-21T16:03:40+01:00 # Changes in temporary differences Go to **Tax calculation - Changes in temporary differences** to calculate all temporary differences, change in deferred tax and deferred tax / tax assets in the balance sheet.

Do the following steps:

  1. First, you calculate all temporary differences between accounting and taxable values ​​01.01 and 31.12.
  2. Furthermore, you deduct any temporary differences that should not be included in the calculation basis for deferred tax / tax assets (for example, goodwill arising from merger / demerger).
  3. Consider offsetting tax-increasing and tax-reducing temporary differences and whether there are temporary differences that should not be offset.
  4. Calculate net deferred tax / tax assets in the balance sheet.
  5. Assess if deferred tax assets should be recognized in the balance sheet.
  6. Changes in temporary differences affecting tax payable is transferred to the calculation of total business income on the left hand side.
Under the tab **Differences**, the system has calculated **Tax-increasing** and **Tax-reducing** temporary differences based on values ​​in the **Accounting** and **Taxable columns**. Select **Show All** to show all lines. The system generates taxable value equal to the accounting value for fields that may have a taxable value. You can override fields by hovering over the value in the field and clicking on the symbol that appears. Select **Override**. Some lines require manual input and this is indicated by the lines being blue and clickable. When you click on a blue line, it opens its own view that shows tax calculation of this particular item, with white fields for entering values. For further information, see Field explanations. Select the blue arrow next to a line to see which client accounts in the income statement which are linked to each line as well as the specified taxable value on the relevant lines. **Total temporary differences affecting tax payable** summarizes the lines on the tab **Differences, tax payable** and is displayed in **Changes in temporary differences** in the left menu. This corresponds to the previous fields in RF-1217, up until field 100. Click on **Show all** to see rows without amount. **Differences, deferred tax** summarizes the lines from the tab **Differences, deferred tax** This corresponds to field the previous fields 111 to field 165 in RF-1217. Click on **Show all** to see rows without amount **Total temporary differences** from the two tabs **Differences, tax payable** and **Differences, deferred tax** is transferred and summarized on the tab **Deferred tax/tax assets** . In this tab, offsetting of temporary differences is made. **Basis for calculation of deferred tax** is shown, as well as **Deferred tax 01.01** and **Deferred tax assets 31.12**. The deferred tax / tax assets is calculated by multiplying the sum of the differences that are included in the calculation basis with the applicable tax rate. Full balancing of tax-increasing and tax-deductible temporary differences is most common. There are some limited exceptions. If the tax-deductible temporary differences are reversed at a later date than the tax-increasing differences, it must be assessed whether the tax-deductible differences must be excluded from the basis of calculation. In particular, you should consider whether offsetting can be done when there are tax-deductible temporary differences related to construction, long-term receivables, and if you have a adjustment limitation of interest deductibility between related. **Deductible differences that shall not be offset** are a manual input field in the tab **Deferred tax/tax assets**. The option whether or not to recognize the deferred tax assets in the balance sheet per 31.12, is made in the tab **Deferred tax/tax assets**. The recognition of deferred tax assets can only be done if it is probable that the tax assets can be utilized by the company. Small companies can choose not to recognize deferred tax assets. If **Not balanced** is selected under **Deferred tax/tax assets 31.12**, then the value in**Basis for calculation of deferred tax** is transferred to the line **Deductible differences that can not be offset**. In the tab **Overview temporary differences**, a summary of temporary differences is displayed as of 01.01 and 31.12, and the changes. **Calculated deferred tax/tax assets** is also shown. This overview is shown as part of the note **Tax**under **Year-end closing - Annual report**. **Total temporary differences affecting tax payable** are calculated 01.01 and 31.12, and appear as subsum amounts under the tab **Differences**. **Change in temporary differences that affect tax payable** is calculated by the system and transferred to **Changes in temporary differences** in the calculation view on the left hand side. This value corresponds to field 100 in RF-1217. The closing entry **Changes in deferred tax / deferred tax assets** is updated automatically. ## Field explanations Fixed assets (tangible and intangible) : Click on the line **Fixed and Intangible assets** to update tax values. You will then be navigated to **Information - Tax-related depreciations**. :

Please note that the tax value on 31.12. for operating assets must be specified in the form of tax objects in the function for tax depreciation, such an overriding of the field will give an error message when validating the business specification under Controls.

Long term receivables and liabilities in foreign currency : The accounting value of long-term receivables and liabilities in foreign currency is the exchange rate on balance date. The taxable value is generally the same as the accounting value. Companies with long-term receivables or liabilities in foreign currency must keep a revaluation account, and temporary differences may arise between the accounting and the tax values associated therewith. Projects in progress : Small companies that recognize long-term production contracts as income when the contract is completed, should record the capitalized cost of production as the accounting value. Companies using current settlement shall record accrued contract revenue as the accounting value. Taxable income from work contracts under progress shall not be recognized before the work is completed. Until they are completed, production contracts should be valued according to the rules for making after order, see § 14-5 (2) a and b of the tax law. Inventories / Biological assets (IFRS) : Click on the blue link Inventory/biological assets to calculate the tax value of goods. Receivables and debt according to the receivable model : . Accounts receivable : You can calculate the tax value by clicking on the **Account receivables** line. You will then be navigated to **Information - Account receivables**. Other receivables (including long-term) : The accounting value of other short- or long-term receivables is the value after depreciation of unrealized losses. The tax value will be the denominated value. Accounting value of leasing object in the balance sheet : If a lease agreement is considered to be financial in accordance with the accounting rules (recorded), but taxable as a lease (operating lease), temporary differences arise on the asset side and on the debt side. Accounting value of leasing debt in the balance sheet : If a lease agreement is considered to be financial in accordance with the accounting rules (recognized in the balance sheet), but taxable as a lease (operating lease), temporary differences arise on the asset side and on the debt side. Balance on profit and loss account : You can update your profit and loss account balance by clicking on the line **Profit and loss account**. You will then be navigated to **Information - Profit-/loss account**. Conditional tax-free gains : . Unearned income : Accounting provisions must be reversed in its entirety as it is not possible to make a corresponding taxable provision. Accounting provisions for liabilities : Accounting provisions must be reversed in its entirety as it is not possible to make a corresponding taxable offset. This value is automatically transferred to RF-1217, field 54. Accounting provisions for losses on contracts : Accounting provisions must be reversed in its entirety as it is not possible to make a corresponding taxable offset. This value is automatically transferred to RF-1217, field 70. Net pension liabilities entered in the balance sheet : . Net pension assets : . Taxable provisions for pension premium etc. : . Obligations taken upon acquisition of business : . Other differences : Specify all other temporary differences between accounting and tax values ​​/ results that are not handled in other fields.. Shares and other financial institutions, not covered by the exemption method. : In this field, shares and other financial instruments, which are not covered by the exemption method, are specified. Income allocated dividend from subsidiaries and associated companies : . Shares in businesses assessed as partnerships, not covered by the exemption method. : In this field, shares in businesses assessed as partnerships, that are not covered by the exemption method, are specified. Accounting differences on participations in businesses assessed as partnerships : . Accumulated taxable carry-forward loss : The value is obtained from the values ​​recorded under the left-hand menu item Applied deficit carry forward. Recalculated unused credit deduction to carry-forward : .Here, the value must be carried forward credit deduction divided by tax rate (grossed basis for credit deduction Taxable carryable unused correctional income : In this field, the cut-off interest deduction is entered for carry-forward Reduced interest deduction to carry-forward : In this field, the cut-off interest deduction is entered for carry-forward. Other differences that affects deferred tax : Differences that cannot be entered elsewhere and which only affect deferred tax are entered in this field. Other taxable income and deductions /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/tax-calculation/other-taxable-income-and-deductions page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Other taxable income and deductions Here you specify other income and deductions that should affect **Total taxable result** in **Calculations - Other tax income and deductions**. **Other taxable income and deductions** are transferred to the calculation on the left hand side. Approve the values by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**. Application of forward losses /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/tax-calculation/application-of-forward-losses page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Application of forward losses Go to **Tax calculation - Application of forward losses** to update the overview of applied losses carried forward. The values ​​entered and calculated in this view are transferred to RF-1028 fields 280 to 290 and, possibly, field 232. **Rest losses carried forward from previous years** are specified and deducted from this year's result. If the company has losses during the year, these are added to **Rest losses carried forward from previous years** and is included in **Total losses carried forward next year**. ## Field explanations Performed unused losses after the tax assessment last year : This amount is retrieved from field 290 in last year\'s RF-1028. Achieved private arrangement and debt relief this year : In this field, debt relief for the current year is specified. Share of the private arrangement and debt forgiveness offset against tax losses previous years : In this field, the share of the debt relief which is to be offset against tax losses from previous years is specified. **Application of forward losses** is transferred to the calculation on the left hand side. Approve the values ​​by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**. Other adjustments /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/tax-calculation/other-adjustments page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Other adjustments Go to **Tax calculation - Other adjustments** to make other adjustments that affect the total taxable result. **Total other adjustments** is transferred to the calculation on the left hand side. Approve the values ​​by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**. Tax expense /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/tax-calculation/tax-expense page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Tax expense In **Tax calculation -Tax expense**, you see the calculation of **This year's tax base**, **Tax expense income statement** and **Tax payable balance sheet**. Tax calculation starts with **Ordinary profit before tax expense**. In order to arrive at **This year's tax base**, the result is adjusted for intra-group contributions, permanent differences, this year's changes in temporary differences and loss carryforward. **Payable income taxes** is calculated by multiplying the **This year's tax base** with the year\'s tax rate. **Tax expense income statement** is distributed on **Payable income taxes** and **Changes in deferred tax**. In addition, **Insufficient / too much tax provision in previous years** and **Tax intra-group contribution** are also taken into account. **Insufficient / too much deferred tax in previous years** is automatically processed by the system as a correctional item to the tax payable this year. This is done in the closing entry for payable tax. A debit balance on the account Tax payable, not determined, before calculating the estimated taxes for the year, will automatically be recorded as an expense. A credit balance is automatically deducted from the estimated taxes for the year. **Tax payable balance sheet** consists of tax payable on the year's result, deduction of subsidies hoards and tax effect of group contributions. Paid taxable intra-group contribution is recorded directly in the balance sheet and reduces payable tax for the donor (as allocation of the result when intra-group contribution is paid to a parent or affiliated company, and when it is recorded as increased acquisition cost of shares for intra-group contributions paid from parent company to subsidiary). When an item affects payable tax directly in the balance sheet, tax payable balance sheet shows a different amount than payable tax, tax expense. The closing entry **Payable tax** is automatically updated. Values for previous year ​​are entered manually. **Tax expense** is transferred to the calculation on the left hand side. Approve the tax calculation by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**. Allocation of result /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/tax-calculation/allocation-of-result-display page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Allocation of result In **Tax calculation - Allocation of result** the allocated accounting result after tax is displayed. Open the menu **Allocations** to make changes. Either by clicking on **Allocated result** in the left menu to be redirected or directly in the **Allocations** top menu. Read more in [Allocation of result](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/allocations/allocation-of-result). Allocations /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/allocations section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Allocations In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Allocations**, you will find what you need to be able to dispose this year\'s accounting result. The functions for allocations are based on the main regulations in accounting and share legislation. Dividend /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/allocations/dividend-no section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Dividend A limited company can distribute the values ​​they earn in various ways. A common way to do this is by distributing dividends to shareholders. When a limited company does this, a distinction is made between three different forms of dividends. Read more about the different types of dividends below. Ordinary dividend /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/allocations/dividend-no/ordinary-dividend-no page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Ordinary dividend The calculation of the maximum dividend is a calculation that is made before the board\'s decision. The Companies Act sets limits on what can be distributed as dividends and group contributions, cf. sections 8-1 and 8-5. Under **Allocations**and the tab **Ordinary**, section **Deductions/adjustments**, you can enter any amount that will be deducted/adjusted in the calculation model. All fields except **Other disp. after the balance sheet date within the maximum dividend** shall be entered with a positive amount. The signs in front of the text on the line indicate the consequence for the total **Deductions/adjustments**. In the field **Custom allocation**, the actual amount to be allocated as a dividend, is entered. If it is appropriate to allocate the maximum dividend, the option **Maximum dividend** is selected, and the system calculates this amount based on the assumptions that may exist on the above fields under **Deductions/adjustments**. If there is no allocation for ordinary dividend, the option **No allocation** is selected. The model shows a maximum dividend basis, but it must be specified that the company can only distribute dividends as far as after the distribution it has a sound equity and liquidity, cf. section 8-1, 4th ledd and 3-4 of the Companies Act.

Regardless of what you submit as a distributed dividend, it is important that you have clarified this with the company's board.

## \- Own shares at face value : According to the wording of Section 8-1, second paragraph of the Companies Act, deductions shall be made for the nominal value of own shares acquired before the balance sheet date. \- Credit and pledge of assets to shareholders : There shall be deductions for credit and pledge of assets to shareholders. \+ Credit and pledge of assets settled before decision date : No deductions shall be made for credit and pledge of assets that has been repaid or settled before the decision date. An amount in this field will therefore reduce the amount registered in the field for **Credit and pledge of assets to shareholders**. \+ Credit to shareholders which is netting if dividends : There shall be no deductions for credit and pledge of assets that will be settled upon settlement in the dividend. An amount in this field will therefore reduce the amount registered in the field for **Credit and pledge of assets to shareholders**. +/- Other disp. after the balance sheet date within the maximum dividend : A deduction shall be made for other disposals after the balance sheet date which, according to the law, must be within the limits of the funds that the company may use for the distribution of dividends. Examples of this may be capital changes that have taken place after the balance sheet date. Section 8-1 of the Companies Act, 1st paragraph, last sentence states that \"it is the registered share capital at the time of decision to be taken into account\". : This means that a capital increase after the balance sheet date registered at the decision date will reduce the dividend basis and consequently increase the total deductions / adjustments. In such a situation, the amount corresponding to the capital increase for the share capital is added as a positive amount. : In the opposite, a capital reduction after the balance sheet date, which is registered at the time of decision, will increase the dividend basis. This capital reduction is then registered on the line with a negative amount. Additional/extraordinary dividend /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/allocations/dividend-no/additional-dividend-no page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Additional/extraordinary dividend ## Additional dividend Additional dividends use the following two accounts: - 8922 Additional dividend - 2801 Provisioned additional dividend Account **8922 Supplementary dividend** shall contain all additional dividends in the financial year based on the previous year\'s annual accounts. Account **2801 Provisioned additional dividend** shall contain the part of additional dividend that has not been paid at the end of the year. There are several different ways to register additional dividends: 1. Entries directly in the financial system 2. Registration of data in the menu for additional dividends and extraordinary dividends When registering data in the registration picture for additional dividends and extraordinary dividends, it is only possible to increase the amount from what has been accounted for. If it is desirable to reduce the amount if there is an excessive amount on account **8922 Additional dividend**, an entry must be made in the financial system that reduces the amount, possibly a manual additional entry. The entry is made Debit **2050 Other equity** and credit **8922 Additional dividend**. ### Paid before the balance sheet date The column already posted shows the amount on the disposition account **8922 Additional dividend** less what has not been paid, additional dividend due on account **2801 Provisioned additional dividend**. If the additional dividend paid has been entered directly against equity, you can register amounts in **Desired amount column (if higher)**. This will provide an automatic system posting with the difference between the already booked amount and the desired amount Debit **8922 Additional dividend** credit **2050 Other equity**. ### Provisioned on or after the balance sheet date The column already posted shows the amount of allocated additional dividend on account **2801 Provisioned additional dividend**. If an additional dividend has been approved that has not been paid on the balance sheet date, this can be registered in **Desired amount (if higher)**. This will provide an automatic system posting with the difference between the already booked amount and the desired amount Debit **8922 Additional dividend** credit **2801 Provisioned additional dividend**.

When registering data in the registration screen for additional dividends and extraordinary dividends, it is only possible to increase the amount from what has been accounted for.

If it is desirable to reduce the amount if there is an excessive amount on account **8922 Additional dividend**, an entry must be made in the financial system that reduces the amount, possibly a manual additional entry. The entry is made Debit**2801 Provisioned additional dividend** and credit **8922 Additional dividend**. ### The column Hereof after the balance sheet date If part or all of the amount under Provisions on or after the balance sheet date applies to additional dividends decided after the balance sheet date, the amount is registered in the column to the right. This amount shall not exceed the amount set aside on or after the balance sheet date. ## Extraordinary dividend Extraordinary dividend uses the following two accounts: - 8923 Extraordinary dividend - 2802 Provisioned extraordinary dividend Account **8923 Extraordinary dividend** shall contain all extraordinary dividend in the financial year based on the previous year\'s annual accounts. Account **2802 Provisioned extraordinary dividend** shall contain the part of extraordinary dividend that has not been paid at the end of the year. There are several different ways to register extraordinary dividends: 1. Entries directly in the financial system 2. Registration of data in the menu for additional dividends and extraordinary dividends When registering data in the registration screen for additional dividends and extraordinary dividends, it is only possible to increase the amount from what has been accounted for. If it is desirable to reduce the amount if there is an excessive amount on account **8923 Extraordinary dividend**, an entry must be made in the financial system that reduces the amount, possibly a manual additional entry. The entry is made Debit **2050 Other equity** and credit **8923 Extraordinary dividend**. ### Paid before the balance sheet date The column already posted shows the amount on disposition account **8923 Extraordinary dividend** less what has not been paid, extraordinary dividend due on account **2802 Provisioned extraordinary dividend**. If the paid extraordinary dividend has been entered directly against equity, you can register the amount in **Desired amount (if higher)**. This will provide an automatic system posting with the difference between the already booked amount and the desired amount Debit **8923 Extraordinary dividend** credit **2050 Other equity**. ### Provisioned on or after the balance sheet date The column already posted shows the amount of allocated extraordinary dividend on account **2801 Provisioned extraordinary dividend**. If an extraordinary dividend has been approved that has not been paid on the balance sheet date, this can be registered in **Amount desired (if higher)**. This will provide an automatic system posting with the difference between the already booked amount and the desired amount Debit **8923 Extraordinary dividend** credit **2802 Provisioned extraordinary dividend**.

When registering data in the registration screen for additional dividends or extraordinary dividends, it is only possible to increase the amount from what has been accounted for.

If it is desirable to reduce the amount if there is an excessive amount on account 8922 Extraordinary dividend, an entry must be made in the financial system that reduces the amount, possibly a manual additional entry. The entry is made Debit **2802 Provisioned extraordinary dividend** and credit **8923 Extraordinary dividend**. Group contribution /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/allocations/group-contribution-no page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Group contribution Group contribution should be completed and submitted with the new tax return for businesses. for companies that receive and give group contributions. Follow the steps below to create group contributions. 1. Click the **New group contribution** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new group contribution. 2. Select type of group contribution: **Received group contribution** or **Give group contribution**. An entry is created in a separate tab. 3. Fill in the relevant fields under **Company Information**, and enter the **Affiliation** and **Treatment rule** for the group contribution. Register the specific group contribution in fields with or without tax effect.

On basis of the chosen affiliation and treatment rule, will Period & Year create an automatic system voucher for the group contribution.

You can delete a group contribution by clicking the **Delete group contribution** bottom of each tab. The first tab shows an **Overview**of created group contributions, grouped by whether the group contribution has been received or given. See the previous guidelines to [RF-1206 Group contribution](https://www.skatteetaten.no/globalassets/skjema/2021/rf-1206b.pdf) or [Items, fields and subjects in new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Postings /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/allocations/postings-no page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Postings In the menu **Postings**, you can decide how you want to allocate the company\'s result. The values are automatically recorded and displayed in the menu **Allocated result**. When allocating the result, it is basically covered from other equity up to NOK 0. The remaining part is carried as a loss to uncovered losses. There is no automation in clearing the balance for share premium and other paid-in capital, but in this picture under **Deficits**, you can check for **Other paid-in capital** and/or **Share premium**. The relevant amount will then be offset against any uncovered loss. The closing entry, **Change in equity** is updated automatically. Allocation of result /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/allocations/allocation-of-result page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Allocation of result Under **Allocation of result**, all allocation lines are displayed with the option to adjust values if you want a different presentation than what the system automatically suggests. When doing an adjustment, the system will automatically make a system voucher on the relevant 89XX accounts for the allocation lines where the adjustment is made. The **Adjustment** column must always go to zero. The result of the allocation of results are displayed under **Tax calculation** - [**Allocation of result**](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/tax-calculation/allocation-of-result-display). Financial statement /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/financial-statement page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Financial statement **Financial statement** contains an overview of page 2 and 3 of the Income statement. When you click on a category in the **financial statement**or **balance**on the left side, a specification of the company\'s values based on reference account mappings are displayed on the right side. These fields can be overridden. To see all accounts, select **Show all**. The following categories are listed: #### Income statement - Sales income - Other operational income - Cost of goods sold - Personnel expenses - Other operating expenses - Total capital income - Total capital expenses - Taxes #### Balance - Fixed assets - Current assets - Long term debt - Short term debt - Equity Wealth /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/wealth page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Wealth When you click on **Wealth**, the specification of the company\'s wealth is displayed. The values are retrieved from different areas in the system. This view displays a specification of the company\'s taxable wealth and deductible debt for transfer to the Tax Message. The specification contains balance items with accounting value. Each balance item in the specification detail row has a calculation type which for example shows the source of the value or if the value should be registered directly into the Tax message. This view displays a specification of the company\'s Taxable wealth and deductible debt for transfer to Tax Message. Checks /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/checks section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Checks This is were reconciliations of fixed assets, equity and wealth are shown. Reconciliation of fixed assets, equity and wealth is intended as a tool for the user to clarify any differences. The listings in the reconciliation models are not exhaustive. The user can therefore add information in a manual field if needed, both in reconciliation fixed assets, equity and reconciliation wealth. If an error situation occur this will be visualized with an informative icon on the **Checks** menu and on the left side for each section with deviation. Altinn checks and Reconciliation runs continuously while you work in **Year-end closing**. The following icons can be displayed: ![](./img/16_Information.png) - used to inform you, for example if you are currently not logged in to Altinn/Tax Administration. ![](./img/16_Warning.png) - Indicates differences in the reconciliations. ![](./img/16_Error.png) - Indicates invalid Altinn checks that needs to be fixed before you are able to submit as complete shipment. Read more about: Complete shipment. Business information /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/checks/business-specification page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Business information When you click on **Business Information** on the left, any calculation deviations from the validation service to The Norwegian Tax Administration are displayed. Tax return /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/checks/tax-return page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Tax return When you click on **Tax return** on the left side, a login button or received validation messages from Altinn will be displayed. Internal control /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/checks/internal-control page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Internal control These are checks carried out by Period & Year. If you receive an error result during internal control, this will indicate that you will not be able to send information to The Norwegian Tax Administration for control. This must be corrected in order to have data checked against the The Norwegian Tax Administration. Reconciliation of equity /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/checks/reconciliation-equity page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Reconciliation of equity When you click on**Reconciliation equity** on the left side, a reconciliation model of the company\'s equity is displayed on the right side. The model lists a**Calculated equity 31.12 according to specification**. It specifies the change in equity between 1.1 and 31.12. Calculated Total Equity 31.12 is reconciled with Total Equity (item 9450) in RF-1167. Under **Specification**, the model lists the following entries that are automatically transferred to RF-1052, Reconciliation of Equity. - 'Equity 31.12 last year' is taken from **Information and tax - Financial statement & balance sheet**. The field can be overridden. - 'Changes and corrections' is filled in the table. - 'Equity 01.01' is calculated on the basis of equity 31.12 and possibly changes and corrections. The field can be overridden. - 'Year-end result' is taken from **Information and tax - Financial statement & balance sheet**. The field can be overridden. - 'Provisioned dividend for 2020 for companies that use Norwegian accounting legislation, or expected dividend stated in notes in the annual reports for 2019 that were distributed in 2020 for IFRS companies' is taken from the balance of 8920, provisioned ordinary dividends. - 'Additional dividend during this year, based on the accounts from this year' is taken from the balance of 8922, provisioned extraordinary dividends. - 'Extraordinary dividend during this year, based on the accounts for the year' is taken from the balance of 8923, extraordinary dividend. - 'Received group contribution', to be filled out - 'Allocated intra-group contribution', to be filled out - 'Cash contributions', to be filled out - 'Non cash contributions', to be filled out - 'Reduction of share capital and distribution of share premiums - cash', to be filled out - 'Reduction of share capital and distribution of share premiums - other assets', to be filled out - 'Remission of debt', to be filled out - 'Purchase of own shares', to be filled out - 'Sale of own shares', to be filled out - 'Debt converted to share capital', to be filled out - 'Difference between allocated/expected dividend year-end closing in 2019 and the distributed dividend in 2020', to be filled out - 'Other changes, to be filled out - 'Calculated equity 31.12 according to specification' is calculated on the basis of values in specification and used in reconciliation of RF-1167 item 9450, Total equity. For further instructions to how this form is completed, please see the [official guidelines](https://www.skatteetaten.no/globalassets/skjema/2021/rf-1052b.pdf). Reconciliation of fixed assets /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/checks/reconciliation-fixed-assets page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Reconciliation of fixed assets When you click on **Reconciliation of fixed assets** on the left side, a reconciliation model of the company\'s fixed assets is displayed on the right side. The model lists a **Specification of estimated change of temporary differences**. This includes entries from the company\'s depreciations, accounting profit/loss, profit/loss not entered in the profit/loss account, profit/loss entered in the profit/loss account and the difference between accounting and taxable cost. Estimated change in temporary differences according to specification is reconciled with RF-1217 item 3, column III Change in temporary differences. Under **Depreciations**the model lists the following entries: - Accounting depreciations - Hereof depreciation on financial leasing - Impairment of fixed assets - Taxable depreciations - Taxable linear depreciations - Taxable depreciations power plant Under **Accounting profit/loss** the model lists the following entries: - Accounting profit on sales - Accounting loss on sales Under **Profit/losses not entered in the profit-/loss account** the model lists the following entries: - Sales amount directly entered as income in the year of realization, cf. The Tax Act § 14-44 - Profit on non-depreciable fixed assets - Profit on linear depreciable fixed assets - Loss on non-depreciable fixed assets - Loss on linear depreciable fixed assets Under **Profit/losses entered in the profit-/loss account** the model lists the following entries: - Profit on non-depreciable fixed assets - Profit on depreciable fixed assets - Negative balance goodwill - Loss on non-depreciable fixed assets - Loss on depreciable fixed assets Under **Difference between accounting - and taxable cost** the model lists the following entries: - Tax-free investment subsidy - Input VAT adjustment - Reduction for adjustment of input VAT on sale - Diff. between the booked amount and the fair value at the time of the merger/demerger - Diff. tax values ​​and booked/fair value on conversion to limited company - Deduction for tax-free profit on transfer of assets to companies in the same group. - Addition for diff. between tax entry value and remuneration transferred from companies in the same group. - Activated fixed assets to be expensed for tax purposes Salary and pension costs /periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/checks/salary-pension-costs page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Salary and pension costs Reconciliation of salary and pension costs was in the old tax return attached in tax form RF-1022. In the new tax return and business specification, this reconciliation has been removed. When you click on**Salary and pension costs** on the left side, a separate section for the reconciliation of salary and pension costs is displayed on the right side. The data calculated here and possibly also recorded will be shown on the Wage and pension costs report in **Reports - Other year-end documents**. The accounts included in the reconciliation are the same as previously presented in form RF-1022 Salary and pension costs. It is also possible to add separate lines in the various sections of the reconciliation. It is not possible to remove accounts directly from the list, but the accounts are included based on the reference account properties. Accounts that are mistakenly included in the reconciliation are then included due to the wrong reference account, and the reference account property of accounts shown on the screen can be changed directly from the screen. If accounts that should have been included in the reconciliation are not included, you must find the account accordingly and change the account\'s reference account property. Please see the [Tax Directorate\'s notices 4/2022](https://www.skatteetaten.no/rettskilder/type/skattedirektoratets-meldinger/revisors-plikter-i-forbindelse-med-signering-av-signaturpliktige-opplysninger-i-naringsspesifikasjon-og-skattemelding/) for more information. Information and tax (personal) /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal section Information about the company, calculation of business income and personal income for sole proprietorship with accounting obligation 1 or 2. 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Information and tax (personal) Information about the company, calculation of business income and personal income for sole proprietorship with accounting obligation 1 or 2. In **Year-end closing - Information and tax** you register/update information about the company, as well as finding what you need to calculate **Business Income**, **Taxable result** and **Accounting result after tax**. Registered data will be included in the report **Business specification** which can be found in **Year-end closing -Report center - Other documents**. This information will be submitted as an attachment to the tax return.

Pre-populated values are updated automatically in Information and tax, however if necessary you can click the refresh-icon to refresh values in information and tax. Clicking the icon will start a full recalculation of values. During the process the button will be disabled but as soon as the calculation is completed the button will be available again.

 Not accountable (type 1) /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1 section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Not accountable (type 1) Businesses who have a bookkeeping obligation, but not an accounting obligation must submit the income statement and balance sheet based on tax principles as an electronic attachment to the tax-return by sole proprietorship. Read more about the [Tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/) at The Norwegian Tax Administration. Information /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Information In **Information and tax - Information** you can register information about the company and add values for tax calculation. This is also where you enter additional information that is thematic or industry specific. This information is automatically transferred to relevant subjects in the tax return for businesses. Company /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/company section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Company In the left menu below **Company** you register/update **Client information**, **Accounting office** and **Auditor**. This information is automatically transferred to relevant subjects in the tax return for businesses. Company information /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/company/company-info page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Company information In **Company information**, some fields are populated automatically based on information that appears under **Settings - Company information**. Some company information can also be imported from the [Brønnøysund Register Centre](https://brreg.no/). Registered company information on the clients corporate identity number will be fetched.

When you start the year-end period for the first time, the import from the Brønnøysund Register Centre will be performed automatically.

To import data, simply click the button **Import from BrReg.no** at the bottom of the page in **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information**. Fill in the other fields under **Client information** manually. Accounting office /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/company/accounting-office page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Accounting office Information about the **Accounting office** can be imported from the [Brønnøysund Register Centre](https://brreg.no/) or filled out manually. Registered information about the Accounting office on the clients corporate identity number will be fetched. All information can be edited if needed. To import data, simply click the button **Import from BrReg.no** at the bottom of the page in **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information**. The button is available in the following menus, - Client information - Accounting office - Auditor Auditor /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/company/auditor page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Auditor Auditor appears in the menu on the left if you answered **Yes** to the question **Is the company subject to audit?** under **Company information**. Information about the **Auditor**can be imported from the [Brønnøysund Register Centre](https://brreg.no/) or filled out manually. Registered information about the auditor on the clients corporate identity number will be fetched. All information can be edited if needed. To import data, simply click the button **Import from BrReg.no** at the bottom of the page in **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information**. The button is available in the following menus, - Client information - Accounting office - Auditor Basis values /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/basis-values section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Basis values In the left menu under **Basis values**, you register values to calculate tax values. Account receivables /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/basis-values/account-receivables page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Account receivables The **Overview** tab shows accounting value and tax value of accounts receivable this year and last year. Accounting value is displayed at client account level. The tax value displayed here is a result of entries on the **Calculated taxable value** tab. Click **Show all** to see all associated client accounts with zero values. On the **Calculated taxable value** tab, you calculate the tax value of accounts receivable. The system calculates tax write-down for the **Calculate based on formula** option. Nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced trade debtors, confirmed losses on trade debtors, and sales revenue are automatically populated. If the amount in **Sales revenue** has both credit sales and cash sales, fill in the relevant amount for cash sales in the fields **Of which cash**. This because cash sales shall not be included in the calculation of tax write-downs of nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced trade debtors. You can see which client accounts are part of an automatically populated field by hovering over a value field and clicking on the symbol that appears. Select **Show accounts**. In the same menu you can also select **Override amount**. If the company is newly established, you can choose to use the **Use 2% write-down** (newly established business). The system then calculates a 2% tax write-down of nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced of trade debtors. When you do a change in this year\'s taxable value for account receivables, the system will automatically make a system voucher, so that the book value will be equal to the calculated taxable value. Under **Closing entries** you will see that the system has generated a system voucher **Calculation of tax write-down on account receivables**. Both accounting and taxable values are constantly updated in the tab **Overview**. Approve the values by clicking on the symbol in the **Done**column. Tax-related depreciations /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/basis-values/tax-related-depreciations page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Tax-related depreciations Tax-related deprecations should be completed and submitted with the new tax return for businesses.

The registration page for balance depreciation is dynamic in relation to what is registered. Fields are only displayed if they are relevant in the situation, depending on registration in other fields.

For example, fields for transfer to profit and loss account will only appear in cases where they are relevant, e.g. if the realization date is set for balance group e, or if balance group b has a negative value in the depreciation basis, while balance groups a, c, d and j according to the tax rules never have a transfer to profit and loss account, and therefore will never show fields for transfer of profit or loss to profit and loss account.

Follow the instructions below to calculate tax depreciation. 1. Click **Add entry**, the symbol at the top right to create new depreciations. 2. Select type of entry: **Reducing balance depreciation**, **Non-depreciable** or **Linear depreciation**. An entry is created in a separate tab. 3. Fill in relevant fields. You can delete an entry by pressing the **Delete \...**button at the bottom of each tab. The first tab shows an overview of created depreciations grouped by type of depreciation and a summation of all tax-related depreciations. Tax related depreciations is automatically transferred to **Personal income**. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field explanations ## Balance depreciation Id : A numeric id is suggested when you create a new taxable depreciation. Asset group : Select the asset group to which the fixed asset belongs. Balance basis per 01.01 : Enter a positive or negative balance from 31.12 last year. Calculated impaired value of discontinued assets : If the balance must be reduced by the impaired value of an asset. Enter the calculated value here. Cost price - new acquisitions : Enter the cost price for operating assets acquired during the income year. Fixed assets must be entered here if it is assumed to have a useful life of at least 3 years and the cost price of the fixed asset is NOK 15,000 (including VAT if there is no right to deduct) or higher. For buildings acquired during the income year, the cost price shall be divided between the building balance and the balance j for fixed technical installations. Cost price - improvements : Enter costs on existing or newly acquired fixed assets in their entirety. Maintenance can be expensed directly. If you choose to activate higher maintenance costs, further information must be provided. In the case of expenses on buildings acquired during the income year, the cost price shall be divided between the building balance j for fixed, technical installations. Government grants etc : Enter public subsidies, with the exception of investment subsidies to the districts in accordance with regulations issued by the King, to be written down on the cost price. Adjustment of input VAT : Enter any change in cost price as a result of an adjustment of input VAT in accordance with the VAT Act. Remuneration (sales value on withdrawal) : Upon realization and withdrawal of fixed assets in group a, b, c, d or j, it is possible to write-down the whole value or parts of the value on the balance in the relevant group instead of the income recognition. Return of investment grants to districts : Return of investment grants to districts is calculated automatically based on registered values. The value can be overridden. Recognized direct revenue this year : Enter the part of the consideration etc. (by withdrawal the turnover value) which is entered directly to income in the realization year according to the Tax Act § 14-44 (1) and which thus shall not affect the basis for the year\'s balance depreciation, income recognition or transfer to profit and loss account. Basis for the year\'s balance depreciation, etc. : Here is the basis for this year\'s depreciation. The value is calculated based on registered values. Depreciation this year (including start depreciation) : This year\'s balance depreciation is calculated here. Remaining positive balance below NOK 15,000 will be deducted in full. The calculated value can be overridden. Income this year of negative balance : Negative balance recognized as income in balance groups a, c, d or j with at least the group\'s depreciation rate. The value is calculated based on registered values. The remaining negative balance below NOK 15,000 will be recognized as income in full. The calculated value can be overridden. Basis balance transferred to next year : The remaining positive balance as of 31.12. this year. which will be transferred to balance basis 1.1 next year. The same applies to the remaining negative balance in groups a, c, d and j. The value is calculated based on registered values. Fixed asset grants after regulations from government : Enter any grants for investment in the districts. Profit and loss account /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/basis-values/profit-loss-account page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Profit and loss account Profit and Loss should be completed and submitted with the company tax return if you have a loss account after the realisation of fixed assets etc. Follow the instructions below to calculate any profits or loss . 1. Click **Add profit- or loss account**, the symbol at the top right to create new accounts. An account is created in a separate tab. 2. Fill in relevant fields.

You can delete an account by clicking the Deletebutton at the bottom of each tab.

The first tab shows an overview of created accounts and a summation of all profit and loss accounts. The tax values of profit and loss accounts are automatically transferred to relevant subjects in business information. See the [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field explanations Profit and loss account ID : A numeric id is suggested when you create a new Profit-/loss account. Municipal : Relevant when there are several industries in several municipalities. Balance per 31.12. transferred from last year\'s profit and loss account : Enter the balance as of 31.12 in the previous income year, from the profit and loss account. \+ Total gain on realization and withdrawal : Enter all gains from the realization of fixed assets. Gain on realization of entire livestock on a farm upon termination of branch of operation : Enter all gains from the realization of entire livestock on a farm upon termination of branch of operation Incoming value from acquired profit and loss account : Enter any incoming value from acquired profit and loss account. Value of realized profit and loss account : Enter value of realized profit and loss account \- Total loss on realization and withdrawal : Enter all losses from the realization of fixed assets. = Basis for the year\'s income / deduction : Basis for this year\'s income / deduction recognition is calculated automatically based on registered values. \+ Maximum 20% as income deduction. Any remaining amount less than NOK 15,000 for deductions. : The value is calculated based on registered values. The field can be overridden by hovering over the field and selecting **Override amount**. Minimum 20% as income. Any remaining amount less than NOK 15,000 as income : The value is calculated based on registered values. The field can be overridden by hovering over the field and selecting **Override amount**. Balance profit and loss account per 31.12 transferred to next year. : The value is calculated based on registered values. Percentage for this year\'s income recognition or this year\'s income deduction : The rate for the current year is displayed. Goods /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/basis-values/goods-no page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Goods The **Overview** tab shows accounting values and tax values of goods this year and last year. The accounting value is displayed at the client account level and is summed per inventory group and in total. Tax values displayed here are the result of entries on the **Calculated taxable value** tab. Click **Show All** to see all associated client accounts with zero values. In the **Calculated taxable value** tab, you calculate the tax value of goods. Adjust accounting value for dead stock and other adjustments to get tax value. Last year\'s tax value is entered manually the first year, and is populated automatically later years. Tax value is automatically transferred to relevant subjects and to **Changes in temporary differences**. Click **Show all** to see all inventory groups with associated client accounts with zero values. See [Items, fields and subjects in new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Additional information /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/additional-info section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Additional information In the menu on the left under **Additional information**, you enter information and values that are theme or industry specific. Property /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/additional-info/property page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Property Click the **Add property** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new property by selecting a type of property. If you select **Norwegian real estate** you will see a dialog where you can search by address or cadastre to find you property. Click **Add**and the property is created in a separate tab. Fill in the fields that are displayed, the system only displays relevant fields based on selection in the registration. You can delete a property by clicking the **Delete property** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an **Overview**of created properties. Calculated wealth tax values are transferred to **Information and tax - Wealth**. Use of car /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/additional-info/car-usage page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Use of car Click the **Add car** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new car. Registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically included in the tax return for businesses.

Cars are created in separate tabs. You can change the name/description of each car.

Start with filling out **Information about car usage**. The value **Balance depreciation for private use (for car not leased)l** is calculated automatically based on the values registered in **List price as new car**, **Registration year** and **Balance depreciation for private use (for car not leased)**, **Reversed car expenses for the private use of a work vehicle** is calculated automatically based on entered values. The first tab shows an overview of all created cars. On this tab you have the option to create an automatic system voucher regarding returns for private use. Calculated values and other information are transferred to relevant subjects in **Tax return- Business information.** Delete a car by clicking the **Delete car** button at the bottom of the page. See the previous [official guidelines](https://www.skatteetaten.no/globalassets/skjema/2021/rf-1125b.pdf) in the form RF-1125 Bruk av bil or [Posts, fields and subjects in new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field explanations Car number plate : Enter the car's registration number in this field. Car category : Select one of the following car categories. : - Passenger car - Electric car : - Hydrogen car : - Van (class 2) : - Truck with weight under 7500 kg : - Truck with weight 7500 kg and more - Car reg. for 9 passengers or more (special arrangement) - Bus registered for 16 passengers or more Registration year : Enter the year in which the car was first registered as new in Norway or abroad. List price as new car : Enter the main importer\'s indicative price for the car model, before any discount,, including vat and wreck discount. Extra equipment must be included (eg radio / music system, winter tires, ski box, trailer hitch, etc.). Extra equipment that has value solely for professional use is excluded. This applies to e.g. special devices intended for the transport of tools etc. Number of kilometers during this year : Enter the number of kilometers driven in total during the income year. Number of kilometers of business use during this year : Enter the number of kilometers driven in the business during the income year. Time period : Enter time periods from date to date for when you have used the car in the business. Private usage : Enter if the business vehicle has been used privately in the income year. Electronic driving record regarding driving at work : Enter whether an electronic driving record has been kept that applies to business driving in the income year. Here you answer yes or no. Operating cost exclusive leasing and deprecations : Enter operating costs in the income year. Leasing cost : Enter costs for leasing rent in the income year. Balance depreciation for private use (for car not leased) : 17% balance depreciation based on the car\'s list price at first registration is calculated based on entered information. Reversed car expenses for the private use of a work vehicle : Value is calculated automatically based on entered values. Accommodation and restaurant /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/additional-info/accomodation page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Accommodation and restaurant Accommodation and restaurants should be completed and submitted with the tax return for businesses. The information is used by the Norwegian tax authorities for statistics, analyzes etc. Click the **Add accommodation/restaurant** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new location. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The location is created in a separate tab. You can change the name/description for the accommodation/restaurant. You can delete a location by clicking the **Delete accommodation/restaurant** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created locations. The total inventory and income and withdrawal are summed up for all accommodations/restaurant. See[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Taxis and cargo transport /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/additional-info/taxi-cargo-transport page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Taxis and cargo transport Taxi and cargo transport-should be completed and submitted with the new tax return for businesses. Start by adding a permission number and industry on the overview page. Then click the **Add vehicle** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new vehicle. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The vehicle is created in a separate tab and linked to a specific permission number. You can change the name/description for the vehicle.

The registration page for taxi and cargo transport is dynamic in relation to what is registered. Fields are only displayed if they are relevant in the situation, depending on industry.

You can delete a vehicle by clicking the **Delete vehicle** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created vehicles. The total income from driving are summed up for all vehicles. See [Tax return for taxi and freight transport.](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/hjelp-til-skattemelding/drosje/) for more information. Forestry information and timber account /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/information/additional-info/forestry-information-timber-account page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Forestry information and timber account This year\'s revenues and costs should be completed and submitted with the tax return for businesses. Click the **Add forest and timer account** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new account. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The account is created in a separate tab. You can delete an account by clicking the **Delete forest and timer account** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created accounts. The total values are summed up for all accounts. [Skattemelding for deg som driver med skog](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/hjelp-til-skattemelding/skog/).or [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses.](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) Financial statement /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/financial-statement page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Financial statement **Financial statement** contains an overview of the income statement. When you click on a category in the financial statement or balance on the left side , a specification of the company's values based on reference account mappings are displayed on the right side. These fields can be overridden and it is also possible to expand to drill down on a specific account. Click on the link on the amount to open **Account analysis**. The following categories are listed: #### Income statement - Operation income - Operation expenses - Capital income - Capital expenses #### Balance - Assets - Debt and equity Approve the values in each category by clicking the change status icon in the **Done** column. Business income /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/business-income section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Business income Beregning av driftsresultat /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/business-income/calculation-of-operating-profit-loss page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Beregning av driftsresultat ## Calculation of operating profit/loss Click on **Operating income** on the left side of the menu and the right side will display a specification of which operating income accounts that are booked in the financial statement. If you hover over the amount field, you will see a menu icon where you can choose between **Show accounts** or **Override amount**. If you click **Show all** in the upper right corner of the screen, all income fields will appear. The income fields correspond to Income statement 1, and the values are automatically transferred to relevant subjects in tax return for businesses. **Total operating income** is transferred to the calculation on the left side. Approve the values ​​by clicking the symbol in the **Done** column. Click on **Operating expenses** on the left side of the menu and the right side will display a specification of which operating expenses accounts that are booked in the financial statement. If you hover over the amount field, you will see a menu icon where you can choose between **Show accounts** or **Override amount**. If you click **Show all** in the upper right corner of the screen, all expenses fields will appear. The expenses fields correspond to Income statement 1, and values are automatically transferred to relevant subjects in tax return for businesses. **Total operating expenses** is transferred to the calculation on the left side. Approve the values by clicking the symbol in the **Done** column. The **Operating profit/loss** result is calculated on the left side in the menu. Click **Net capital income/expense** on the left side of the menu and the right side will display a specification of which net capital income/expense accounts that are booked in the income statement. If you hover over the amount field, you will see a menu icon where you can choose between **Show accounts** or **Override amount**. If you click **Show all** in the upper right corner of the screen, all expenses fields will appear. The income/expense fields correspond to Income statement 1, and values are automatically transferred to relevant subjects in tax return for businesses. **Total net capital income/expense** is transferred to the calculation on the left side. Approve the values by clicking the symbol in the **Done** column. The **Result sole proprietorship** is calculated on the left side in the menu. ## []{#spouse_distribution}Distribution of business income between spouses and municipality Spouses, registered partners and spouse equivalent cohabitants that have worked for the business during the income year can divide income from joint business between them. [Read more about spouse distribution at The Norwegian Tax Administration](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/hjelp-til-skattemelding/slik-deler-ektefeller-inntekt-fra-felles-virksomhet/). Distribution is activated by checking **Spouse allocation** under **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Company information**. Click on **Business income and spouse distribution** on the left side menu under**Business income** and the right side will display a specification of Result for Business and Assigned result for owner/spouse. Change the field **Share** to adjust distribution between spouses. It is also possible to select different municipality if needed. Click on the ![](./img/16_send.png.PNG) -icon to go to the menu **Personal income**. Primary industry deduction /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/business-income/primary-industry-deduction page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Primary industry deduction ## Primary industry deduction Click on **Primary industry deduction** on the left side menu under**Business income** to display an overview with Total primary industry deduction and a detail tab for each type of deduction. Check **Entitled for deduction** to enable the registration fields. The field Taxable result or deficit from business income is automatically transferred from **Business income and spouse distribution.** Fill in the relevant fields to calculate the deduction. The field Deduction to owner (amount within deduction limit) is calculated according to registered values and displayed on the overview tab. Primary industry is activated by selecting **Primary industry** under **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Company information**. Business income and spouse distribution /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/business-income/spouse-distribution page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Business income and spouse distribution Click on **Business income and spouse distribution** on the left side menu under**Business income** and the right side will display a specification of Result and assigned result for owner/spouse. Change the field **Share** to adjust distribution between spouses. It is also possible to select different municipality if needed. Spouses, registered partners and spouse equivalent cohabitants that have worked for the business during the income year can divide income from joint business between them. [Read more about spouse distribution at The Norwegian Tax Administration](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/hjelp-til-skattemelding/slik-deler-ektefeller-inntekt-fra-felles-virksomhet/). Distribution is activated by checking **Spouse distribution of income and / or wealth** under **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Client information - Spouse allocation**. > [!NOTE] Share values across clients > By registering social security number on the owner and spouse and activate export of data in **Client information - Spouse allocation** on the main practitioner it is possible to share values from business income, personal income and wealth/debt across clients within the same accounting office. Go to **Tax return - Values from spouse** to fetch or edit data that has been made available from the spouse\'s client file. > > Period & Year will find changes in the client file and display a warning in the left side menu in **Tax return** if newer data is available. Values can be updated by clicking on the button **Fetch** if values has not been updated automatically. Click on the ![send](./img/16_send.png.PNG)-icon to go to the menu **Personal income**. Personal income /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/personal-income page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Personal income ## Calculation of personal income Click on the details tab in the menu to see the basis calculation of personal income. The value in **Result proprietorship** is transferred from the corresponding field under the tab **Business Income**. The system retrieves **Interest on the enterprise\'s debt to financial institutions included in the basis for the risk-free return** automatically, based on the bookings in the financial statement. If you hover over the amount field, you will see a menu icon where you can choose between **Show accounts** or **Override amount**. If you click on **Show all** in the upper right corner of the screen, all fields regarding basis calculations will appear. If you scroll down on the page fields that are included in the calculation of the basis for risk-free return is displayed. At the top of the calculation, **fixed assets** are listed, these are transferred from **Tax-related depreciations**, under the tab **Information**. Further in the calculation, other items are shown as **Non-depreciable operating equipment**, **Other acquired intangible rights**, **Capitalised research and development expenses**, **goods**, **Trade debtors and trade creditors**. If you hover over the amount field, you will see a menu icon where you can choose **Override amount** and edit if needed. Calculation of debt deductions is done on the basis of booked values of debt accounts to financial institutions. If you hover over the amount field, you will see a menu icon where you can choose **Override amount** and edit if needed. If the business has only been running partly of the year, enter the number of months in the formula to calculate a proportionate share of the basis for risk free-return. **Risk free-return** and **This years estimated personal income** is calculated and displayed at the top of the page. In **Negative personal income transferred from last year** the relevant value should be entered. **Calculated personal income of the year** is calculated according to registered values. The items under the details tab correspond to subjects related to personal income for sole proprietorship in business information. Wealth /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/wealth page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Wealth When you click on **Wealth**, the specification of the company\'s wealth is displayed. The values are retrieved from different areas in the system. This view displays a specification of the company\'s taxable wealth and deductible debt for transfer to the Tax Message. The specification contains balance items with accounting value. Each balance item in the specification detail row has a calculation type which for example shows the source of the value or if the value should be registered directly into the Tax message. This view displays a specification of the company\'s Taxable wealth and deductible debt for transfer to Tax Message. All listed values from **Taxable wealth and deductible debt** are transferred to relevant subjects in the Tax message. Checks /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/checks section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Checks If an error situation occurs this will be visualized with an informative icon on the **Checks** menu and on the left side for the section with errors. Period & Year uses the validation service of The Norwegian Tax Administration to validate information to be submitted to Altinn in connection with the new tax return. Validation of information takes place continuously in Period & Year. To access the validation service, you must be logged in with your social security number via the ID port. The following icon can be displayed: ![](./img/16_Information.png) - used to inform you, for example if you are currently not logged in to Altinn. ![](./img/16_Warning.png) - Indicates tips that are of relevance to the data you submit. The Tax return can be submitted even if this icon is displayed. ![](./img/16_Error.png) - Indicates that there is invalid information. At least one of the check results prevents you from submitting your information. Business information /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/checks/business-specification page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Business information When you click on **Business Information** on the left, any calculation deviations from the validation service to The Norwegian Tax Administration are displayed. Tax return /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/checks/tax-return page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Tax return When you click on **Tax return** on the left side, a login button or received validation messages from Altinn will be displayed. Internal control /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/checks/internal-control page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Internal control These are checks carried out by Period & Year. If you receive an error result during internal control, this will indicate that you will not be able to send information to The Norwegian Tax Administration for control. This must be corrected in order to have data checked against the The Norwegian Tax Administration. Reconciliation of equity /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/checks/equity-reconciliation page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Reconciliation of equity When you click on**Reconciliation equity** on the left side, a reconciliation model of the company\'s equity is displayed on the right side. The model lists an **Estimated equity 31.12. according to specification**. It specifies the change in equity between 1.1 and 31.12. If you have accounting obligation type 1 (non-accountable taxpayers), information from the reconciliation of equity will not be submitted to The Norwegian Tax Administration. Reconciliation of profit / loss account /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/checks/profit-loss-account page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Reconciliation of profit / loss account If you have a difference in reconciliation of profit / loss account this will be visualized with an error icon ![](./img/16_Error.png) on the **Checks** menu. Go to**Information and Tax - Checks - Reconciliation of profit / loss account** to see the details. Reconciliation of tax depreciation /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/checks/tax-depreciation page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Reconciliation of tax depreciation If you have a difference in reconciliation of tax depreciation this will be visualized with an error icon ![](./img/16_Error.png) on the **Checks** menu. Go to**Information and Tax - Checks - Reconciliation of tax depreciation** to see the details. Salary and pension costs /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-1/checks/salary-pension-costs page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Salary and pension costs Reconciliation of salary and pension costs was in the old tax return attached in tax form RF-1022. In the new tax return and business specification, this reconciliation has been removed. When you click on**Salary and pension costs** on the left side, a separate section for the reconciliation of salary and pension costs is displayed on the right side. The data calculated here and possibly also recorded will be shown on the Wage and pension costs report in **Reports - Other year-end documents**. The accounts included in the reconciliation are the same as previously presented in form RF-1022 Salary and pension costs. It is also possible to add separate lines in the various sections of the reconciliation. It is not possible to remove accounts directly from the list, but the accounts are included based on the reference account properties. Accounts that are mistakenly included in the reconciliation are then included due to the wrong reference account, and the reference account property of accounts shown on the screen can be changed directly from the screen. If accounts that should have been included in the reconciliation are not included, you must find the account accordingly and change the account\'s reference account property. Please see the [Tax Directorate\'s notices 4/2022](https://www.skatteetaten.no/rettskilder/type/skattedirektoratets-meldinger/revisors-plikter-i-forbindelse-med-signering-av-signaturpliktige-opplysninger-i-naringsspesifikasjon-og-skattemelding/) for more information. Accountable (type 2) /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2 section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Accountable (type 2) Businesses who have a bookkeeping obligation and full accounting obligation and who must prepare an annual report for submission to Regnskapsregisteret. Will submit the income statement and balance sheet based on accounting principles as an electronic attachment to the tax-return by sole proprietorship. Read more about the [Tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/) at The Norwegian Tax Administration. Information /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Information In **Information and tax - Information** you can register information about the company and add values for tax calculation. This is also where you enter additional information that is thematic or industry specific. This information is automatically transferred to relevant subjects in the tax return for businesses. Company /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/company section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Company In the left menu below **Company** you register/update **Client information** and **Auditor**. This information is automatically transferred to relevant subjects in the tax return for businesses. Company information /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/company/company-info page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Company information In **Company information**, some fields are populated automatically based on information that appears under **Settings - Company information**. Some company information can also be imported from the [Brønnøysund Register Centre](https://brreg.no/). Registered company information on the clients corporate identity number will be fetched.

When you start the year-end period for the first time, the import from the Brønnøysund Register Centre will be performed automatically.

To import data, simply click the button **Import from BrReg.no** at the bottom of the page in **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information**. Fill in the other fields under **Client information** manually. Accounting office /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/company/accounting-office page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Accounting office Information about the **Accounting office** can be imported from the [Brønnøysund Register Centre](https://brreg.no/) or filled out manually. Registered information about the Accounting office on the clients corporate identity number will be fetched. All information can be edited if needed. To import data, simply click the button **Import from BrReg.no** at the bottom of the page in **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information**. The button is available in the following menus, - Client information - Accounting office - Auditor Auditor /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/company/auditor page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Auditor Auditor appears in the menu on the left if you answered **Yes** to the question **Is the company subject to audit?** under **Company information**. Information about the **Auditor**can be imported from the [Brønnøysund Register Centre](https://brreg.no/) or filled out manually. Registered information about the auditor on the clients corporate identity number will be fetched. All information can be edited if needed. To import data, simply click the button **Import from BrReg.no** at the bottom of the page in **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information**. The button is available in the following menus, - Client information - Accounting office - Auditor Basis values /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/basis-values section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Basis values In the left menu under **Basis values**, you register values to calculate tax values. Account receivables /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/basis-values/account-receivables-no page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Account receivables The **Overview** tab shows accounting value and tax value of accounts receivable this year and last year. Accounting value is displayed at client account level. The tax value displayed here is a result of entries on the **Calculated taxable value** tab. Click **Show all** to see all associated client accounts with zero values. On the **Calculated taxable value** tab, you calculate the tax value of accounts receivable. The system calculates tax write-down for the **Calculate based on formula** option. Nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced trade debtors, confirmed losses on trade debtors, and sales revenue are automatically populated. If the amount in **Sales revenue** has both credit sales and cash sales, fill in the relevant amount for cash sales in the fields **Of which cash**. This because cash sales shall not be included in the calculation of tax write-downs of nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced trade debtors. You can see which client accounts are part of an automatically populated field by hovering over a value field and clicking on the symbol that appears. Select **Show accounts**. In the same menu you can also select **Override amount**. If the company is newly established, you can choose to use the **Use 2% write-down** (newly established business). The system then calculates a 2% tax write-down of nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced of trade debtors. When you do a change in this year\'s taxable value for account receivables, the system will automatically make a system voucher, so that the book value will be equal to the calculated taxable value. Under **Closing entries** you will see that the system has generated a system voucher **Calculation of tax write-down on account receivables**. Both accounting and taxable values are constantly updated in the tab **Overview**. Approve the values by clicking on the symbol in the **Done**column. Account receivables (personal) /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/basis-values/account-receivables page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Account receivables (personal) The **Overview** tab shows accounting value and tax value of accounts receivable this year and last year. Accounting value is displayed at client account level. The tax value displayed here is a result of entries on the **Calculated taxable value** tab. Click **Show all** to see all associated client accounts with zero values. On the **Calculated taxable value** tab, you calculate the tax value of accounts receivable. The system calculates tax write-down for the **Calculate based on formula** option. Nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced trade debtors, confirmed losses on trade debtors, and sales revenue are automatically populated. If the amount in **Sales revenue** has both credit sales and cash sales, fill in the relevant amount for cash sales in the fields **Of which cash**. This because cash sales shall not be included in the calculation of tax write-downs of nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced trade debtors. You can see which client accounts are part of an automatically populated field by hovering over a value field and clicking on the symbol that appears. Select **Show accounts**. In the same menu you can also select **Override amount**. If the company is newly established, you can choose to use the **Use 2% write-down** (newly established business). The system then calculates a 2% tax write-down of nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced of trade debtors. When you do a change in this year\'s taxable value for account receivables, the system will automatically make a system voucher, so that the book value will be equal to the calculated taxable value. Under **Closing entries** you will see that the system has generated a system voucher **Calculation of tax write-down on account receivables**. Both accounting and taxable values are constantly updated in the tab **Overview**. Approve the values by clicking on the symbol in the **Done**column. Tax-related depreciations /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/basis-values/tax-related-depreciations page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Tax-related depreciations Tax-related deprecations should be completed and submitted with the new tax return for businesses.

The registration page for balance depreciation is dynamic in relation to what is registered. Fields are only displayed if they are relevant in the situation, depending on registration in other fields.

For example, fields for transfer to profit and loss account will only appear in cases where they are relevant, e.g. if the realization date is set for balance group e, or if balance group b has a negative value in the depreciation basis, while balance groups a, c, d and j according to the tax rules never have a transfer to profit and loss account, and therefore will never show fields for transfer of profit or loss to profit and loss account.

Follow the instructions below to calculate tax depreciation. 1. Click **Add entry**, the symbol at the top right to create new depreciations. 2. Select type of entry: **Reducing balance depreciation**, **Non-depreciable** or **Linear depreciation**. An entry is created in a separate tab. 3. Fill in relevant fields. You can delete an entry by pressing the **Delete \...**button at the bottom of each tab. The first tab shows an overview of created depreciations grouped by type of depreciation and a summation of all tax-related depreciations. Tax related depreciations is automatically transferred to **Personal income**. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field explanations ## Balance depreciation Id : A numeric id is suggested when you create a new taxable depreciation. Asset group : Select the asset group to which the fixed asset belongs. Balance basis per 01.01 : Enter a positive or negative balance from 31.12 last year. Calculated impaired value of discontinued assets : If the balance must be reduced by the impaired value of an asset. Enter the calculated value here. Cost price - new acquisitions : Enter the cost price for operating assets acquired during the income year. Fixed assets must be entered here if it is assumed to have a useful life of at least 3 years and the cost price of the fixed asset is NOK 15,000 (including VAT if there is no right to deduct) or higher. For buildings acquired during the income year, the cost price shall be divided between the building balance and the balance j for fixed technical installations. Cost price - improvements : Enter costs on existing or newly acquired fixed assets in their entirety. Maintenance can be expensed directly. If you choose to activate higher maintenance costs, further information must be provided. In the case of expenses on buildings acquired during the income year, the cost price shall be divided between the building balance j for fixed, technical installations. Government grants etc : Enter public subsidies, with the exception of investment subsidies to the districts in accordance with regulations issued by the King, to be written down on the cost price. Adjustment of input VAT : Enter any change in cost price as a result of an adjustment of input VAT in accordance with the VAT Act. Remuneration (sales value on withdrawal) : Upon realization and withdrawal of fixed assets in group a, b, c, d or j, it is possible to write-down the whole value or parts of the value on the balance in the relevant group instead of the income recognition. Return of investment grants to districts : Return of investment grants to districts is calculated automatically based on registered values. The value can be overridden. Recognized direct revenue this year : Enter the part of the consideration etc. (by withdrawal the turnover value) which is entered directly to income in the realization year according to the Tax Act § 14-44 (1) and which thus shall not affect the basis for the year\'s balance depreciation, income recognition or transfer to profit and loss account. Basis for the year\'s balance depreciation, etc. : Here is the basis for this year\'s depreciation. The value is calculated based on registered values. Depreciation this year (including start depreciation) : This year\'s balance depreciation is calculated here. Remaining positive balance below NOK 15,000 will be deducted in full. The calculated value can be overridden. Income this year of negative balance : Negative balance recognized as income in balance groups a, c, d or j with at least the group\'s depreciation rate. The value is calculated based on registered values. The remaining negative balance below NOK 15,000 will be recognized as income in full. The calculated value can be overridden. Basis balance transferred to next year : The remaining positive balance as of 31.12. this year. which will be transferred to balance basis 1.1 next year. The same applies to the remaining negative balance in groups a, c, d and j. The value is calculated based on registered values. Fixed asset grants after regulations from government : Enter any grants for investment in the districts. Profit and loss account /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/basis-values/profit-loss-account page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Profit and loss account Profit and Loss should be completed and submitted with the company tax return if you have a loss account after the realisation of fixed assets etc. Follow the instructions below to calculate any profits or loss . 1. Click **Add profit- or loss account**, the symbol at the top right to create new accounts. An account is created in a separate tab. 2. Fill in relevant fields.

You can delete an account by clicking the Deletebutton at the bottom of each tab.

The first tab shows an overview of created accounts and a summation of all profit and loss accounts. The tax values of profit and loss accounts are automatically transferred to relevant subjects in business information. See the [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field explanations Profit and loss account ID : A numeric id is suggested when you create a new Profit-/loss account. Municipal : Relevant when there are several industries in several municipalities. Balance per 31.12. transferred from last year\'s profit and loss account : Enter the balance as of 31.12 in the previous income year, from the profit and loss account. \+ Total gain on realization and withdrawal : Enter all gains from the realization of fixed assets. Gain on realization of entire livestock on a farm upon termination of branch of operation : Enter all gains from the realization of entire livestock on a farm upon termination of branch of operation Incoming value from acquired profit and loss account : Enter any incoming value from acquired profit and loss account. Value of realized profit and loss account : Enter value of realized profit and loss account \- Total loss on realization and withdrawal : Enter all losses from the realization of fixed assets. = Basis for the year\'s income / deduction : Basis for this year\'s income / deduction recognition is calculated automatically based on registered values. \+ Maximum 20% as income deduction. Any remaining amount less than NOK 15,000 for deductions. : The value is calculated based on registered values. The field can be overridden by hovering over the field and selecting **Override amount**. Minimum 20% as income. Any remaining amount less than NOK 15,000 as income : The value is calculated based on registered values. The field can be overridden by hovering over the field and selecting **Override amount**. Balance profit and loss account per 31.12 transferred to next year. : The value is calculated based on registered values. Percentage for this year\'s income recognition or this year\'s income deduction : The rate for the current year is displayed. Additional information /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/additional-info section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Additional information In the menu on the left under **Additional information**, you enter information and values that are theme or industry specific. Property /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/additional-info/property page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Property Click the **Add property** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new property by selecting a type of property. If you select **Norwegian real estate** you will see a dialog where you can search by address or cadastre to find you property. Click **Add**and the property is created in a separate tab. Fill in the fields that are displayed, the system only displays relevant fields based on selection in the registration. You can delete a property by clicking the **Delete property** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an **Overview**of created properties. Calculated wealth tax values are transferred to **Information and tax - Wealth**. Use of car /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/additional-info/car-usage page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Use of car Click the **Add car** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new car. Registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically included in the tax return for businesses.

Cars are created in separate tabs. You can change the name/description of each car.

Start with filling out **Information about car usage**. The value **Balance depreciation for private use (for car not leased)l** is calculated automatically based on the values registered in **List price as new car**, **Registration year** and **Balance depreciation for private use (for car not leased)**, **Reversed car expenses for the private use of a work vehicle** is calculated automatically based on entered values. The first tab shows an overview of all created cars. On this tab you have the option to create an automatic system voucher regarding returns for private use. Calculated values and other information are transferred to relevant subjects in **Tax return- Business information.** Delete a car by clicking the **Delete car** button at the bottom of the page. See the previous [official guidelines](https://www.skatteetaten.no/globalassets/skjema/2021/rf-1125b.pdf) in the form RF-1125 Bruk av bil or [Posts, fields and subjects in new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field explanations Car number plate : Enter the car's registration number in this field. Car category : Select one of the following car categories. : - Passenger car - Electric car : - Hydrogen car : - Van (class 2) : - Truck with weight under 7500 kg : - Truck with weight 7500 kg and more - Car reg. for 9 passengers or more (special arrangement) - Bus registered for 16 passengers or more Registration year : Enter the year in which the car was first registered as new in Norway or abroad. List price as new car : Enter the main importer\'s indicative price for the car model, before any discount,, including vat and wreck discount. Extra equipment must be included (eg radio / music system, winter tires, ski box, trailer hitch, etc.). Extra equipment that has value solely for professional use is excluded. This applies to e.g. special devices intended for the transport of tools etc. Number of kilometers during this year : Enter the number of kilometers driven in total during the income year. Number of kilometers of business use during this year : Enter the number of kilometers driven in the business during the income year. Time period : Enter time periods from date to date for when you have used the car in the business. Private usage : Enter if the business vehicle has been used privately in the income year. Electronic driving record regarding driving at work : Enter whether an electronic driving record has been kept that applies to business driving in the income year. Here you answer yes or no. Operating cost exclusive leasing and deprecations : Enter operating costs in the income year. Leasing cost : Enter costs for leasing rent in the income year. Balance depreciation for private use (for car not leased) : 17% balance depreciation based on the car\'s list price at first registration is calculated based on entered information. Reversed car expenses for the private use of a work vehicle : Value is calculated automatically based on entered values. Accommodation and restaurant /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/additional-info/accomodation page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Accommodation and restaurant Accommodation and restaurants should be completed and submitted with the tax return for businesses. The information is used by the Norwegian tax authorities for statistics, analyzes etc. Click the **Add accommodation/restaurant** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new location. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The location is created in a separate tab. You can change the name/description for the accommodation/restaurant. You can delete a location by clicking the **Delete accommodation/restaurant** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created locations. The total inventory and income and withdrawal are summed up for all accommodations/restaurant. See[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Taxis and cargo transport /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/additional-info/taxi-cargo-transport-no page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Taxis and cargo transport Taxi and cargo transport-should be completed and submitted with the new tax return for businesses. Start by adding a permission number and industry on the overview page. Then click the **Add vehicle** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new vehicle. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The vehicle is created in a separate tab and linked to a specific permission number. You can change the name/description for the vehicle.

The registration page for taxi and cargo transport is dynamic in relation to what is registered. Fields are only displayed if they are relevant in the situation, depending on industry.

You can delete a vehicle by clicking the **Delete vehicle** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created vehicles. The total income from driving are summed up for all vehicles. See [Tax return for taxi and freight transport.](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/hjelp-til-skattemelding/drosje/) for more information. Taxis and cargo transport (impersonal) /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/additional-info/taxi-cargo-transport page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Taxis and cargo transport (impersonal) Taxi and cargo transport-should be completed and submitted with the new tax return for businesses. Start by adding a permission number and industry on the overview page. Then click the **Add vehicle** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new vehicle. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The vehicle is created in a separate tab and linked to a specific permission number. You can change the name/description for the vehicle.

The registration page for taxi and cargo transport is dynamic in relation to what is registered. Fields are only displayed if they are relevant in the situation, depending on industry.

You can delete a vehicle by clicking the **Delete vehicle** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created vehicles. The total income from driving are summed up for all vehicles. See [Tax return for taxi and freight transport.](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/hjelp-til-skattemelding/drosje/) for more information. Forestry information and timber account /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/information/additional-info/forestry-information-timber-account page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Forestry information and timber account This year\'s revenues and costs should be completed and submitted with the tax return for businesses. Click the **Add forest and timer account** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new account. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The account is created in a separate tab. You can delete an account by clicking the **Delete forest and timer account** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created accounts. The total values are summed up for all accounts. [Skattemelding for deg som driver med skog](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/hjelp-til-skattemelding/skog/).or [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses.](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) Financial statement /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/financial-statement page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Financial statement **Financial statement** contains an overview of the income statement. When you click on a category in the financial statement or balance on the left side , a specification of the company's values based on reference account mappings are displayed on the right side. These fields can be overridden and it is also possible to expand to drill down on a specific account. Click on the link on the amount to open **Account analysis**. The following categories are listed: #### Income statement - Operation income - Operation expenses - Capital income - Capital expenses #### Balance - Assets - Debt and equity Approve the values in each category by clicking the change status icon in the **Done** column. Business income /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/business-income section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Business income Additional business income /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/business-income/additional-business-income page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Additional business income Here you can specify costs from the income statement that are to be reversed and other items. Costs in the income statement relating to shares, units and other securities are reversed to specified fields, whereas taxable amounts for these items - where applicable - are re-entered in separate fields. **Additional business income** is transferred to the calculation on left. Approve the values by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**. The values are automatically transferred to the relevant subjects in the Business specification. Deduction business income /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/business-income/deduction-business-income page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Deduction business income Here you can specify income from the income statement that are to be reversed and other items. Recorded income from shares, units and other securities are reversed to specified fields, whereas taxable amounts for these items - where applicable - are re-entered in separate fields. **Deduction business income** is transferred to the calculation on the left hand side. Approve the values by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**. The values are automatically transferred to the relevant subjects in the Business specification. Changes in temporary differences /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/business-income/changes-in-temporary-differences page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Changes in temporary differences Go to **Business income - Changes in temporary differences** to calculate all temporary differences, change in deferred tax and deferred tax / tax assets in the balance sheet.

Do the following steps:

  1. First, you calculate all temporary differences between accounting and taxable values ​​01.01 and 31.12.
  2. Furthermore, you deduct any temporary differences that should not be included in the calculation basis for deferred tax / tax assets (for example, goodwill arising from merger / demerger).
  3. Consider offsetting tax-increasing and tax-reducing temporary differences and whether there are temporary differences that should not be offset.
  4. Calculate net deferred tax / tax assets in the balance sheet.
  5. Assess if deferred tax assets should be recognized in the balance sheet.
  6. Changes in temporary differences affecting tax payable is transferred to the calculation of total business income on the left hand side.
Values are automatically transferred to relevant subjects in the Business specification. Under the tab **Differences, tax payable**, the system has calculated temporary differences based on values ​​in the **Accounting** and **Taxable columns**. Select **Show All** to show all lines. The system generates taxable value equal to the accounting value for fields that may have a taxable value. You can override fields by hovering over the value in the field and clicking on the symbol that appears. Select **Override**. Select the blue arrow next to a line to see which client accounts in the income statement which are linked to each line as well as the specified taxable value on the relevant lines. **Total temporary differences affecting tax payable** summarizes the lines for each column. In the tab **Overview temporary differences**, a summary of temporary differences is displayed as of 01.01 and 31.12, and the changes. This overview is shown as part of the note **Temporary differences**under **Year-end closing - Annual report**. Beregning av driftsresultat /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/business-income/calculation-of-operating-profit-loss page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Beregning av driftsresultat ## Calculation of operating profit/loss Click on **Operating income** on the left side of the menu and the right side will display a specification of which operating income accounts that are booked in the financial statement. If you hover over the amount field, you will see a menu icon where you can choose between **Show accounts** or **Override amount**. If you click **Show all** in the upper right corner of the screen, all income fields will appear. The income fields correspond to Income statement 1, and the values are automatically transferred to relevant subjects in tax return for businesses. **Total operating income** is transferred to the calculation on the left side. Approve the values ​​by clicking the symbol in the **Done** column. Click on **Operating expenses** on the left side of the menu and the right side will display a specification of which operating expenses accounts that are booked in the financial statement. If you hover over the amount field, you will see a menu icon where you can choose between **Show accounts** or **Override amount**. If you click **Show all** in the upper right corner of the screen, all expenses fields will appear. The expenses fields correspond to Income statement 1, and values are automatically transferred to relevant subjects in tax return for businesses. **Total operating expenses** is transferred to the calculation on the left side. Approve the values by clicking the symbol in the **Done** column. The **Operating profit/loss** result is calculated on the left side in the menu. Click **Net capital income/expense** on the left side of the menu and the right side will display a specification of which net capital income/expense accounts that are booked in the income statement. If you hover over the amount field, you will see a menu icon where you can choose between **Show accounts** or **Override amount**. If you click **Show all** in the upper right corner of the screen, all expenses fields will appear. The income/expense fields correspond to Income statement 1, and values are automatically transferred to relevant subjects in tax return for businesses. **Total net capital income/expense** is transferred to the calculation on the left side. Approve the values by clicking the symbol in the **Done** column. The **Result sole proprietorship** is calculated on the left side in the menu. ## Distribution of business income between spouses and municipality Spouses, registered partners and spouse equivalent cohabitants that have worked for the business during the income year can divide income from joint business between them. [Read more about spouse distribution at The Norwegian Tax Administration](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/hjelp-til-skattemelding/slik-deler-ektefeller-inntekt-fra-felles-virksomhet/). Distribution is activated by checking **Spouse allocation** under **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Company information**. Click on **Business income and spouse distribution** on the left side menu under**Business income** and the right side will display a specification of Result for Business and Assigned result for owner/spouse. Change the field **Share** to adjust distribution between spouses. It is also possible to select different municipality if needed. Click on the ![](./img/16_send.png.PNG) -icon to go to the menu **Personal income**. Primary industry deduction /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/business-income/primary-industry-deduction page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Primary industry deduction ## Primary industry deduction Click on **Primary industry deduction** on the left side menu under **Business income** to display an overview with Total primary industry deduction and a detail tab for each type of deduction. Check **Entitled for deduction** to enable the registration fields. The field Taxable result or deficit from business income is automatically transferred from **Business income and spouse distribution.** Fill in the relevant fields to calculate the deduction. The field Deduction to owner (amount within deduction limit) is calculated according to registered values and displayed on the overview tab. Primary industry is activated by selecting **Primary industry** under **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Company information**. Business income and spouse distribution /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/business-income/spouse-distribution page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Business income and spouse distribution Click on **Business income and spouse distribution** on the left side menu under**Business income** and the right side will display a specification of Result and assigned result for owner/spouse. Change the field **Share** to adjust distribution between spouses. It is also possible to select different municipality if needed. Spouses, registered partners and spouse equivalent cohabitants that have worked for the business during the income year can divide income from joint business between them. [Read more about spouse distribution at The Norwegian Tax Administration](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/hjelp-til-skattemelding/slik-deler-ektefeller-inntekt-fra-felles-virksomhet/). Distribution is activated by checking **Spouse distribution of income and / or wealth** under **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Client information - Spouse allocation**. > [!NOTE] Share values across clients > By registering social security number on the owner and spouse and activate export of data in **Client information - Spouse allocation** on the main practitioner it is possible to share values from business income, personal income and wealth/debt across clients within the same accounting office. Go to **Tax return - Values from spouse** to fetch or edit data that has been made available from the spouse\'s client file. > > Period & Year will find changes in the client file and display a warning in the left side menu in **Tax return** if newer data is available. Values can be updated by clicking on the button **Fetch** if values has not been updated automatically. Click on the ![send](./img/16_send.png.PNG)-icon to go to the menu **Personal income**. Personal income /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/personal-income page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Personal income ## Calculation of personal income Click on the details tab in the menu to see the basis calculation of personal income. The value in **Result proprietorship** is transferred from the corresponding field under the tab **Business Income**. The system retrieves **Interest on the enterprise\'s debt to financial institutions included in the basis for the risk-free return** automatically, based on the bookings in the financial statement. If you hover over the amount field, you will see a menu icon where you can choose between **Show accounts** or **Override amount**. If you click on **Show all** in the upper right corner of the screen, all fields regarding basis calculations will appear. If you scroll down on the page fields that are included in the calculation of the basis for risk-free return is displayed. At the top of the calculation, **fixed assets** are listed, these are transferred from **Tax-related depreciations**, under the tab **Information**. Further in the calculation, other items are shown as **Non-depreciable operating equipment**, **Other acquired intangible rights**, **Capitalised research and development expenses**, **goods**, **Trade debtors and trade creditors**. If you hover over the amount field, you will see a menu icon where you can choose **Override amount** and edit if needed. Calculation of debt deductions is done on the basis of booked values of debt accounts to financial institutions. If you hover over the amount field, you will see a menu icon where you can choose **Override amount** and edit if needed. If the business has only been running partly of the year, enter the number of months in the formula to calculate a proportionate share of the basis for risk free-return. **Risk free-return** and **This years estimated personal income** is calculated and displayed at the top of the page. In **Negative personal income transferred from last year** the relevant value should be entered. **Calculated personal income of the year** is calculated according to registered values. The items under the details tab correspond to subjects related to personal income for sole proprietorship in business information. Wealth /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/wealth page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Wealth When you click on **Wealth**, the specification of the company\'s wealth is displayed. The values are retrieved from different areas in the system. This view displays a specification of the company\'s taxable wealth and deductible debt for transfer to the Tax Message. The specification contains balance items with accounting value. Each balance item in the specification detail row has a calculation type which for example shows the source of the value or if the value should be registered directly into the Tax message. This view displays a specification of the company\'s Taxable wealth and deductible debt for transfer to Tax Message. All listed values from **Taxable wealth and deductible debt** are transferred to relevant subjects in the Tax message. Checks /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/checks section 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Checks If an error situation occurs this will be visualized with an informative icon on the **Checks** menu and on the left side for the section with errors. Period & Year uses the validation service of The Norwegian Tax Administration to validate information to be submitted to Altinn in connection with the new tax return. Validation of information takes place continuously in Period & Year. To access the validation service, you must be logged in with your social security number via the ID port. The following icon can be displayed: ![](./img/16_Information.png) - used to inform you, for example if you are currently not logged in to Altinn. ![](./img/16_Warning.png) - Indicates tips that are of relevance to the data you submit. The Tax return can be submitted even if this icon is displayed. ![](./img/16_Error.png) - Indicates that there is invalid information. At least one of the check results prevents you from submitting your information. Business information /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/checks/business-specification page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Business information When you click on **Business Information** on the left, any calculation deviations from the validation service to The Norwegian Tax Administration are displayed. Tax return /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/checks/tax-return page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Tax return When you click on **Tax return** on the left side, a login button or received validation messages from Altinn will be displayed. Internal control /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/checks/internal-control page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Internal control These are checks carried out by Period & Year. If you receive an error result during internal control, this will indicate that you will not be able to send information to The Norwegian Tax Administration for control. This must be corrected in order to have data checked against the The Norwegian Tax Administration. Reconciliation of equity /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/checks/equity-reconciliation page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Reconciliation of equity When you click on**Reconciliation equity** on the left side, a reconciliation model of the company\'s equity is displayed on the right side. The model lists an **Estimated equity 31.12. according to specification**. It specifies the change in equity between 1.1 and 31.12. If you have accounting obligation type 1 (non-accountable taxpayers), information from the reconciliation of equity will not be submitted to The Norwegian Tax Administration. Reconciliation of fixed assets /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/checks/reconciliation-fixed-assets page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Reconciliation of fixed assets When you click on **Reconciliation of fixed assets** on the left side, a reconciliation model of the company\'s fixed assets is displayed on the right side. The model lists a **Specification of estimated change of temporary differences**. This includes entries from the company\'s depreciations, accounting profit/loss, profit/loss not entered in the profit/loss account, profit/loss entered in the profit/loss account and the difference between accounting and taxable cost. Estimated change in temporary differences according to specification is reconciled with RF-1217 item 3, column III Change in temporary differences. Under **Depreciations**the model lists the following entries: - Accounting depreciations - Hereof depreciation on financial leasing - Impairment of fixed assets - Taxable depreciations - Taxable linear depreciations - Taxable depreciations power plant Under **Accounting profit/loss** the model lists the following entries: - Accounting profit on sales - Accounting loss on sales Under **Profit/losses not entered in the profit-/loss account** the model lists the following entries: - Sales amount directly entered as income in the year of realization, cf. The Tax Act § 14-44 - Profit on non-depreciable fixed assets - Profit on linear depreciable fixed assets - Loss on non-depreciable fixed assets - Loss on linear depreciable fixed assets Under **Profit/losses entered in the profit-/loss account** the model lists the following entries: - Profit on non-depreciable fixed assets - Profit on depreciable fixed assets - Negative balance goodwill - Loss on non-depreciable fixed assets - Loss on depreciable fixed assets Under **Difference between accounting - and taxable cost** the model lists the following entries: - Tax-free investment subsidy - Input VAT adjustment - Reduction for adjustment of input VAT on sale - Diff. between the booked amount and the fair value at the time of the merger/demerger - Diff. tax values ​​and booked/fair value on conversion to limited company - Deduction for tax-free profit on transfer of assets to companies in the same group. - Addition for diff. between tax entry value and remuneration transferred from companies in the same group. - Activated fixed assets to be expensed for tax purposes Reconciliation of equity (personal) /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/checks/reconciliation-equity page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Reconciliation of equity (personal) When you click on**Reconciliation of equity** on the left side, a reconciliation model of the company\'s equity is displayed on the right side. The model lists an **Estimated equity 31.12. according to specification**. It specifies the change in equity between 1.1 and 31.12. If you have accounting obligation type 2 (accountable taxpayers), information from the reconciliation of equity will be submitted to The Norwegian Tax Administration. Salary and pension costs /periodandyear/help/taxation/personal/type-2/checks/salary-pension-costs page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Salary and pension costs Reconciliation of salary and pension costs was in the old tax return attached in tax form RF-1022. In the new tax return and business specification, this reconciliation has been removed. When you click on**Salary and pension costs** on the left side, a separate section for the reconciliation of salary and pension costs is displayed on the right side. The data calculated here and possibly also recorded will be shown on the Wage and pension costs report in **Reports - Other year-end documents**. The accounts included in the reconciliation are the same as previously presented in form RF-1022 Salary and pension costs. It is also possible to add separate lines in the various sections of the reconciliation. It is not possible to remove accounts directly from the list, but the accounts are included based on the reference account properties. Accounts that are mistakenly included in the reconciliation are then included due to the wrong reference account, and the reference account property of accounts shown on the screen can be changed directly from the screen. If accounts that should have been included in the reconciliation are not included, you must find the account accordingly and change the account\'s reference account property. Please see the [Tax Directorate\'s notices 4/2022](https://www.skatteetaten.no/rettskilder/type/skattedirektoratets-meldinger/revisors-plikter-i-forbindelse-med-signering-av-signaturpliktige-opplysninger-i-naringsspesifikasjon-og-skattemelding/) for more information. Information and tax (participant taxed) /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed section Information about the company, calculation of business income, distribution of ownership shares for participant taxed with accounting obligation 2 or 5. 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Information and tax (participant taxed) Information about the company, calculation of business income, distribution of ownership shares for participant taxed with accounting obligation 2 or 5. In **Year-end closing - Information and tax** you register/update information about the company, as well as finding what you need to calculate **Business income**, **Taxable result** and **Accounting result after tax**.

Pre-populated values are updated automatically in Information and tax, however if necessary you can click the refresh-icon to refresh values in information and tax. Clicking the icon will start a full recalculation of values. During the process the button will be disabled but as soon as the calculation is completed the button will be available again.

 Not accountable (type 2) /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2 section 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Not accountable (type 2) "Accountable (type 2)" applies to companies that have an accounting obligation according to Section 1-2 first paragraph of the Accounting Act (obliged to report annually). These report profit and loss accounts and balance sheets based on accounting principles. This choice corresponds to previous business statement 2. Read more about the [Tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/) at The Norwegian Tax Administration. Information /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information section 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Information In **Information and tax - Information** you can register information about the company and add values for tax calculation. This is also where you enter additional information that is thematic or industry specific. This information is automatically transferred to relevant subjects in the tax return for businesses. Company /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/company section 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Company In the left menu below **Company** you register/update **Client information**, **Accounting office** and **Auditor**. This information is automatically transferred to relevant subjects in the tax return for businesses. Company information /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/company/company-info page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Company information In **Company information**, some fields are populated automatically based on information that appears under **Settings - Company information**. Some company information can also be imported from the [Brønnøysund Register Centre](https://brreg.no/). Registered company information on the clients corporate identity number will be fetched.

When you start the year-end period for the first time, the import from the Brønnøysund Register Centre will be performed automatically.

To import data, simply click the button **Import from BrReg.no** at the bottom of the page in **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information**. Fill in the other fields under **Client information** manually. NOKUS (Norwegian-controlled foreign company) /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/company/nokus page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # NOKUS (Norwegian-controlled foreign company) The NOKUS rules stipulate that Norwegian participants in Norwegian-controlled companies and entities resident in low-tax countries shall be taxed for a proportional share of the company\'s/entity\'s profit/loss regardless of whether dividends are actually paid out, see Section 2-4 of the Tax Act, cf. Section 10-60 to Section 10-68. The main purpose of the NOKUS rules is to equalize the tax treatment of Norwegian taxpayers who invest in Norway with those who invest in companies in low-tax countries (capital export neutrality).

Setting up clients

The Norwegian-controlled companies and entities are essentially impersonal companies but are taxed in Norway as companies with participant taxation (SDF). Therefore, the client is created by selecting the company category "Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)" and then choosing the enterprise type "NOKUS - Norwegian-controlled foreign company."

#### Participants in a NOKUS Participants in a NOKUS company can fall into three categories: - Impersonal participant taxed under ordinary rules, e.g., a limited company - Personal participant - Impersonal participant taxed under the special shipping company rules in Section 8-10 of the Tax Act #### Setting up participants by tax form Participants are created in the menu **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Participants** and selecting the **Participants** menu item in the left margin. A personal participant is specified by registering the participant\'s personal identification number in the \"Personal identification number\" field. An impersonal participant is specified by registering the participant\'s organization number in the \"organization number\" field. If a participant is taxed under the special shipping rules in Section 8-10 of the Tax Act, this must be indicated in the menu **Year-end - Information and tax - Various information** that the company is engaged in shipping activities. #### Interest limitation for NOKUS companies The three categories of participants have different income calculations. For this reason, there is also interest limitation with calculations depending on the category: - Impersonal participant taxed under ordinary rules - Personal participant - Impersonal participant taxed under the shipping company rules in Section 8-10 of the Tax Act Each of the three categories has its own calculations, where some parts of the numerical material, such as interest, related parties, etc., are the same in all three categories, while other parts differ for those parts of the interest limitation that are affected by differences in income in the income year or previous income years. #### Shipping company taxation Data in shipping company taxation must be registered for the relevant parts of the data, including financial income and financial expenses, which are taxed at the individual participant level.

Accounts that cannot be used for NOKUS companies

There is no support for NOKUS companies to submit a business specification with accounts referred to by any of the following account codes in the business specification:

  • 3000 Sales revenue and withdrawals, taxable

  • 5600 Work compensation to owners in ANS etc.

  • 6100 Freight and transport costs related to sales

  • 7099 Private use of a business vehicle

  • 8030 Interest income from companies in the same group

  • 8130 Interest expenses to companies in the same group

If you have an account with a balance, which is mapped to one of the above items, a validation message will appear under "Checks - Internal control indicating that one of these account codes has been used. If such a message appears, go to Year-end - Information and tax - Financial statement and find the code being warned about, and change the reference account to an account not referred to by one of these lines. For example, if account number 3000 is used, this account will get reference account 3000, which is linked to code 3000 in the business specification. Use, for instance, reference account 3100 for this account, and the problem is solved. The same applies to the other codes that give warnings.

#### Participant information The participant information does not correspond to the participant information in a regular SDF but contains information relevant to NOKUS taxation, varying somewhat depending on the three categories of participants: impersonal, personal, and participants subject to shipping company taxation. There are different tabs with information for each of the participants. If withholding tax on interest, royalties, etc., is paid, this is registered in a separate menu and allocated to the participants. #### Wealth Wealth is registered under the menu item \"Year-end - Information and tax - Wealth.\" Wealth can be registered with the following three mutually exclusive alternatives: - The market value of listed shares at the end of the income year - Net wealth from the previous income year - Estimated sales value at the end of the income year This value should be the total value for the entire company and should also include shares or units owned by others who are not taxable in Norway. If something other than the market value of listed shares is chosen, information on the calculation of wealth at the end of the income year for use in the next year\'s wealth determination will also be displayed. This calculation corresponds with the wealth calculation for a limited company to determine the share value for unlisted shares owned by a Norwegian limited company. #### Validation of information As with other taxpayers, there will be continuous validation of information for the client in Period & Year. #### Business specification The business specification is identical to other companies. It is necessary to perform currency conversion of the financial statement figures before these are registered in Period & Year, as Period & Year does not support internal conversion of balance figures from financial statements, etc.

Financial data as input

It is necessary to Import accounting data by registering balance figures at the account level in an Excel file for import. Importing balance figures from Excel is done by having line 1 contain headers and the remaining lines contain data.

Column A:

  • Header = Account

  • Content = Account number, normally 4 digits

Column B:

  • Header = Account name

  • Content = Account name as text

Column C:

  • Header = Financial year as an integer, e.g., 2023

  • Content = Balance figures with 0 to 2 decimal places

#### Tax return The tax return is the same as for other SDFs, but with certain fields specific to NOKUS companies. #### Participant reports In the menu **Year-end - Information and tax - Participants**, there is a function button to download participant reports in PDF format to send to the company\'s participants. #### Participants\' tax returns After submitting the company return to the Tax Administration, it may happen that the reports are made available as pre-filled information that can be downloaded by the individual participant in Period & Year. The reports are found in the same registration screens as for participants in SDFs in general. Foreign businesses assessed as partnerships (USDF) /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/company/foreign-businesses-assessed-partnerships page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Foreign businesses assessed as partnerships (USDF) The company is set up as an ordinary company with participant determination (SDF) where you indicate the closest form of liability, which will either be ANS, DA, KS or internal company. To indicate that the company is a USDF, this must be ticked under **Information and tax - Information - Client information**. Information on legal form (company form) and whether supporting material can be submitted is also given here. When it comes to registering participants, this is done under **Information and tax - Participants** and select **Participants** in the left-hand menu. Here, participants who are liable to pay tax in Norway register by entering either their social security number or company number and filling in other information. It is recommended to fill in the participants so that the total participants add up to 100%. This is done by creating a participant without tax liability who owns the remaining share owned by foreign participants without tax liability to Norway. This is done by creating an additional participant, where you do not enter either a social security number or an organization number, but indicate the participant as not liable to tax in Norway. This participant must technically contain the company share that is not owned by a person or company that is liable to tax in Norway.

When it is stated that the participant is not liable to tax in Norway, no information about this will be filled in the tax return, but validation messages are avoided in the internal validations such as, for example, that the ownership share is not stated as 100%, etc.

The company registration is submitted in the usual way as for Norwegian SDF. Annual report is not available for this form of company See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Basis values /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/basis-values section 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Basis values In the left menu under **Basis values**, you register values to calculate tax values. Account receivables /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/basis-values/account-receivables page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Account receivables The **Overview** tab shows accounting value and tax value of accounts receivable this year and last year. Accounting value is displayed at client account level. The tax value displayed here is a result of entries on the **Calculated taxable value** tab. Click **Show all** to see all associated client accounts with zero values. On the **Calculated taxable value** tab, you calculate the tax value of accounts receivable. The system calculates tax write-down for the **Calculate based on formula** option. Nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced trade debtors, confirmed losses on trade debtors, and sales revenue are automatically populated. If the amount in **Sales revenue** has both credit sales and cash sales, fill in the relevant amount for cash sales in the fields **Of which cash**. This because cash sales shall not be included in the calculation of tax write-downs of nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced trade debtors. You can see which client accounts are part of an automatically populated field by hovering over a value field and clicking on the symbol that appears. Select **Show accounts**. In the same menu you can also select **Override amount**. If the company is newly established, you can choose to use the **Use 2% write-down** (newly established business). The system then calculates a 2% tax write-down of nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced of trade debtors. When you do a change in this year\'s taxable value for account receivables, the system will automatically make a system voucher, so that the book value will be equal to the calculated taxable value. Under **Closing entries** you will see that the system has generated a system voucher **Calculation of tax write-down on account receivables**. Both accounting and taxable values are constantly updated in the tab **Overview**. Approve the values by clicking on the symbol in the **Done**column. Goods /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/basis-values/goods page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Goods The **Overview** tab shows accounting values and tax values of goods this year and last year. The accounting value is displayed at the client account level and is summed per inventory group and in total. Tax values displayed here are the result of entries on the **Calculated taxable value** tab. Click **Show All** to see all associated client accounts with zero values. In the **Calculated taxable value** tab, you calculate the tax value of goods. Adjust accounting value for dead stock and other adjustments to get tax value. Last year\'s tax value is entered manually the first year, and is populated automatically later years. Tax value is automatically transferred to relevant subjects and to **Changes in temporary differences**. Click **Show all** to see all inventory groups with associated client accounts with zero values. See [Items, fields and subjects in new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Tax related depreciations /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/basis-values/tax-related-depreciations page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Tax related depreciations Tax-related deprecations should be completed and submitted with the company tax return.

The registration page for balance depreciation is dynamic in relation to what is registered. Fields are only displayed if they are relevant in the situation, depending on registration in other fields.

For example, fields for transfer to profit and loss account will only appear in cases where they are relevant, e.g. if the realization date is set for balance group e, or if balance group b has a negative value in the depreciation basis, while balance groups a, c, d and j according to the tax rules never have a transfer to profit and loss account, and therefore will never show fields for transfer of profit or loss to profit and loss account.

Follow the instructions below to calculate tax depreciation. 1. Click **Add entry**, the symbol at the top right to create new depreciations. 2. Select type of entry: **Reducing balance depreciation**, **Non-depreciable** or **Linear depreciation**. An entry is created in a separate tab. 3. Fill in relevant fields. You can delete an entry by pressing the **Delete \...**button at the bottom of each tab. The first tab shows an overview of created depreciations grouped by type of depreciation and a summation of all tax-related depreciations. Tax related depreciations is automatically transferred to **Temporary differences**.

For companies with limited accounting obligations, there will be automatic postings of transfers to and from negative balances, profit and loss accounts, as well as income of negative balances/the year's sales and deductions of depreciation. For companies with full accounting obligations, positive and negative values ​​are transferred to temporary differences between accounting and tax values.

See [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field explanations ## Balance depreciation Id : A numeric id is suggested when you create a new taxable depreciation. Asset group : Select the asset group to which the fixed asset belongs. Balance basis per 01.01 : Enter a positive or negative balance from 31.12 last year. Calculated impaired value of discontinued assets : If the balance must be reduced by the impaired value of an asset. Enter the calculated value here. Cost price - new acquisitions : Enter the cost price for operating assets acquired during the income year. Fixed assets must be entered here if it is assumed to have a useful life of at least 3 years and the cost price of the fixed asset is NOK 15,000 (including VAT if there is no right to deduct) or higher. For buildings acquired during the income year, the cost price shall be divided between the building balance and the balance j for fixed technical installations. Cost price - improvements : Enter costs on existing or newly acquired fixed assets in their entirety. Maintenance can be expensed directly. If you choose to activate higher maintenance costs, further information must be provided. In the case of expenses on buildings acquired during the income year, the cost price shall be divided between the building balance j for fixed, technical installations. Government grants etc : Enter public subsidies, with the exception of investment subsidies to the districts in accordance with regulations issued by the King, to be written down on the cost price. Adjustment of input VAT : Enter any change in cost price as a result of an adjustment of input VAT in accordance with the VAT Act. Remuneration (sales value on withdrawal) : Upon realization and withdrawal of fixed assets in group a, b, c, d or j, it is possible to write-down the whole value or parts of the value on the balance in the relevant group instead of the income recognition. Return of investment grants to districts : Return of investment grants to districts is calculated automatically based on registered values. The value can be overridden. Recognized direct revenue this year : Enter the part of the consideration etc. (by withdrawal the turnover value) which is entered directly to income in the realization year according to the Tax Act § 14-44 (1) and which thus shall not affect the basis for the year\'s balance depreciation, income recognition or transfer to profit and loss account. Basis for the year\'s balance depreciation, etc. : Here is the basis for this year\'s depreciation. The value is calculated based on registered values. Depreciation this year (including start depreciation) : This year\'s balance depreciation is calculated here. Remaining positive balance below NOK 15,000 will be deducted in full. The calculated value can be overridden. Income this year of negative balance : Negative balance recognized as income in balance groups a, c, d or j with at least the group\'s depreciation rate. The value is calculated based on registered values. The remaining negative balance below NOK 15,000 will be recognized as income in full. The calculated value can be overridden. Basis balance transferred to next year : The remaining positive balance as of 31.12. this year. which will be transferred to balance basis 1.1 next year. The same applies to the remaining negative balance in groups a, c, d and j. The value is calculated based on registered values. Fixed asset grants after regulations from government : Enter any grants for investment in the districts. Profit and loss account /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/basis-values/profit-loss-account page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Profit and loss account ## Profit loss account (participant taxed) Profit and Loss should be completed and submitted with the company tax return if you have a loss account after the realization of fixed assets etc.

For companies with limited accounting obligations, automatic postings of transfers to and from the profit and loss account as well as income and deductions will be made. For companies with full accounting obligations, a transfer is made to temporary differences between accounting and tax values.

Follow the instructions below to calculate any profits or loss . 1. Click **Add profit- or loss account**, the symbol at the top right to create new accounts. An account is created in a separate tab. 2. Fill in relevant fields.

You can delete an account by clicking the Deletebutton at the bottom of each tab.

The first tab shows an overview of created accounts and a summation of all profit and loss accounts. The tax values of profit and loss accounts are automatically transferred to relevant subjects in business information. See [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field explanations Profit and loss account ID : A numeric id is suggested when you create a new Profit-/loss account. Municipal : Relevant when there are several industries in several municipalities. Balance per 31.12. transferred from last year\'s profit and loss account : Enter the balance as of 31.12 in the previous income year, from the profit and loss account. \+ Total gain on realization and withdrawal : Enter all gains from the realization of fixed assets. Gain on realization of entire livestock on a farm upon termination of branch of operation : Enter all gains from the realization of entire livestock on a farm upon termination of branch of operation Incoming value from acquired profit and loss account : Enter any incoming value from acquired profit and loss account. Value of realized profit and loss account : Enter value of realized profit and loss account \- Total loss on realization and withdrawal : Enter all losses from the realization of fixed assets. = Basis for the year\'s income / deduction : Basis for this year\'s income / deduction recognition is calculated automatically based on registered values. \+ Maximum 20% as income deduction. Any remaining amount less than NOK 15,000 for deductions. : The value is calculated based on registered values. The field can be overridden by hovering over the field and selecting **Override amount**. Minimum 20% as income. Any remaining amount less than NOK 15,000 as income : The value is calculated based on registered values. The field can be overridden by hovering over the field and selecting **Override amount**. Balance profit and loss account per 31.12 transferred to next year. : The value is calculated based on registered values. Percentage for this year\'s income recognition or this year\'s income deduction : The rate for the current year is displayed. Interest limitation rules /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/basis-values/interest page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Interest limitation rules In **Year-end closing - Information on tax - Information - Basic values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Interest limitation.** The area is automatically available if the company has net interest costs in the balance over NOK 5,000,000.00. The area can also be added manually from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the tax authorities for the calculation loop to work.

The work area replaces the former RF-1315 and RF-1509. With regard to Exemption rule RF-1509, the area is expanded by ticking yes for: **Does the company make use of an exception rule at either company level or national level (including domestic group)?** The area consists of both manual fields and pre-calculated fields from the accounts and from calculated values from skatteetaten. #### The following fields are taken from the balance sheet/accounts - Total interest costs (e.g. Interest on fixed tax) - Total interest income (e.g. Interest on fixed tax) - Income/loss before deduction for any provided group contribution - Provided group group contribution to deductions in ordinary income - Calculated other income (shipping company) #### The following fields are calculated/received from skatteetaten Calculation of total net interest expenses : - Net interest expenses : - Total interest expenses including guarantee expenses to related parties, and total interest income from related parties : - Total net interest expenses to related parties : - Net interest expenses to companies etc. in the group : - Net interest expenses to other related parties (outside the group) Calculation basis for interest deduction limit : - Addition for tax depreciation : - Directly recorded income for depreciated assets : - Calculation basis for interest deduction limit This year\'s addition or deduction in income : - Net interest expenses - Net interest expenses : - Difference between this year\'s interest expenses and interest deduction limit - Reversed addition to income (only for companies in the group) - Addition to income for companies etc. in the group that have their deduction for interest to other related parties cut off - This year\'s addition to income. Total reductions of this year\'s interest expenses - Net interest expenses - Adjustment of income Carryforward of interest deduction from this year : - Addition to income - Carried forward from previous years - Deduction from income - Adjustment for companies with participant taxation or non-resident companies with losses - Carryforward of disallowed interest deduction Proportion of this year\'s interest expenses that the company can carry forward : - For deduction this year - Remaining for carryforward Information about chosen exemption rule, Norwegian part of the group, and domestic group : - Equity ratio in the consolidated financial statements as a percentage. Information about company accounts / consolidated balance sheet for the Norwegian part of the group and calculation of equity ratio : - Adjusted equity in the company or Norwegian part of the group (specified below) - Adjusted total assets in the company or Norwegian part of the group (specified below) - Equity ratio for the company or Norwegian part of the group Specification of adjustments to the accounting principles of the consolidated financial statements : - Total change in equity / total change in total assets - Effect on equity - Effect on total assets Adjustment of company accounts / consolidated balance sheet for the Norwegian part of the group : - Overall increase in equity - Overall decrease in equity - Overall increase in total assets - Overall decrease in total assets **Carryforward of cut off interest deduction:** Tax value for previous years\' cut off deduction and tax value for the remaining deduction to be carried forward this year are automatically transferred to **Tax Calculation/Temporary Differences/Deferred Tax Differences, Deferred Tax.**

Incorrect completion in work area:

If the user by mistake has activated the workspace and filled in data but want to close it, some actions must be taken. All data the user has entered manually must be removed/deleted.

If the area contains registered ​​or overwritten values, the area will be locked and data may be kept on the preview of the tax return. Remove all manually recorded data and close the workspace from the area selector.

See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Hydroelectric plants /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant-minitoc section 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Hydroelectric plants In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Hydroelectric plant.** The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.** On clients imported in 2023 from Altinn, Finale Årsoppgjør or Total Årsoppgjør, activation will be done automatically if there is a power plant in tax form RF-1151.

Import from Altinn, Finale Årsoppgjør or Total Årsoppgjør for the income year 2022

For the income year 2023, imports of historical data for income year 2022 can be made from either Altinn, Finale Årsoppgjør or Total Årsoppgjør.

Please note that imports will not be able to specify the correct type of fixed asset for special fixed assets in power plants, but use the lifetime (67 years / 40 years) to select a type that has the same lifetime (power station (67 years) or mechanical equipment (40 years) This must be changed manually to the correct type. This is done by registering the change directly on the individual fixed asset.

The area consists of the following registration pages that have conditions that specially apply to hydroelectric plants: - Hydroelectric plant - Separate fixed assets in power plants - Acquisitions of separate fixed assets - Separate fixed assets under construction - Taxable depreciations in power plants

Note that these area requires logging in with an active connection to the tax authorities.

#### Reference account codes specifically for power companies Here is a list of account codes that are specific to power companies - 1117 Electrotechnical equipment in power companies (balance group g) - 1118 Separate fixed assets in power plants under construction - 1119 Separate fixed assets in power plants - 1218 Separate fixed assets in power plants under construction - 1219 Separate fixed assets in power plants - 1577 Natural resource tax brought forward - 2501 Payable natural resource tax, not offset - 2502 Land rent tax payable, not offset - 8301 Natural resource tax - 8302 Basic interest tax #### Tax calculation The tax calculation function contains a separate card **Payable tax for hydroelectric power plants**. This function retrieves values ​​from tax calculations carried out by the Tax Administration, which are shown on the separate card **Tax calculation from the Skatteetaten**. At the bottom of this tab, accounting for tax expense is shown, where accounts entered show the desired tax amount, and automatic postings will adjust the account balance to match the amounts entered.

It is possible to override which tax cost is to be posted, so that you can have the tax cost that you have calculated posted in cases where the annual accounts have already been submitted.

 Hydroelectric plant /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant-minitoc/hydroelectric-plant page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Hydroelectric plant In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Hydroelectric plant.** The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.** The power plant overview contains a summary of calculated values ​​from the property tax base, natural resource tax and ground rent income before and after coordination with other group companies. #### Coordination of ground rent income in the group The power plant overview contains registration of coordination with other companies in the group, and values ​​registered have an effect on the final coordinated ground rent income. #### Hydroelectric plant This menu item contains a list of hydroelectric plants, and these are created by clicking on the plus icon in the upper right. Two different types of hydropower plants can be created here: - With rent income (10,000+ kVA) - Without rent income (\< 10,000 kVA) Hydropower plants without ground rent income : These power plants may have associated special operating assets in power plants. : Other tax-related depreciation can also be linked to the hydropower plant, and will be included as part of the property tax basis and the asset calculation for the power plant. Balance depreciation in balance groups a, c, d and g will be included as asset value of the power plant if they are linked to a power plant, and will otherwise be included as assets from the balance groups, as in other companies if they are not linked to a power plant. : The property tax base and asset value are calculated from the tax-depreciated value of the special operating assets in the power plant. Hydroelectric plant with ground rent income : These are power plants that calculate ground rent income and natural resource tax. Property tax base and asset values ​​are calculated according to the special rules for the present value of calculated future cash flows according to the rules in the Tax Act. Calculation of values for power companies : Calculations of these values are made technically by submitting values ​​to the Tax Administrations calculation functions, and making use of the Tax Administrations calculations of all the different calculated fields for power companies. This also requires that you log in to the Tax Administration functions within the program to identify yourself. #### Ground rent income Ground rent income is on a separate tab in **Ground rent income** at the individual hydroelectric plant. Specification of gross rent income : Total annual production is recorded under the power plant information. Other data is recorded on a separate tab **Ground rent income** with the exception of power delivered in accordance with contract and profit from the realization of special fixed assets used in power production. Contract income : Power delivered according to contract is registered on separate tab **Contract revenue** at the individual power plant. Contract income is an overview per contract, and here it is possible to import data from Excel. :

Import from Excel

The import button can be found at the top right, to the left of the plus button for creating a new power plant. By pressing the import button, a dialog appears where you can download an Excel template for this import function. It is necessary to use this Excel template to import data.

When importing, there are two choices:

(1) Add imported data to the existing content and (2) Delete existing data and replace it with imported data.

Profit from the realization of special fixed assets used in power production : Amounts are calculated automatically by the Tax Administration on the basis of data on special operating assets in power plants. Specification of deductions in ground rent income : Deductions in ground rent income consist of both data that is registered and data that is calculated by the Tax Administration on the basis of other data from the client\'s business specification and tax return. Some calculations are commented on below. Tax-related depreciation of fixed assets used in power production : These are depreciation both on special operating assets in power plants and other tax-related depreciation (balance depreciation and linear depreciation otherwise). These are depreciations on the elements that are not directly deducted from the ground rent income at the time of investment. Loss on realization of a special fixed asset used in power production : Amounts are calculated automatically by the Tax Administration on the basis of data on special operating assets in power plants. Investment cost related to power production : These are elements that are stated as directly deducted from the ground rent income at the time of investment both on special operating assets in power plants and other tax-related depreciation (balance depreciation and linear depreciation otherwise). This year\'s calculated corporation tax on business subject to ground rent : Amounts are calculated automatically by the Tax Administration on the basis of data on business specification and tax return. This year\'s application of carried forward calculated negative corporation tax : Amounts are calculated automatically by the Tax Administration on the basis of data on business specification and tax return Carry forward negative ground rent income from before 2007 : Value carried forward from previous years must be registered here, while interest and application to deductions in positive ground rent income is calculated by the Tax Administrationy and automatically entered into the registration form. Calculated company tax and calculated negative company tax to carry forward : Calculations of calculated fields are obtained from the Tax Administration calculations, and are obtained from the Tax Administration calculation functions. #### Natural resource tax Natural resource tax is on a separate tab in **Natural resource tax** at the individual hydroelectric plant. Values from previous years are taken from tax returns from previous years, and can also be registered manually. Distribution of municipalities is done by registering a distribution key between the municipalities. Distribution keys can be any number, and are distributed based on the municipality\'s distribution key divided by the total distribution key for all municipalities if there are more than one municipality. It is not necessary to register a distribution key if there is only one municipality in the list. #### Wealth/property tax Basis for calculation specifies gross sales revenue for the current year, and sums up deductions for costs and ground rent tax. Gross sales revenue, gross operating costs and deductions for ground rent tax from the previous four years are taken from the previous year\'s tax return, and are not specified beyond this (new from 2023). The present value calculation itself is carried out by the Tax administration, and is entered in Period & Year from the Tax Administrations calculations. The present value of future replacement costs appears as the sum of values from the following objects linked to the power plant: - Separate operating assets in power plants, value of the individual acquisition - Balance depreciation See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Separate fixed assets in power plants /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant-minitoc/separate-fixed-assets-power-plants page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Separate fixed assets in power plants In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Separate fixed assets in power plants.**. The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the Tax Administration.

Separate fixed assets in power companies consist of the following structures: - Fixed asset - Acquisitions related to the fixed asset The fixed asset contains information about the municipality and whether the investment cost is directly expensed in ground rent taxation. If a fixed asset is to have varying information about it, it must be split into several fixed assets. Disposal is registered on the fixed asset itself and not on the acquisitions. All investments are placed on the acquisition object, which is an underlying object of the fixed asset. The fixed asset also contains a separate profit and loss account, which is also included in the calculation of temporary differences. Fixed asset register : It is possible to register acquisitions of fixed assets in power companies in the **Fixed assets register**. In such cases, it is indicated that there is a \'Separate fixed assets in power plants\', and the desired parameters are registered. Acquisitions of separate fixed assets : This menu gives you the following options: : 1\. Import to Excel : 2\. Export to Excel : 3\. Filtered view : Filtering can be done on: : 1\. Power plant : 2\. Construction equipment : 3\. Base rate treatment : 4\. Acquisition year : There is a spreadsheet template for importing both new special fixed assets and acquisitions of existing special fixed assets in power companies. : There is an export function for this too, where export is made in the same format as import, so that you can export data, then modify data and import data again. :

The import function allows you to add:

1. Separate operating assets in power plants

2. Acquisition of a new or existing special operating asset in a power plant

See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Acquisitions of separate-fixed-assets /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant-minitoc/acquisitions-separate-fixed-assets page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Acquisitions of separate-fixed-assets In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Acquisitions of separate-fixed-assets** The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the Tax Administration.

Acquisitions of separate fixed assets : This menu gives you the following options: : 1\. Import to Excel : 2\. Export to Excel : 3\. Filtered view : Filtering can be done on: : 1\. Power plant : 2\. Construction equipment : 3\. Base rate treatment : 4\. Acquisition year : There is a spreadsheet template for importing both new special fixed assets and acquisitions of existing special fixed assets in power companies. : There is an export function for this too, where export is made in the same format as import, so that you can export data, then modify data and import data again. :

The import function allows you to add:

1. Separate operating assets in power plants

2. Acquisition of a new or existing special operating asset in a power plant

See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Separate fixed assets under construction /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant-minitoc/separate-fixed-assets-under-construction page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Separate fixed assets under construction In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Separate fixed assets under construction** The area is manually activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the Tax Administration.

This is a registration that is made in order to get the tax value included in the calculation of temporary differences. There is a separate menu item for this. Value 01.01. is not used for anything other than information. They are included in the calculation of the tax value of temporary differences per 01.01., but values ​​here are normally already overridden when transferring to the new year. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Balance depreciations etc. in power plants and fixed asset register /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant-minitoc/balance-depreciation-in-power-plants page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Balance depreciations etc. in power plants and fixed asset register In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Balance depreciations etc. in power plants**. The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the Tax Administration.

#### Balance depreciation Balance depreciation : Balance depreciation, ordinary straight-line depreciation and non-depreciable tax fixed assets all have power plant information for fixed assets belonging to power plants. : Each depreciation object (e.g. a balance in balance depreciation) has a tick for the fact that it applies to hydropower plants, where you can tick this off. If this object concerns hydropower plants, there is also information about: : - Investment directly expensed in ground rent taxation : If you have investments that are both directly expensed and that are depreciated in the ordinary course of basic income taxation, you must divide them into two different balances. This also applies to cumulative balances, e.g. balance group d. : - Power plant : Here you choose which power station the object belongs to. If you have several power plants, you must have a balance for each of the power plants, also on aggregate balances such as e.g. balance group d. : - Is a fixed asset under construction (Choice Yes/No, where No is the default value) : - Calculated fields that are calculated by the Norwegian Tax Agency and read into the depreciation object: - This year\'s exempt income - Present value of future replacement costs Consumer price index-adjusted investment cost - Consumer price index-adjusted investment cost - Remaining life - Part of the year\'s investment cost that is directly expensed in ground rent income (registered). Balance depreciation etc. in power companies : There is a separate menu with an overview of all balance depreciation in the company, where you can see the special power plant fields. In this screen, you can filter on power plants and on basic interest treatment. : In this menu, you can export the existing balance depreciation, make adjustments to these in Excel, and import data back. You can choose to import everything, or only import data that applies to the specific power plant fields. : It is also possible to import data from Excel without performing an export first. In such cases, a template is used for import which is displayed for download when the import function is selected. #### Fixed asset register Separate operating assets in power companies acquired in previous years : Fixed assets that are of the type special fixed asset in power companies do not have an indication/link to fixed asset if it was acquired in previous years. : Access from previous years must be registered in the fixed asset register without reference to which specific fixed asset this belongs to. In order to update a special fixed asset in a power plant, you must therefore register previous years\' acquisitions in two places, both in the asset catalog and in an overview of acquisitions for a special fixed asset in a power company. : Any disposal of such a fixed asset must be registered both in the fixed assets register and in special fixed assets in power companies. Access/improvement to Separate fixed assets in power plants acquired in the current year : A special fixed asset in a power plant consists of a main fixed asset and one or more acquisitions of these. The fixed asset register can only enter references to a main operating asset that already exists. New operating assets must therefore first be registered in an overview of special fixed assets in power plants. After this has been done, you can enter the year\'s expenses for these. : The year\'s access can, if desired, if you use the fixed asset register in Period & Year, be registered in the fixed asset register and linked to the operating asset, so that it is only registered in one place. : If an access is deleted in the fixed asset register, it will also be deleted as an acquisition in the special fixed asset in the power company. The import function in the fixed asset register : In the case of imports into the fixed asset register, there is only support for imports of acquisitions in previous financial years. When importing this year\'s acquisitions, the following applies: : - The acquisition is marked with **Accounting presentation**. - The acquisition must also be imported in the function for importing acquisitions for special fixed assets in power companies. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Import of hydroelectric plant /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant-minitoc/import-power-plant page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Import of hydroelectric plant #### Import Here is an overview of import functions that exist, and which are important for hydroelectric plants: Fixed asset register : In the case of imports into the facilities register, there is only support for imports of acquisitions in previous financial years. When importing this year\'s acquisitions, the following applies: : The acquisition is marked with **Accounting presentation**. : The acquisition must also be imported in the function for importing acquisitions for special fixed assets in power companies. Contract income in ground rent income : There is a spreadsheet template for importing contract income, which makes it easier if you have a certain amount of these. This can be found at the individual power plant on the separate **Contract income** tab. Acquisitions of special fixed assets : There is a spreadsheet template for importing both new special fixed assets and acquisitions of existing special fixed assets in power companies. : There is an export function for this too, where export is made in the same format as import, so that you can export data, then modify data and import data again. Balance depreciation etc. in power companies : In this menu, you can export the existing balance depreciation, make adjustments to these in Excel, and import data back. You can choose to import everything, or only import data that applies to the specific power plant fields. : It is also possible to import data from Excel without performing an export first. In such cases, a template is used for import which is displayed for download when the import function is selected. Additional information /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/additional-info section 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Additional information In the menu on the left under **Additional information**, you enter information and values that are theme or industry specific. Property /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/additional-info/property page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Property Click the **Add property** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new property by selecting a type of property. If you select **Norwegian real estate** you will see a dialog where you can search by address or cadastre to find you property. Click **Add**and the property is created in a separate tab. Fill in the fields that are displayed, the system only displays relevant fields based on selection in the registration. You can delete a property by clicking the **Delete property** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an **Overview**of created properties. Calculated wealth tax values are transferred to **Information and tax - Wealth**. Use of car /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/additional-info/car-usage page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Use of car Click the **Add car** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new car. Registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically included in the tax return for businesses.

Cars are created in separate tabs. You can change the name/description of each car.

Start with filling out **Information about car usage**. The value **Balance depreciation for private use (for car not leased)l** is calculated automatically based on the values registered in **List price as new car**, **Registration year** and **Balance depreciation for private use (for car not leased)**, **Reversed car expenses for the private use of a work vehicle** is calculated automatically based on entered values. The first tab shows an overview of all created cars. On this tab you have the option to create an automatic system voucher regarding returns for private use. Calculated values and other information are transferred to relevant subjects in **Tax return- Business information.** Delete a car by clicking the **Delete car** button at the bottom of the page. See the previous [official guidelines](https://www.skatteetaten.no/globalassets/skjema/2021/rf-1125b.pdf) in the form RF-1125 Bruk av bil or [Posts, fields and subjects in new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field explanations Car number plate : Enter the car's registration number in this field. Car category : Select one of the following car categories. : - Passenger car - Electric car : - Hydrogen car : - Van (class 2) : - Truck with weight under 7500 kg : - Truck with weight 7500 kg and more - Car reg. for 9 passengers or more (special arrangement) - Bus registered for 16 passengers or more Registration year : Enter the year in which the car was first registered as new in Norway or abroad. List price as new car : Enter the main importer\'s indicative price for the car model, before any discount,, including vat and wreck discount. Extra equipment must be included (eg radio / music system, winter tires, ski box, trailer hitch, etc.). Extra equipment that has value solely for professional use is excluded. This applies to e.g. special devices intended for the transport of tools etc. Number of kilometers during this year : Enter the number of kilometers driven in total during the income year. Number of kilometers of business use during this year : Enter the number of kilometers driven in the business during the income year. Time period : Enter time periods from date to date for when you have used the car in the business. Private usage : Enter if the business vehicle has been used privately in the income year. Electronic driving record regarding driving at work : Enter whether an electronic driving record has been kept that applies to business driving in the income year. Here you answer yes or no. Operating cost exclusive leasing and deprecations : Enter operating costs in the income year. Leasing cost : Enter costs for leasing rent in the income year. Balance depreciation for private use (for car not leased) : 17% balance depreciation based on the car\'s list price at first registration is calculated based on entered information. Reversed car expenses for the private use of a work vehicle : Value is calculated automatically based on entered values. Accommodation and restaurant /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/additional-info/accomodation page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Accommodation and restaurant Accommodation and restaurants should be completed and submitted with the tax return for businesses. The information is used by the Norwegian tax authorities for statistics, analyzes etc. Click the **Add accommodation/restaurant** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new location. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The location is created in a separate tab. You can change the name/description for the accommodation/restaurant. You can delete a location by clicking the **Delete accommodation/restaurant** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created locations. The total inventory and income and withdrawal are summed up for all accommodations/restaurant. See[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Taxis and cargo transport /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/additional-info/taxi-cargo-transport page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Taxis and cargo transport Taxi and cargo transport-should be completed and submitted with the new tax return for businesses. Start by adding a permission number and industry on the overview page. Then click the **Add vehicle** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new vehicle. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The vehicle is created in a separate tab and linked to a specific permission number. You can change the name/description for the vehicle.

The registration page for taxi and cargo transport is dynamic in relation to what is registered. Fields are only displayed if they are relevant in the situation, depending on industry.

You can delete a vehicle by clicking the **Delete vehicle** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created vehicles. The total income from driving are summed up for all vehicles. See [Tax return for taxi and freight transport.](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/hjelp-til-skattemelding/drosje/) for more information. Forestry information and timber account /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/additional-info/forestry-information-timber-account page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Forestry information and timber account This year\'s revenues and costs should be completed and submitted with the tax return for businesses. Click the **Add forest and timer account** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new account. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The account is created in a separate tab. You can delete an account by clicking the **Delete forest and timer account** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created accounts. The total values are summed up for all accounts. [Skattemelding for deg som driver med skog](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/hjelp-til-skattemelding/skog/).or [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses.](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) Exemption method /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/information/additional-info/exemption-method page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Exemption method Some values from**Information - Additional information - Financial products** are transferred automatically and used as basis when calculating the basis for 3 % income below exemption method. All income and deductions for shares and financial products (dividends, returns, gains and losses) regardless of whether they are taxable, exempt from income tax or without the right to deduct must be entered under an overview of financial products. ## Limited accounting duty For companies with limited accounting obligations, income recognition of dividends etc. with 3% taxable income must be divided into two parts: • 3% income recording in own account with reference account 8072 • 97% remaining in own account with reference account 8074 Income recognition of dividends etc. which fall outside the exemption method must be accounted for in an account with reference account 8073. The accounting must correspond to what is stated under financial products for income within the exemption method.u can change a users access level to this group from user or group administration. ## Full accounting obligation Account with reference account 8071 is used for dividends etc. both within and outside the exemption method.

Calculation of 3% income of positive basis is transferred to permanent differences.

Les mer i Skatteberegning.

 Financial statement /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/financial-statement page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Financial statement **Financial statement** contains an overview of the income statement. When you click on a category in the financial statement or balance on the left side , a specification of the company's values based on reference account mappings are displayed on the right side. These fields can be overridden and it is also possible to expand to drill down on a specific account. Click on the link on the amount to open **Account analysis**. The following categories are listed: #### Income statement - Operation income - Operation expenses - Capital income - Capital expenses #### Balance - Assets - Debt and equity Approve the values in each category by clicking the change status icon in the **Done** column. Business income /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/business-income page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Business income Business income is different depending on whether the company is entered with full accounting obligations or limited accounting obligations. ## Full accounting obligation In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Financial statement** you will find the annual accounts drawn up according to the layout of the Tax Agency\'s business specification for companies with full accounting obligations, and show the accounting result as well as the accounting balance (assets, debt and equity). Accounting results are transferred to **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Business income**. Companies with participation determination do not have a calculation of deferred tax in the accounts, so that only temporary differences that affect payable tax are relevant for the company type. ## Limited accounting duty In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Financial statement** you will find the annual accounts drawn up according to the layout of the Tax Agency\'s business specification for companies with limited accounting obligations, and shows the tax result as well as the tax balance (assets, debt and equity). Equity according to the tax accounts from the Tax Agency\'s specifications is not divided into taxable and untaxed equity, but these two types of equity are combined into equity. Accounting results are transferred to **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Business income**.

Both full and limited accounting obligation

Business income can be distributed between municipalities and business types. This distribution is relevant to show that there is income from agriculture and reindeer husbandry. Municipalities can be specified but are only relevant for taxation if the income relates to municipality 2100 Svalbard.

 Participants /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/participants section 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Participants The participant function contains both content for the tax return and calculation functions for allocating various items to participants or registering the entry and exit of participants as well as transfers of ownership shares. ## Participants overview This displays an overview of company participants with the distribution of ownership shares at the beginning and end of the year, as well as the distributed share of profits. By clicking on a participant, you will navigate to the participant\'s card. Participant tasks are available as a downloadable zip file in the menu at the lower left corner. The participant tasks are intended to be sent to each company participant. Participants are created by pressing the add button in the upper right corner. When creating a new participant, it is usually sufficient to enter data under **Participants** -- **Participant\'s name** - **Information**, while other details will be derived from various functions with the distribution of amounts among participants. When manually creating a client for an existing company (creating a new client) that is not imported from Altinn, registration of other information transferred from previous years must, of course, also be recorded.\" ## Participant - Participant\'s name - Information This tab provides key information about the company participant. ## Participant - Participant\'s name - Distribution This tab provides an overview of distributions. These are recorded as a distribution of accounted dividends in the Distributions etc. function in the left menu. ## Participant - Participant\'s name - Additional income This tab is only visible for individual participants. This tab displays: • Calculation of the protection basis at the end of the year for individual participants. • Calculation and updating of protection deduction for individual participants. • Calculation of additions to income for individual participants. Normally, registration of values ​​here only applies to: • Unused shielding from previous years (if this must be changed) • Transferred shielding deduction from previous years from/to another company with participant fixing Other values ​​are transferred from other functions in the program. ## Participant - Participant\'s name - Cost price / equity account This tab shows the status and movement of: • Input value • Capital paid in for tax purposes • Equity for tax purposes • Accounting equity (only for those with full accounting obligations) This tab summarizes values ​​from other parts of the program, but can also be overridden if necessary. **Transferred from the previous income year** corresponds to the former RF-1233 pot 600 and are editable fields that show last year\'s values ​​from the line **Transferred to the next income year**. **Acquisition of share during the year** and the row **Realization of share during the year** show values ​​transferred from the **Transactions** function in the left menu. **Deposits in the year** and **Repayment of paid-in capital** show values ​​transferred from the function **Changes in sec. Paid-in capital**l in the left menu. **Distribution for the year** shows values ​​transferred from the function **Distributions etc**. in the left menu. This year\'s distribution is also shown on the tab **Distribution** to the owner. **Improper contributions** consists of the tax disadvantage for the owner in cases where the year\'s distributions do not cover the calculated tax on the participant\'s share of the company\'s profit. The supplement is given because the taxpayer must use other funds outside the company to pay tax on the company\'s profits. Calculation of the amount is shown on the separate card **Distribution** to the owner. **Tax benefit of loss** consists of the tax benefit of loss in the participant\'s share of the year\'s tax loss and is also shown on the separate card **Distribution** to the owner. The tax rules for companies with participant determination mean that this tax advantage must be deducted from the taxpayer\'s input value and share of paid-in equity, as the deficit adds liquidity to the participant by reducing payable tax on income outside this company. **The year\'s tax result** is the participant\'s share of profit, as shown under the left-hand menu **Owners shares and profit shares** multiplied by the tax result as shown under **Business income.** **Tax-free income** and **non-deductible costs** is the participant\'s share of the amounts shown under the left-hand menu **Tax-free income and non-deductible costs**. The participant\'s share is the profit share as shown under the left-hand menu **Ownership shares and profit shares.** **Other correction** in column **Entry value** and column **Paid EK** applies to amounts from account with reference account 2015 / 8915 Other change in paid-in capital that is distributed between the participants in the left menu **Changes in sec. Paid-in capital**. **Other correction** under column **Earned equity** basically shows amounts from account with reference account 2058 / 2059 / 8958 / 8959 other changes in equity. However, the post office will also correct calculations for all owners to ensure that the item **Total EK** (Total tax equity) of all owners amounts to the sum of tax equity. If there is a discrepancy between tax equity in the tax accounts and the amount of all owners in total tax equity per 31.12. the difference will be distributed between the owners according to their share of ownership on 31.12. so that distributed equity amounts to the same amount as actual tax equity. The amount of total taxable equity will be calculated as total taxed equity in the accounts (code 2000, 2050 and 2080). For companies with full accounting obligations, the sum of temporary differences per 31.12. is deducted to arrive at tax equity. The column **Accounting equity** constitutes the participant\'s tax equity corrected for the share of temporary differences per 01.01. / 31.12. ## Participant - Participant\'s name - Acquisition/realization This tab contains an overview of transactions for the individual participant based on the transactions registered in the left-hand menu **Transactions**. ## Participant - Participant\'s name - Over/under price This tab only applies to impersonal taxpayers (identified by the organization number and not the participant\'s social security number). The function calculates the over- and under-price paid for transfers and also tries to distribute this in the case of partial disposal of ownership shares. The amounts can be overridden if necessary. ## Participant - Participant\'s name - Wealth and income Asset and income items from other registrations and calculations are summarized here. Some data are registration fields for records with no other functions associated with them. Feel free to press Show all to see all applicable fields for the taxpayer. See the [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Transactions /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/participants/transactions page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Transactions The various transactions for access and departure are recorded here. Access can be a foundation or companion admission, but also transfer between the participants. Departure can be exit from the company, dissolution or sale of share. Select share type when creating a transaction, which is done by pressing the plus button in the top right corner. Please note that the transfer of equity comes as a consequence of the calculations. For participants who sell everything in one transaction, all equity will be transferred from the seller to the buyer. For several sales in the same month to several other participants where the entire shareholding is sold, the amounts will be distributed between the transactions according to shareholding. If there is a partial sale or several sales over longer periods than the same calendar month, the calculation and distribution of transferred equity becomes more complex. Ownership parts and profit parts /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/participants/ownership-parts-profit-parts page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Ownership parts and profit parts This function summarizes ownership shares and profit shares month by month for each owner, with redistribution of ownership shares upon admission of a partner or exit from the company. The result is distributed over the months of the year and distributed to the owners who, at the end of the month, own the ownership share in line with the tax rules for this. The month\'s profit share is distributed between the owners who own shares at the end of the month. Profit shares can be overridden in cases where there are agreements that provide a different distribution of profits than the share of ownership dictates, and this is not distributed between the owners as remuneration for work via the function for remuneration for work. Work compensation (Salary to owner) /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/participants/work-compensation page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Work compensation (Salary to owner) Work remuneration is of three types, which are controlled by the accounting account for work remuneration before one of these three reference accounts: - 5600 Work allowance other industry - 5601 Work allowance from fishing / lottery to participant - 5602 Work allowance from family nursery school in own home Distribution of work allowance must be made separately for each of the types stated above. Distribution of work allowance between the participants can be done in one of two ways: 1\. Cost account linked to participant 2\. Manual distribution Distributed work allowance is shown on the **Wealth and income** tab for the individual participant. It is possible to register the desired work allowance on the individual account to get an automatic redistribution of work allowance from the cash withdrawal under the left-hand menu item **Distributions etc**. Please note that when making a change, you must make sure to change the amount during distributions after the work allowance has possibly been changed in the menu. Private withdrawals and equity deposits /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/participants/distributions page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Private withdrawals and equity deposits The function has distribution of distributions between the participants for each type of distribution. The reference account of the accounting account for distribution determines which type this is classified as. The distribution function gives you the opportunity to distribute the distributions manually between the participants, and has tool buttons that allow you to easily distribute the distributions according to ownership per share. 01.01. or per 31.12. Changes in taxable paid-in capital /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/participants/change-paid-capital page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Changes in taxable paid-in capital The function has the distribution of payments from the participants and payments to the participants for each type based on reference account to accounting account for receipts and payments of tax-related paid-in capital. The reference account of the accounting account for distribution determines which type this is classified as. The reference accounts that apply to this function are account 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014 and 2015. The distribution function gives you the opportunity to distribute payments and payouts manually between the participants, and has tool buttons that allow you to easily distribute the amounts according to ownership per share. 01.01. or per 31.12. The accounting account balance debit or credit is shown as a sign, so that payments are shown with a negative sign, and must be shown with a negative sign for correct distribution. Participants wealth /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/participants/wealth page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Participants wealth This is an overview that shows the distribution of wealth between the participants and also the uneven distribution of wealth between the participants. Unequal distribution means that a participant has higher or lower equity than the equity resulting from the participant\'s share. Equity /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/participants/equity page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Equity This is an overview of equity per 1.1. and 31.12. with movements in the year. This is displayed with one line per participant and is a summary of the table of **Participant - Participant\'s name - Entry value/EC**. For companies with full accounting obligations, you can choose whether you want to see accounting or tax equity in the overview. Wealth /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/wealth page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Wealth When you click on **Wealth**, the specification of the company\'s wealth is displayed. The values are retrieved from different areas in the system. This view displays a specification of the company\'s taxable wealth and deductible debt for transfer to the Tax Message. The specification contains balance items with accounting value. Each balance item in the specification detail row has a calculation type which for example shows the source of the value or if the value should be registered directly into the Tax message. This view displays a specification of the company\'s Taxable wealth and deductible debt for transfer to Tax Message. All listed values from **Taxable wealth and deductible debt** are transferred to relevant subjects in the Tax message. Checks /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/checks section 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Checks If an error situation occurs this will be visualized with an informative icon on the **Checks** menu and on the left side for the section with errors. Period & Year uses the validation service of The Norwegian Tax Administration to validate information to be submitted to Altinn in connection with the new tax return. Validation of information takes place continuously in Period & Year. To access the validation service, you must be logged in with your social security number via the ID port. The following icon can be displayed: ![](./img/16_Information.png) - used to inform you, for example if you are currently not logged in to Altinn. ![](./img/16_Warning.png) - Indicates tips that are of relevance to the data you submit. The Tax return can be submitted even if this icon is displayed. ![](./img/16_Error.png) - Indicates that there is invalid information. At least one of the check results prevents you from submitting your information. Business information /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/checks/business-specification page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Business information When you click on **Business Information** on the left, any calculation deviations from the validation service to The Norwegian Tax Administration are displayed. Company tax return /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/checks/tax-return page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Company tax return When you click on **Company tax return** on the left side, a login button or received validation messages from Altinn will be displayed. Internal control /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/checks/internal-control page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Internal control These are checks carried out by Period & Year. If you receive an error result during internal control, this will indicate that you will not be able to send information to The Norwegian Tax Administration for control. This must be corrected in order to have data checked against the The Norwegian Tax Administration. Reconciliation of fixed assets /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/checks/reconciliation-fixed-assets page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Reconciliation of fixed assets When you click on **Reconciliation of fixed assets** on the left side, a reconciliation model of the company\'s fixed assets is displayed on the right side. The model lists a **Specification of estimated change of temporary differences**. This includes entries from the company\'s depreciations, accounting profit/loss, profit/loss not entered in the profit/loss account, profit/loss entered in the profit/loss account and the difference between accounting and taxable cost. Estimated change in temporary differences according to specification is reconciled with RF-1217 item 3, column III Change in temporary differences. Under **Depreciations**the model lists the following entries: - Accounting depreciations - Hereof depreciation on financial leasing - Impairment of fixed assets - Taxable depreciations - Taxable linear depreciations - Taxable depreciations power plant Under **Accounting profit/loss** the model lists the following entries: - Accounting profit on sales - Accounting loss on sales Under **Profit/losses not entered in the profit-/loss account** the model lists the following entries: - Sales amount directly entered as income in the year of realization, cf. The Tax Act § 14-44 - Profit on non-depreciable fixed assets - Profit on linear depreciable fixed assets - Loss on non-depreciable fixed assets - Loss on linear depreciable fixed assets Under **Profit/losses entered in the profit-/loss account** the model lists the following entries: - Profit on non-depreciable fixed assets - Profit on depreciable fixed assets - Negative balance goodwill - Loss on non-depreciable fixed assets - Loss on depreciable fixed assets Under **Difference between accounting - and taxable cost** the model lists the following entries: - Tax-free investment subsidy - Input VAT adjustment - Reduction for adjustment of input VAT on sale - Diff. between the booked amount and the fair value at the time of the merger/demerger - Diff. tax values ​​and booked/fair value on conversion to limited company - Deduction for tax-free profit on transfer of assets to companies in the same group. - Addition for diff. between tax entry value and remuneration transferred from companies in the same group. - Activated fixed assets to be expensed for tax purposes Reconciliation of equity (personal) /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/checks/reconciliation-equity page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Reconciliation of equity (personal) When you click on**Reconciliation of equity** on the left side, a reconciliation model of the company\'s equity is displayed on the right side. The model lists an **Estimated equity 31.12. according to specification**. It specifies the change in equity between 1.1 and 31.12. If you have accounting obligation type 2 (accountable taxpayers), information from the reconciliation of equity will be submitted to The Norwegian Tax Administration. Salary and pension costs /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-2/checks/salary-pension-costs page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Salary and pension costs Reconciliation of salary and pension costs was in the old tax return attached in tax form RF-1022. In the new tax return and business specification, this reconciliation has been removed. When you click on**Salary and pension costs** on the left side, a separate section for the reconciliation of salary and pension costs is displayed on the right side. The data calculated here and possibly also recorded will be shown on the Wage and pension costs report in **Reports - Other year-end documents**. The accounts included in the reconciliation are the same as previously presented in form RF-1022 Salary and pension costs. It is also possible to add separate lines in the various sections of the reconciliation. It is not possible to remove accounts directly from the list, but the accounts are included based on the reference account properties. Accounts that are mistakenly included in the reconciliation are then included due to the wrong reference account, and the reference account property of accounts shown on the screen can be changed directly from the screen. If accounts that should have been included in the reconciliation are not included, you must find the account accordingly and change the account\'s reference account property. Please see the [Tax Directorate\'s notices 4/2022](https://www.skatteetaten.no/rettskilder/type/skattedirektoratets-meldinger/revisors-plikter-i-forbindelse-med-signering-av-signaturpliktige-opplysninger-i-naringsspesifikasjon-og-skattemelding/) for more information. Limited accounting obligation (type 5) /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5 section 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Limited accounting obligation (type 5) Partnership companies (SDF) that do not have an annual accounting obligation according to § 1-2 of the Accounting Act, choose "Limited accounting obligation (type 5)", which corresponds to previous business statement 5. These report profit and loss accounts and balance sheets based on tax principles. Read more about the [Tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/) at The Norwegian Tax Administration. Information /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information section 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Information In **Information and tax - Information** you can register information about the company and add values for tax calculation. This is also where you enter additional information that is thematic or industry specific. This information is automatically transferred to relevant subjects in the tax return for businesses. Company /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/company section 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Company In the left menu below **Company** you register/update **Client information**, **Accounting office** and **Auditor**. This information is automatically transferred to relevant subjects in the tax return for businesses. Company information /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/company/company-info page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Company information In **Company information**, some fields are populated automatically based on information that appears under **Settings - Company information**. Some company information can also be imported from the [Brønnøysund Register Centre](https://brreg.no/). Registered company information on the clients corporate identity number will be fetched.

When you start the year-end period for the first time, the import from the Brønnøysund Register Centre will be performed automatically.

To import data, simply click the button **Import from BrReg.no** at the bottom of the page in **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information**. Fill in the other fields under **Client information** manually. NOKUS (Norwegian-controlled foreign company) /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/company/nokus page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # NOKUS (Norwegian-controlled foreign company) The NOKUS rules stipulate that Norwegian participants in Norwegian-controlled companies and entities resident in low-tax countries shall be taxed for a proportional share of the company\'s/entity\'s profit/loss regardless of whether dividends are actually paid out, see Section 2-4 of the Tax Act, cf. Section 10-60 to Section 10-68. The main purpose of the NOKUS rules is to equalize the tax treatment of Norwegian taxpayers who invest in Norway with those who invest in companies in low-tax countries (capital export neutrality).

Setting up clients

The Norwegian-controlled companies and entities are essentially impersonal companies but are taxed in Norway as companies with participant taxation (SDF). Therefore, the client is created by selecting the company category "Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)" and then choosing the enterprise type "NOKUS - Norwegian-controlled foreign company."

#### Participants in a NOKUS Participants in a NOKUS company can fall into three categories: - Impersonal participant taxed under ordinary rules, e.g., a limited company - Personal participant - Impersonal participant taxed under the special shipping company rules in Section 8-10 of the Tax Act #### Setting up participants by tax form Participants are created in the menu **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Participants** and selecting the **Participants** menu item in the left margin. A personal participant is specified by registering the participant\'s personal identification number in the \"Personal identification number\" field. An impersonal participant is specified by registering the participant\'s organization number in the \"organization number\" field. If a participant is taxed under the special shipping rules in Section 8-10 of the Tax Act, this must be indicated in the menu **Year-end - Information and tax - Various information** that the company is engaged in shipping activities. #### Interest limitation for NOKUS companies The three categories of participants have different income calculations. For this reason, there is also interest limitation with calculations depending on the category: - Impersonal participant taxed under ordinary rules - Personal participant - Impersonal participant taxed under the shipping company rules in Section 8-10 of the Tax Act Each of the three categories has its own calculations, where some parts of the numerical material, such as interest, related parties, etc., are the same in all three categories, while other parts differ for those parts of the interest limitation that are affected by differences in income in the income year or previous income years. #### Shipping company taxation Data in shipping company taxation must be registered for the relevant parts of the data, including financial income and financial expenses, which are taxed at the individual participant level.

Accounts that cannot be used for NOKUS companies

There is no support for NOKUS companies to submit a business specification with accounts referred to by any of the following account codes in the business specification:

  • 3000 Sales revenue and withdrawals, taxable

  • 5600 Work compensation to owners in ANS etc.

  • 6100 Freight and transport costs related to sales

  • 7099 Private use of a business vehicle

  • 8030 Interest income from companies in the same group

  • 8130 Interest expenses to companies in the same group

If you have an account with a balance, which is mapped to one of the above items, a validation message will appear under "Checks - Internal control indicating that one of these account codes has been used. If such a message appears, go to Year-end - Information and tax - Financial statement and find the code being warned about, and change the reference account to an account not referred to by one of these lines. For example, if account number 3000 is used, this account will get reference account 3000, which is linked to code 3000 in the business specification. Use, for instance, reference account 3100 for this account, and the problem is solved. The same applies to the other codes that give warnings.

#### Participant information The participant information does not correspond to the participant information in a regular SDF but contains information relevant to NOKUS taxation, varying somewhat depending on the three categories of participants: impersonal, personal, and participants subject to shipping company taxation. There are different tabs with information for each of the participants. If withholding tax on interest, royalties, etc., is paid, this is registered in a separate menu and allocated to the participants. #### Wealth Wealth is registered under the menu item \"Year-end - Information and tax - Wealth.\" Wealth can be registered with the following three mutually exclusive alternatives: - The market value of listed shares at the end of the income year - Net wealth from the previous income year - Estimated sales value at the end of the income year This value should be the total value for the entire company and should also include shares or units owned by others who are not taxable in Norway. If something other than the market value of listed shares is chosen, information on the calculation of wealth at the end of the income year for use in the next year\'s wealth determination will also be displayed. This calculation corresponds with the wealth calculation for a limited company to determine the share value for unlisted shares owned by a Norwegian limited company. #### Validation of information As with other taxpayers, there will be continuous validation of information for the client in Period & Year. #### Business specification The business specification is identical to other companies. It is necessary to perform currency conversion of the financial statement figures before these are registered in Period & Year, as Period & Year does not support internal conversion of balance figures from financial statements, etc.

Financial data as input

It is necessary to Import accounting data by registering balance figures at the account level in an Excel file for import. Importing balance figures from Excel is done by having line 1 contain headers and the remaining lines contain data.

Column A:

  • Header = Account

  • Content = Account number, normally 4 digits

Column B:

  • Header = Account name

  • Content = Account name as text

Column C:

  • Header = Financial year as an integer, e.g., 2023

  • Content = Balance figures with 0 to 2 decimal places

#### Tax return The tax return is the same as for other SDFs, but with certain fields specific to NOKUS companies. #### Participant reports In the menu **Year-end - Information and tax - Participants**, there is a function button to download participant reports in PDF format to send to the company\'s participants. #### Participants\' tax returns After submitting the company return to the Tax Administration, it may happen that the reports are made available as pre-filled information that can be downloaded by the individual participant in Period & Year. The reports are found in the same registration screens as for participants in SDFs in general. Foreign businesses assessed as partnerships (USDF) /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/company/foreign-businesses-assessed-partnerships page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Foreign businesses assessed as partnerships (USDF) The company is set up as an ordinary company with participant determination (SDF) where you indicate the closest form of liability, which will either be ANS, DA, KS or internal company. To indicate that the company is a USDF, this must be ticked under **Information and tax - Information - Client information**. Information on legal form (company form) and whether supporting material can be submitted is also given here. When it comes to registering participants, this is done under **Information and tax - Participants** and select **Participants** in the left-hand menu. Here, participants who are liable to pay tax in Norway register by entering either their social security number or company number and filling in other information. It is recommended to fill in the participants so that the total participants add up to 100%. This is done by creating a participant without tax liability who owns the remaining share owned by foreign participants without tax liability to Norway. This is done by creating an additional participant, where you do not enter either a social security number or an organization number, but indicate the participant as not liable to tax in Norway. This participant must technically contain the company share that is not owned by a person or company that is liable to tax in Norway.

When it is stated that the participant is not liable to tax in Norway, no information about this will be filled in the tax return, but validation messages are avoided in the internal validations such as, for example, that the ownership share is not stated as 100%, etc.

The company registration is submitted in the usual way as for Norwegian SDF. Annual report is not available for this form of company. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Basis values /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/basis-values section 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Basis values In the left menu under **Basis values**, you register values to calculate tax values. Goods /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/basis-values/goods page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Goods The **Overview** tab shows accounting values and tax values of goods this year and last year. The accounting value is displayed at the client account level and is summed per inventory group and in total. Tax values displayed here are the result of entries on the **Calculated taxable value** tab. Click **Show All** to see all associated client accounts with zero values. In the **Calculated taxable value** tab, you calculate the tax value of goods. Adjust accounting value for dead stock and other adjustments to get tax value. Last year\'s tax value is entered manually the first year, and is populated automatically later years. Tax value is automatically transferred to relevant subjects and to **Changes in temporary differences**. Click **Show all** to see all inventory groups with associated client accounts with zero values. See [Items, fields and subjects in new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Accounts receivable /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/basis-values/account-receivables page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Accounts receivable ## Account-receivables (participant taxed) The **Overview** tab shows accounting value and tax value of accounts receivable this year and last year. Accounting value is displayed at client account level. The tax value displayed here is a result of entries on the **Calculated taxable value** tab. Click **Show all** to see all associated client accounts with zero values. On the **Calculated taxable value** tab, you calculate the tax value of accounts receivable. The system calculates tax write-down for the **Calculate based on formula** option. Nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced trade debtors, confirmed losses on trade debtors, and sales revenue are automatically populated. If the amount in **Sales revenue** has both credit sales and cash sales, fill in the relevant amount for cash sales in the fields **Of which cash**. This because cash sales shall not be included in the calculation of tax write-downs of nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced trade debtors. You can see which client accounts are part of an automatically populated field by hovering over a value field and clicking on the symbol that appears. Select **Show accounts**. In the same menu you can also select **Override amount**. Last year\'s values ​​are entered manually the first year, and are populated automatically later years when you select **Copy year-end data from previous year** under **Maintenance - Import data**. If the company is newly established, a 2% tax write-down of nominal value of trade debtors and not invoiced trade debtors may be required, at the end of the establishment year and the following two income years. Select the option **Use 2% write-down (newly established business)**, and the system automatically calculates tax value based on this choice. Values ​​from the **Calculated taxable value** tab are automatically transferred to **Changes in temporary differences**.

For businesses with limited accounting obligations, the accounting value will be equal to the tax value, so that a system posting will thus be created that adjusts the accounting write-down of trade receivables to be the same value as the calculated tax value of trade receivables.

 Tax related depreciations /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/basis-values/tax-related-depreciations page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Tax related depreciations Tax-related deprecations should be completed and submitted with the company tax return.

The registration page for balance depreciation is dynamic in relation to what is registered. Fields are only displayed if they are relevant in the situation, depending on registration in other fields.

For example, fields for transfer to profit and loss account will only appear in cases where they are relevant, e.g. if the realization date is set for balance group e, or if balance group b has a negative value in the depreciation basis, while balance groups a, c, d and j according to the tax rules never have a transfer to profit and loss account, and therefore will never show fields for transfer of profit or loss to profit and loss account.

Follow the instructions below to calculate tax depreciation. 1. Click **Add entry**, the symbol at the top right to create new depreciations. 2. Select type of entry: **Reducing balance depreciation**, **Non-depreciable** or **Linear depreciation**. An entry is created in a separate tab. 3. Fill in relevant fields. You can delete an entry by pressing the **Delete \...**button at the bottom of each tab. The first tab shows an overview of created depreciations grouped by type of depreciation and a summation of all tax-related depreciations. Tax related depreciations is automatically transferred to **Temporary differences**.

For companies with limited accounting obligations, there will be automatic postings of transfers to and from negative balances, profit and loss accounts, as well as income of negative balances/the year's sales and deductions of depreciation. For companies with full accounting obligations, positive and negative values ​​are transferred to temporary differences between accounting and tax values.

See [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field explanations ## Balance depreciation Id : A numeric id is suggested when you create a new taxable depreciation. Asset group : Select the asset group to which the fixed asset belongs. Balance basis per 01.01 : Enter a positive or negative balance from 31.12 last year. Calculated impaired value of discontinued assets : If the balance must be reduced by the impaired value of an asset. Enter the calculated value here. Cost price - new acquisitions : Enter the cost price for operating assets acquired during the income year. Fixed assets must be entered here if it is assumed to have a useful life of at least 3 years and the cost price of the fixed asset is NOK 15,000 (including VAT if there is no right to deduct) or higher. For buildings acquired during the income year, the cost price shall be divided between the building balance and the balance j for fixed technical installations. Cost price - improvements : Enter costs on existing or newly acquired fixed assets in their entirety. Maintenance can be expensed directly. If you choose to activate higher maintenance costs, further information must be provided. In the case of expenses on buildings acquired during the income year, the cost price shall be divided between the building balance j for fixed, technical installations. Government grants etc : Enter public subsidies, with the exception of investment subsidies to the districts in accordance with regulations issued by the King, to be written down on the cost price. Adjustment of input VAT : Enter any change in cost price as a result of an adjustment of input VAT in accordance with the VAT Act. Remuneration (sales value on withdrawal) : Upon realization and withdrawal of fixed assets in group a, b, c, d or j, it is possible to write-down the whole value or parts of the value on the balance in the relevant group instead of the income recognition. Return of investment grants to districts : Return of investment grants to districts is calculated automatically based on registered values. The value can be overridden. Recognized direct revenue this year : Enter the part of the consideration etc. (by withdrawal the turnover value) which is entered directly to income in the realization year according to the Tax Act § 14-44 (1) and which thus shall not affect the basis for the year\'s balance depreciation, income recognition or transfer to profit and loss account. Basis for the year\'s balance depreciation, etc. : Here is the basis for this year\'s depreciation. The value is calculated based on registered values. Depreciation this year (including start depreciation) : This year\'s balance depreciation is calculated here. Remaining positive balance below NOK 15,000 will be deducted in full. The calculated value can be overridden. Income this year of negative balance : Negative balance recognized as income in balance groups a, c, d or j with at least the group\'s depreciation rate. The value is calculated based on registered values. The remaining negative balance below NOK 15,000 will be recognized as income in full. The calculated value can be overridden. Basis balance transferred to next year : The remaining positive balance as of 31.12. this year. which will be transferred to balance basis 1.1 next year. The same applies to the remaining negative balance in groups a, c, d and j. The value is calculated based on registered values. Fixed asset grants after regulations from government : Enter any grants for investment in the districts. Interest limitation rules /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/basis-values/interest page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Interest limitation rules In **Year-end closing - Information on tax - Information - Basic values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Interest limitation.** The area is automatically available if the company has net interest costs in the balance over NOK 5,000,000.00. The area can also be added manually from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the tax authorities for the calculation loop to work.

The work area replaces the former RF-1315 and RF-1509. With regard to Exemption rule RF-1509, the area is expanded by ticking yes for: **Does the company make use of an exception rule at either company level or national level (including domestic group)?** The area consists of both manual fields and pre-calculated fields from the accounts and from calculated values from skatteetaten. #### The following fields are taken from the balance sheet/accounts - Total interest costs (e.g. Interest on fixed tax) - Total interest income (e.g. Interest on fixed tax) - Income/loss before deduction for any provided group contribution - Provided group group contribution to deductions in ordinary income - Calculated other income (shipping company) #### The following fields are calculated/received from skatteetaten Calculation of total net interest expenses : - Net interest expenses : - Total interest expenses including guarantee expenses to related parties, and total interest income from related parties : - Total net interest expenses to related parties : - Net interest expenses to companies etc. in the group : - Net interest expenses to other related parties (outside the group) Calculation basis for interest deduction limit : - Addition for tax depreciation : - Directly recorded income for depreciated assets : - Calculation basis for interest deduction limit This year\'s addition or deduction in income : - Net interest expenses - Net interest expenses : - Difference between this year\'s interest expenses and interest deduction limit - Reversed addition to income (only for companies in the group) - Addition to income for companies etc. in the group that have their deduction for interest to other related parties cut off - This year\'s addition to income. Total reductions of this year\'s interest expenses - Net interest expenses - Adjustment of income Carryforward of interest deduction from this year : - Addition to income - Carried forward from previous years - Deduction from income - Adjustment for companies with participant taxation or non-resident companies with losses - Carryforward of disallowed interest deduction Proportion of this year\'s interest expenses that the company can carry forward : - For deduction this year - Remaining for carryforward Information about chosen exemption rule, Norwegian part of the group, and domestic group : - Equity ratio in the consolidated financial statements as a percentage. Information about company accounts / consolidated balance sheet for the Norwegian part of the group and calculation of equity ratio : - Adjusted equity in the company or Norwegian part of the group (specified below) - Adjusted total assets in the company or Norwegian part of the group (specified below) - Equity ratio for the company or Norwegian part of the group Specification of adjustments to the accounting principles of the consolidated financial statements : - Total change in equity / total change in total assets - Effect on equity - Effect on total assets Adjustment of company accounts / consolidated balance sheet for the Norwegian part of the group : - Overall increase in equity - Overall decrease in equity - Overall increase in total assets - Overall decrease in total assets **Carryforward of cut off interest deduction:** Tax value for previous years\' cut off deduction and tax value for the remaining deduction to be carried forward this year are automatically transferred to **Tax Calculation/Temporary Differences/Deferred Tax Differences, Deferred Tax.**

Incorrect completion in work area:

If the user by mistake has activated the workspace and filled in data but want to close it, some actions must be taken. All data the user has entered manually must be removed/deleted.

If the area contains registered ​​or overwritten values, the area will be locked and data may be kept on the preview of the tax return. Remove all manually recorded data and close the workspace from the area selector.

See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Hydroelectric plants /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant-minitoc section 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Hydroelectric plants In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Hydroelectric plant.** The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.** On clients imported in 2023 from Altinn, Finale Årsoppgjør or Total Årsoppgjør, activation will be done automatically if there is a power plant in tax form RF-1151.

Import from Altinn, Finale Årsoppgjør or Total Årsoppgjør for the income year 2022

For the income year 2023, imports of historical data for income year 2022 can be made from either Altinn, Finale Årsoppgjør or Total Årsoppgjør.

Please note that imports will not be able to specify the correct type of fixed asset for special fixed assets in power plants, but use the lifetime (67 years / 40 years) to select a type that has the same lifetime (power station (67 years) or mechanical equipment (40 years) This must be changed manually to the correct type. This is done by registering the change directly on the individual fixed asset.

The area consists of the following registration pages that have conditions that specially apply to hydroelectric plants: - Hydroelectric plant - Separate fixed assets in power plants - Acquisitions of separate fixed assets - Separate fixed assets under construction - Taxable depreciations in power plants

Note that these area requires logging in with an active connection to the tax authorities.

#### Reference account codes specifically for power companies Here is a list of account codes that are specific to power companies - 1117 Electrotechnical equipment in power companies (balance group g) - 1118 Separate fixed assets in power plants under construction - 1119 Separate fixed assets in power plants - 1218 Separate fixed assets in power plants under construction - 1219 Separate fixed assets in power plants - 1577 Natural resource tax brought forward - 2501 Payable natural resource tax, not offset - 2502 Land rent tax payable, not offset - 8301 Natural resource tax - 8302 Basic interest tax #### Tax calculation The tax calculation function contains a separate card **Payable tax for hydroelectric power plants**. This function retrieves values ​​from tax calculations carried out by the Tax Administration, which are shown on the separate card **Tax calculation from the Skatteetaten**. At the bottom of this tab, accounting for tax expense is shown, where accounts entered show the desired tax amount, and automatic postings will adjust the account balance to match the amounts entered.

It is possible to override which tax cost is to be posted, so that you can have the tax cost that you have calculated posted in cases where the annual accounts have already been submitted.

 Hydroelectric plant /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant-minitoc/hydroelectric-plant page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Hydroelectric plant In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Hydroelectric plant.** The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.** The power plant overview contains a summary of calculated values ​​from the property tax base, natural resource tax and ground rent income before and after coordination with other group companies. #### Coordination of ground rent income in the group The power plant overview contains registration of coordination with other companies in the group, and values ​​registered have an effect on the final coordinated ground rent income. #### Hydroelectric plant This menu item contains a list of hydroelectric plants, and these are created by clicking on the plus icon in the upper right. Two different types of hydropower plants can be created here: - With rent income (10,000+ kVA) - Without rent income (\< 10,000 kVA) Hydropower plants without ground rent income : These power plants may have associated special operating assets in power plants. : Other tax-related depreciation can also be linked to the hydropower plant, and will be included as part of the property tax basis and the asset calculation for the power plant. Balance depreciation in balance groups a, c, d and g will be included as asset value of the power plant if they are linked to a power plant, and will otherwise be included as assets from the balance groups, as in other companies if they are not linked to a power plant. : The property tax base and asset value are calculated from the tax-depreciated value of the special operating assets in the power plant. Hydroelectric plant with ground rent income : These are power plants that calculate ground rent income and natural resource tax. Property tax base and asset values ​​are calculated according to the special rules for the present value of calculated future cash flows according to the rules in the Tax Act. Calculation of values for power companies : Calculations of these values are made technically by submitting values ​​to the Tax Administrations calculation functions, and making use of the Tax Administrations calculations of all the different calculated fields for power companies. This also requires that you log in to the Tax Administration functions within the program to identify yourself. #### Ground rent income Ground rent income is on a separate tab in **Ground rent income** at the individual hydroelectric plant. Specification of gross rent income : Total annual production is recorded under the power plant information. Other data is recorded on a separate tab **Ground rent income** with the exception of power delivered in accordance with contract and profit from the realization of special fixed assets used in power production. Contract income : Power delivered according to contract is registered on separate tab **Contract revenue** at the individual power plant. Contract income is an overview per contract, and here it is possible to import data from Excel. :

Import from Excel

The import button can be found at the top right, to the left of the plus button for creating a new power plant. By pressing the import button, a dialog appears where you can download an Excel template for this import function. It is necessary to use this Excel template to import data.

When importing, there are two choices:

(1) Add imported data to the existing content and (2) Delete existing data and replace it with imported data.

Profit from the realization of special fixed assets used in power production : Amounts are calculated automatically by the Tax Administration on the basis of data on special operating assets in power plants. Specification of deductions in ground rent income : Deductions in ground rent income consist of both data that is registered and data that is calculated by the Tax Administration on the basis of other data from the client\'s business specification and tax return. Some calculations are commented on below. Tax-related depreciation of fixed assets used in power production : These are depreciation both on special operating assets in power plants and other tax-related depreciation (balance depreciation and linear depreciation otherwise). These are depreciations on the elements that are not directly deducted from the ground rent income at the time of investment. Loss on realization of a special fixed asset used in power production : Amounts are calculated automatically by the Tax Administration on the basis of data on special operating assets in power plants. Investment cost related to power production : These are elements that are stated as directly deducted from the ground rent income at the time of investment both on special operating assets in power plants and other tax-related depreciation (balance depreciation and linear depreciation otherwise). This year\'s calculated corporation tax on business subject to ground rent : Amounts are calculated automatically by the Tax Administration on the basis of data on business specification and tax return. This year\'s application of carried forward calculated negative corporation tax : Amounts are calculated automatically by the Tax Administration on the basis of data on business specification and tax return Carry forward negative ground rent income from before 2007 : Value carried forward from previous years must be registered here, while interest and application to deductions in positive ground rent income is calculated by the Tax Administrationy and automatically entered into the registration form. Calculated company tax and calculated negative company tax to carry forward : Calculations of calculated fields are obtained from the Tax Administration calculations, and are obtained from the Tax Administration calculation functions. #### Natural resource tax Natural resource tax is on a separate tab in **Natural resource tax** at the individual hydroelectric plant. Values from previous years are taken from tax returns from previous years, and can also be registered manually. Distribution of municipalities is done by registering a distribution key between the municipalities. Distribution keys can be any number, and are distributed based on the municipality\'s distribution key divided by the total distribution key for all municipalities if there are more than one municipality. It is not necessary to register a distribution key if there is only one municipality in the list. #### Wealth/property tax Basis for calculation specifies gross sales revenue for the current year, and sums up deductions for costs and ground rent tax. Gross sales revenue, gross operating costs and deductions for ground rent tax from the previous four years are taken from the previous year\'s tax return, and are not specified beyond this (new from 2023). The present value calculation itself is carried out by the Tax administration, and is entered in Period & Year from the Tax Administrations calculations. The present value of future replacement costs appears as the sum of values from the following objects linked to the power plant: - Separate operating assets in power plants, value of the individual acquisition - Balance depreciation See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Separate fixed assets in power plants /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant-minitoc/separate-fixed-assets-power-plants page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Separate fixed assets in power plants In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Separate fixed assets in power plants.**. The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the Tax Administration.

Separate fixed assets in power companies consist of the following structures: - Fixed asset - Acquisitions related to the fixed asset The fixed asset contains information about the municipality and whether the investment cost is directly expensed in ground rent taxation. If a fixed asset is to have varying information about it, it must be split into several fixed assets. Disposal is registered on the fixed asset itself and not on the acquisitions. All investments are placed on the acquisition object, which is an underlying object of the fixed asset. The fixed asset also contains a separate profit and loss account, which is also included in the calculation of temporary differences. Fixed asset register : It is possible to register acquisitions of fixed assets in power companies in the **Fixed assets register**. In such cases, it is indicated that there is a \'Separate fixed assets in power plants\', and the desired parameters are registered. Acquisitions of separate fixed assets : This menu gives you the following options: : 1\. Import to Excel : 2\. Export to Excel : 3\. Filtered view : Filtering can be done on: : 1\. Power plant : 2\. Construction equipment : 3\. Base rate treatment : 4\. Acquisition year : There is a spreadsheet template for importing both new special fixed assets and acquisitions of existing special fixed assets in power companies. : There is an export function for this too, where export is made in the same format as import, so that you can export data, then modify data and import data again. :

The import function allows you to add:

1. Separate operating assets in power plants

2. Acquisition of a new or existing special operating asset in a power plant

See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Acquisitions of separate-fixed-assets /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant-minitoc/acquisitions-separate-fixed-assets page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Acquisitions of separate-fixed-assets In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Acquisitions of separate-fixed-assets** The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the Tax Administration.

Acquisitions of separate fixed assets : This menu gives you the following options: : 1\. Import to Excel : 2\. Export to Excel : 3\. Filtered view : Filtering can be done on: : 1\. Power plant : 2\. Construction equipment : 3\. Base rate treatment : 4\. Acquisition year : There is a spreadsheet template for importing both new special fixed assets and acquisitions of existing special fixed assets in power companies. : There is an export function for this too, where export is made in the same format as import, so that you can export data, then modify data and import data again. :

The import function allows you to add:

1. Separate operating assets in power plants

2. Acquisition of a new or existing special operating asset in a power plant

See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Separate fixed assets under construction /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant-minitoc/separate-fixed-assets-under-construction page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Separate fixed assets under construction In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Separate fixed assets under construction** The area is manually activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the Tax Administration.

This is a registration that is made in order to get the tax value included in the calculation of temporary differences. There is a separate menu item for this. Value 01.01. is not used for anything other than information. They are included in the calculation of the tax value of temporary differences per 01.01., but values ​​here are normally already overridden when transferring to the new year. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Balance depreciations etc. in power plants and fixed asset register /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant-minitoc/balance-depreciation-in-power-plants page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Balance depreciations etc. in power plants and fixed asset register In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Basis values** ​​- you will find the work area for **Balance depreciations etc. in power plants**. The area is activated by selecting \'Hydroelectric plant\' from **Edit feature areas.**

Note that the area requires logging in with an active connection to the Tax Administration.

#### Balance depreciation Balance depreciation : Balance depreciation, ordinary straight-line depreciation and non-depreciable tax fixed assets all have power plant information for fixed assets belonging to power plants. : Each depreciation object (e.g. a balance in balance depreciation) has a tick for the fact that it applies to hydropower plants, where you can tick this off. If this object concerns hydropower plants, there is also information about: : - Investment directly expensed in ground rent taxation : If you have investments that are both directly expensed and that are depreciated in the ordinary course of basic income taxation, you must divide them into two different balances. This also applies to cumulative balances, e.g. balance group d. : - Power plant : Here you choose which power station the object belongs to. If you have several power plants, you must have a balance for each of the power plants, also on aggregate balances such as e.g. balance group d. : - Is a fixed asset under construction (Choice Yes/No, where No is the default value) : - Calculated fields that are calculated by the Norwegian Tax Agency and read into the depreciation object: - This year\'s exempt income - Present value of future replacement costs Consumer price index-adjusted investment cost - Consumer price index-adjusted investment cost - Remaining life - Part of the year\'s investment cost that is directly expensed in ground rent income (registered). Balance depreciation etc. in power companies : There is a separate menu with an overview of all balance depreciation in the company, where you can see the special power plant fields. In this screen, you can filter on power plants and on basic interest treatment. : In this menu, you can export the existing balance depreciation, make adjustments to these in Excel, and import data back. You can choose to import everything, or only import data that applies to the specific power plant fields. : It is also possible to import data from Excel without performing an export first. In such cases, a template is used for import which is displayed for download when the import function is selected. #### Fixed asset register Separate operating assets in power companies acquired in previous years : Fixed assets that are of the type special fixed asset in power companies do not have an indication/link to fixed asset if it was acquired in previous years. : Access from previous years must be registered in the fixed asset register without reference to which specific fixed asset this belongs to. In order to update a special fixed asset in a power plant, you must therefore register previous years\' acquisitions in two places, both in the asset catalog and in an overview of acquisitions for a special fixed asset in a power company. : Any disposal of such a fixed asset must be registered both in the fixed assets register and in special fixed assets in power companies. Access/improvement to Separate fixed assets in power plants acquired in the current year : A special fixed asset in a power plant consists of a main fixed asset and one or more acquisitions of these. The fixed asset register can only enter references to a main operating asset that already exists. New operating assets must therefore first be registered in an overview of special fixed assets in power plants. After this has been done, you can enter the year\'s expenses for these. : The year\'s access can, if desired, if you use the fixed asset register in Period & Year, be registered in the fixed asset register and linked to the operating asset, so that it is only registered in one place. : If an access is deleted in the fixed asset register, it will also be deleted as an acquisition in the special fixed asset in the power company. The import function in the fixed asset register : In the case of imports into the fixed asset register, there is only support for imports of acquisitions in previous financial years. When importing this year\'s acquisitions, the following applies: : - The acquisition is marked with **Accounting presentation**. - The acquisition must also be imported in the function for importing acquisitions for special fixed assets in power companies. See [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/)[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Import of hydroelectric plant /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/basis-values/hydroelectrical-plant-minitoc/import-power-plant page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Import of hydroelectric plant #### Import Here is an overview of import functions that exist, and which are important for hydroelectric plants: Fixed asset register : In the case of imports into the facilities register, there is only support for imports of acquisitions in previous financial years. When importing this year\'s acquisitions, the following applies: : The acquisition is marked with **Accounting presentation**. : The acquisition must also be imported in the function for importing acquisitions for special fixed assets in power companies. Contract income in ground rent income : There is a spreadsheet template for importing contract income, which makes it easier if you have a certain amount of these. This can be found at the individual power plant on the separate **Contract income** tab. Acquisitions of special fixed assets : There is a spreadsheet template for importing both new special fixed assets and acquisitions of existing special fixed assets in power companies. : There is an export function for this too, where export is made in the same format as import, so that you can export data, then modify data and import data again. Balance depreciation etc. in power companies : In this menu, you can export the existing balance depreciation, make adjustments to these in Excel, and import data back. You can choose to import everything, or only import data that applies to the specific power plant fields. : It is also possible to import data from Excel without performing an export first. In such cases, a template is used for import which is displayed for download when the import function is selected. Profit and loss account /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/basis-values/profit-loss-account page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Profit and loss account ## Profit loss account (participant taxed) Profit and Loss should be completed and submitted with the company tax return if you have a loss account after the realization of fixed assets etc.

For companies with limited accounting obligations, automatic postings of transfers to and from the profit and loss account as well as income and deductions will be made. For companies with full accounting obligations, a transfer is made to temporary differences between accounting and tax values.

Follow the instructions below to calculate any profits or loss . 1. Click **Add profit- or loss account**, the symbol at the top right to create new accounts. An account is created in a separate tab. 2. Fill in relevant fields.

You can delete an account by clicking the Deletebutton at the bottom of each tab.

The first tab shows an overview of created accounts and a summation of all profit and loss accounts. The tax values of profit and loss accounts are automatically transferred to relevant subjects in business information. See [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field explanations Profit and loss account ID : A numeric id is suggested when you create a new Profit-/loss account. Municipal : Relevant when there are several industries in several municipalities. Balance per 31.12. transferred from last year\'s profit and loss account : Enter the balance as of 31.12 in the previous income year, from the profit and loss account. \+ Total gain on realization and withdrawal : Enter all gains from the realization of fixed assets. Gain on realization of entire livestock on a farm upon termination of branch of operation : Enter all gains from the realization of entire livestock on a farm upon termination of branch of operation Incoming value from acquired profit and loss account : Enter any incoming value from acquired profit and loss account. Value of realized profit and loss account : Enter value of realized profit and loss account \- Total loss on realization and withdrawal : Enter all losses from the realization of fixed assets. = Basis for the year\'s income / deduction : Basis for this year\'s income / deduction recognition is calculated automatically based on registered values. \+ Maximum 20% as income deduction. Any remaining amount less than NOK 15,000 for deductions. : The value is calculated based on registered values. The field can be overridden by hovering over the field and selecting **Override amount**. Minimum 20% as income. Any remaining amount less than NOK 15,000 as income : The value is calculated based on registered values. The field can be overridden by hovering over the field and selecting **Override amount**. Balance profit and loss account per 31.12 transferred to next year. : The value is calculated based on registered values. Percentage for this year\'s income recognition or this year\'s income deduction : The rate for the current year is displayed. Additional information /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/additional-info section 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Additional information In the menu on the left under **Additional information**, you enter information and values that are theme or industry specific. Property /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/additional-info/property page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Property Click the **Add property** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new property by selecting a type of property. If you select **Norwegian real estate** you will see a dialog where you can search by address or cadastre to find you property. Click **Add**and the property is created in a separate tab. Fill in the fields that are displayed, the system only displays relevant fields based on selection in the registration. You can delete a property by clicking the **Delete property** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an **Overview**of created properties. Calculated wealth tax values are transferred to **Information and tax - Wealth**. Use of car /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/additional-info/car-usage page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Use of car Click the **Add car** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new car. Registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically included in the tax return for businesses.

Cars are created in separate tabs. You can change the name/description of each car.

Start with filling out **Information about car usage**. The value **Balance depreciation for private use (for car not leased)l** is calculated automatically based on the values registered in **List price as new car**, **Registration year** and **Balance depreciation for private use (for car not leased)**, **Reversed car expenses for the private use of a work vehicle** is calculated automatically based on entered values. The first tab shows an overview of all created cars. On this tab you have the option to create an automatic system voucher regarding returns for private use. Calculated values and other information are transferred to relevant subjects in **Tax return- Business information.** Delete a car by clicking the **Delete car** button at the bottom of the page. See the previous [official guidelines](https://www.skatteetaten.no/globalassets/skjema/2021/rf-1125b.pdf) in the form RF-1125 Bruk av bil or [Posts, fields and subjects in new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. ## Field explanations Car number plate : Enter the car's registration number in this field. Car category : Select one of the following car categories. : - Passenger car - Electric car : - Hydrogen car : - Van (class 2) : - Truck with weight under 7500 kg : - Truck with weight 7500 kg and more - Car reg. for 9 passengers or more (special arrangement) - Bus registered for 16 passengers or more Registration year : Enter the year in which the car was first registered as new in Norway or abroad. List price as new car : Enter the main importer\'s indicative price for the car model, before any discount,, including vat and wreck discount. Extra equipment must be included (eg radio / music system, winter tires, ski box, trailer hitch, etc.). Extra equipment that has value solely for professional use is excluded. This applies to e.g. special devices intended for the transport of tools etc. Number of kilometers during this year : Enter the number of kilometers driven in total during the income year. Number of kilometers of business use during this year : Enter the number of kilometers driven in the business during the income year. Time period : Enter time periods from date to date for when you have used the car in the business. Private usage : Enter if the business vehicle has been used privately in the income year. Electronic driving record regarding driving at work : Enter whether an electronic driving record has been kept that applies to business driving in the income year. Here you answer yes or no. Operating cost exclusive leasing and deprecations : Enter operating costs in the income year. Leasing cost : Enter costs for leasing rent in the income year. Balance depreciation for private use (for car not leased) : 17% balance depreciation based on the car\'s list price at first registration is calculated based on entered information. Reversed car expenses for the private use of a work vehicle : Value is calculated automatically based on entered values. Accommodation and restaurant /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/additional-info/accomodation page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Accommodation and restaurant Accommodation and restaurants should be completed and submitted with the tax return for businesses. The information is used by the Norwegian tax authorities for statistics, analyzes etc. Click the **Add accommodation/restaurant** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new location. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The location is created in a separate tab. You can change the name/description for the accommodation/restaurant. You can delete a location by clicking the **Delete accommodation/restaurant** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created locations. The total inventory and income and withdrawal are summed up for all accommodations/restaurant. See[Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) [](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/ny-skattemelding/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Taxis and cargo transport (impersonal) /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/additional-info/taxi-cargo-transport page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Taxis and cargo transport (impersonal) Taxi and cargo transport-should be completed and submitted with the new tax return for businesses. Start by adding a permission number and industry on the overview page. Then click the **Add vehicle** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new vehicle. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The vehicle is created in a separate tab and linked to a specific permission number. You can change the name/description for the vehicle.

The registration page for taxi and cargo transport is dynamic in relation to what is registered. Fields are only displayed if they are relevant in the situation, depending on industry.

You can delete a vehicle by clicking the **Delete vehicle** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created vehicles. The total income from driving are summed up for all vehicles. See [Tax return for taxi and freight transport.](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/hjelp-til-skattemelding/drosje/) for more information. Forestry information and timber account /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/additional-info/forestry-information-timber-account page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Forestry information and timber account This year\'s revenues and costs should be completed and submitted with the tax return for businesses. Click the **Add forest and timer account** icon in the upper right corner of the page to create a new account. Relevant registration fields will be displayed and registered values are automatically transferred to the Business specification. The account is created in a separate tab. You can delete an account by clicking the **Delete forest and timer account** button at the bottom of the page. The first tab shows an overview of created accounts. The total values are summed up for all accounts. [Skattemelding for deg som driver med skog](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/hjelp-til-skattemelding/skog/).or [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses.](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) Exemption method /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/information/additional-info/exemption-method page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Exemption method Some values from**Information - Additional information - Financial products** are transferred automatically and used as basis when calculating the basis for 3 % income below exemption method. All income and deductions for shares and financial products (dividends, returns, gains and losses) regardless of whether they are taxable, exempt from income tax or without the right to deduct must be entered under an overview of financial products. ## Limited accounting duty For companies with limited accounting obligations, income recognition of dividends etc. with 3% taxable income must be divided into two parts: - 3% income recording in own account with reference account 8072 - 97% remaining in own account with reference account 8074 Income recognition of dividends etc. which fall outside the exemption method must be accounted for in an account with reference account 8073. The accounting must correspond to what is stated under financial products for income within the exemption method.u can change a users access level to this group from user or group administration. ## Full accounting obligation Account with reference account 8071 is used for dividends etc. both within and outside the exemption method. > [!NOTE] > Calculation of 3% income of positive basis is transferred to permanent differences. > > Read more in [Tax calculation](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/tax-calculation/). Financial statement /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/financial-statement page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Financial statement **Financial statement** contains an overview of the income statement. When you click on a category in the financial statement or balance on the left side , a specification of the company's values based on reference account mappings are displayed on the right side. These fields can be overridden and it is also possible to expand to drill down on a specific account. Click on the link on the amount to open **Account analysis**. The following categories are listed: #### Income statement - Operation income - Operation expenses - Capital income - Capital expenses #### Balance - Assets - Debt and equity Approve the values in each category by clicking the change status icon in the **Done** column. Business income /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/business-income page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Business income Business income is different depending on whether the company is entered with full accounting obligations or limited accounting obligations. ## Full accounting obligation In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Financial statement** you will find the annual accounts drawn up according to the layout of the Tax Agency\'s business specification for companies with full accounting obligations, and show the accounting result as well as the accounting balance (assets, debt and equity). Accounting results are transferred to **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Business income**. Companies with participation determination do not have a calculation of deferred tax in the accounts, so that only temporary differences that affect payable tax are relevant for the company type. ## Limited accounting duty In **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Financial statement** you will find the annual accounts drawn up according to the layout of the Tax Agency\'s business specification for companies with limited accounting obligations, and shows the tax result as well as the tax balance (assets, debt and equity). Equity according to the tax accounts from the Tax Agency\'s specifications is not divided into taxable and untaxed equity, but these two types of equity are combined into equity. Accounting results are transferred to **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Business income**.

Both full and limited accounting obligation

Business income can be distributed between municipalities and business types. This distribution is relevant to show that there is income from agriculture and reindeer husbandry. Municipalities can be specified but are only relevant for taxation if the income relates to municipality 2100 Svalbard.

 Participants /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/participants section 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Participants The participant function contains both content for the tax return and calculation functions for allocating various items to participants or registering the entry and exit of participants as well as transfers of ownership shares. ## Participants overview This displays an overview of company participants with the distribution of ownership shares at the beginning and end of the year, as well as the distributed share of profits. By clicking on a participant, you will navigate to the participant\'s card. Participant tasks are available as a downloadable zip file in the menu at the lower left corner. The participant tasks are intended to be sent to each company participant. Participants are created by pressing the add button in the upper right corner. When creating a new participant, it is usually sufficient to enter data under **Participants** -- **Participant\'s name** - **Information**, while other details will be derived from various functions with the distribution of amounts among participants. When manually creating a client for an existing company (creating a new client) that is not imported from Altinn, registration of other information transferred from previous years must, of course, also be recorded.\" ## Participant - Participant\'s name - Information This tab provides key information about the company participant. ## Participant - Participant\'s name - Distribution This tab provides an overview of distributions. These are recorded as a distribution of accounted dividends in the Distributions etc. function in the left menu. ## Participant - Participant\'s name - Additional income This tab is only visible for individual participants. This tab displays: • Calculation of the protection basis at the end of the year for individual participants. • Calculation and updating of protection deduction for individual participants. • Calculation of additions to income for individual participants. Normally, registration of values ​​here only applies to: • Unused shielding from previous years (if this must be changed) • Transferred shielding deduction from previous years from/to another company with participant fixing Other values ​​are transferred from other functions in the program. ## Participant - Participant\'s name - Cost price / equity account This tab shows the status and movement of: • Input value • Capital paid in for tax purposes • Equity for tax purposes • Accounting equity (only for those with full accounting obligations) This tab summarizes values ​​from other parts of the program, but can also be overridden if necessary. **Transferred from the previous income year** corresponds to the former RF-1233 pot 600 and are editable fields that show last year\'s values ​​from the line **Transferred to the next income year**. **Acquisition of share during the year** and the row **Realization of share during the year** show values ​​transferred from the **Transactions** function in the left menu. **Deposits in the year** and **Repayment of paid-in capital** show values ​​transferred from the function **Changes in sec. Paid-in capital**l in the left menu. **Distribution for the year** shows values ​​transferred from the function **Distributions etc**. in the left menu. This year\'s distribution is also shown on the tab **Distribution** to the owner. **Improper contributions** consists of the tax disadvantage for the owner in cases where the year\'s distributions do not cover the calculated tax on the participant\'s share of the company\'s profit. The supplement is given because the taxpayer must use other funds outside the company to pay tax on the company\'s profits. Calculation of the amount is shown on the separate card **Distribution** to the owner. **Tax benefit of loss** consists of the tax benefit of loss in the participant\'s share of the year\'s tax loss and is also shown on the separate card **Distribution** to the owner. The tax rules for companies with participant determination mean that this tax advantage must be deducted from the taxpayer\'s input value and share of paid-in equity, as the deficit adds liquidity to the participant by reducing payable tax on income outside this company. **The year\'s tax result** is the participant\'s share of profit, as shown under the left-hand menu **Owners shares and profit shares** multiplied by the tax result as shown under **Business income.** **Tax-free income** and **non-deductible costs** is the participant\'s share of the amounts shown under the left-hand menu **Tax-free income and non-deductible costs**. The participant\'s share is the profit share as shown under the left-hand menu **Ownership shares and profit shares.** **Other correction** in column **Entry value** and column **Paid EK** applies to amounts from account with reference account 2015 / 8915 Other change in paid-in capital that is distributed between the participants in the left menu **Changes in sec. Paid-in capital**. **Other correction** under column **Earned equity** basically shows amounts from account with reference account 2058 / 2059 / 8958 / 8959 other changes in equity. However, the post office will also correct calculations for all owners to ensure that the item **Total EK** (Total tax equity) of all owners amounts to the sum of tax equity. If there is a discrepancy between tax equity in the tax accounts and the amount of all owners in total tax equity per 31.12. the difference will be distributed between the owners according to their share of ownership on 31.12. so that distributed equity amounts to the same amount as actual tax equity. The amount of total taxable equity will be calculated as total taxed equity in the accounts (code 2000, 2050 and 2080). For companies with full accounting obligations, the sum of temporary differences per 31.12. is deducted to arrive at tax equity. The column **Accounting equity** constitutes the participant\'s tax equity corrected for the share of temporary differences per 01.01. / 31.12. ## Participant - Participant\'s name - Acquisition/realization This tab contains an overview of transactions for the individual participant based on the transactions registered in the left-hand menu **Transactions**. ## Participant - Participant\'s name - Over/under price This tab only applies to impersonal taxpayers (identified by the organization number and not the participant\'s social security number). The function calculates the over- and under-price paid for transfers and also tries to distribute this in the case of partial disposal of ownership shares. The amounts can be overridden if necessary. ## Participant - Participant\'s name - Wealth and income Asset and income items from other registrations and calculations are summarized here. Some data are registration fields for records with no other functions associated with them. Feel free to press Show all to see all applicable fields for the taxpayer. See the [Items, fields and topics in the new tax return for businesses](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/skatt/skattemelding-naringsdrivende/selskap/poster-felter-og-temaer/) for more information. Transactions /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/participants/transactions page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Transactions The various transactions for access and departure are recorded here. Access can be a foundation or companion admission, but also transfer between the participants. Departure can be exit from the company, dissolution or sale of share. Select share type when creating a transaction, which is done by pressing the plus button in the top right corner. Please note that the transfer of equity comes as a consequence of the calculations. For participants who sell everything in one transaction, all equity will be transferred from the seller to the buyer. For several sales in the same month to several other participants where the entire shareholding is sold, the amounts will be distributed between the transactions according to shareholding. If there is a partial sale or several sales over longer periods than the same calendar month, the calculation and distribution of transferred equity becomes more complex. Ownership parts and profit parts /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/participants/ownership-parts-profit-parts page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Ownership parts and profit parts This function summarizes ownership shares and profit shares month by month for each owner, with redistribution of ownership shares upon admission of a partner or exit from the company. The result is distributed over the months of the year and distributed to the owners who, at the end of the month, own the ownership share in line with the tax rules for this. The month\'s profit share is distributed between the owners who own shares at the end of the month. Profit shares can be overridden in cases where there are agreements that provide a different distribution of profits than the share of ownership dictates, and this is not distributed between the owners as remuneration for work via the function for remuneration for work. Work compensation (Salary to owner) /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/participants/work-compensation page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Work compensation (Salary to owner) Work remuneration is of three types, which are controlled by the accounting account for work remuneration before one of these three reference accounts: - 5600 Work allowance other industry - 5601 Work allowance from fishing / lottery to participant - 5602 Work allowance from family nursery school in own home Distribution of work allowance must be made separately for each of the types stated above. Distribution of work allowance between the participants can be done in one of two ways: 1\. Cost account linked to participant 2\. Manual distribution Distributed work allowance is shown on the **Wealth and income** tab for the individual participant. It is possible to register the desired work allowance on the individual account to get an automatic redistribution of work allowance from the cash withdrawal under the left-hand menu item **Distributions etc**. Please note that when making a change, you must make sure to change the amount during distributions after the work allowance has possibly been changed in the menu. Private withdrawals and equity deposits /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/participants/distributions page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Private withdrawals and equity deposits The function has distribution of distributions between the participants for each type of distribution. The reference account of the accounting account for distribution determines which type this is classified as. The distribution function gives you the opportunity to distribute the distributions manually between the participants, and has tool buttons that allow you to easily distribute the distributions according to ownership per share. 01.01. or per 31.12. Changes in taxable paid-in capital /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/participants/change-paid-capital page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Changes in taxable paid-in capital The function has the distribution of payments from the participants and payments to the participants for each type based on reference account to accounting account for receipts and payments of tax-related paid-in capital. The reference account of the accounting account for distribution determines which type this is classified as. The reference accounts that apply to this function are account 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014 and 2015. The distribution function gives you the opportunity to distribute payments and payouts manually between the participants, and has tool buttons that allow you to easily distribute the amounts according to ownership per share. 01.01. or per 31.12. The accounting account balance debit or credit is shown as a sign, so that payments are shown with a negative sign, and must be shown with a negative sign for correct distribution. Participants wealth /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/participants/wealth page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Participants wealth This is an overview that shows the distribution of wealth between the participants and also the uneven distribution of wealth between the participants. Unequal distribution means that a participant has higher or lower equity than the equity resulting from the participant\'s share. Equity /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/participants/equity page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Equity This is an overview of equity per 1.1. and 31.12. with movements in the year. This is displayed with one line per participant and is a summary of the table of **Participant - Participant\'s name - Entry value/EC**. For companies with full accounting obligations, you can choose whether you want to see accounting or tax equity in the overview. Wealth /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/wealth page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Wealth When you click on **Wealth**, the specification of the company\'s wealth is displayed. The values are retrieved from different areas in the system. This view displays a specification of the company\'s taxable wealth and deductible debt for transfer to the Tax Message. The specification contains balance items with accounting value. Each balance item in the specification detail row has a calculation type which for example shows the source of the value or if the value should be registered directly into the Tax message. This view displays a specification of the company\'s Taxable wealth and deductible debt for transfer to Tax Message. All listed values from **Taxable wealth and deductible debt** are transferred to relevant subjects in the Tax message. Checks /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/checks section 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Checks If an error situation occurs this will be visualized with an informative icon on the **Checks** menu and on the left side for the section with errors. Period & Year uses the validation service of The Norwegian Tax Administration to validate information to be submitted to Altinn in connection with the new tax return. Validation of information takes place continuously in Period & Year. To access the validation service, you must be logged in with your social security number via the ID port. The following icon can be displayed: ![](./img/16_Information.png) - used to inform you, for example if you are currently not logged in to Altinn. ![](./img/16_Warning.png) - Indicates tips that are of relevance to the data you submit. The Tax return can be submitted even if this icon is displayed. ![](./img/16_Error.png) - Indicates that there is invalid information. At least one of the check results prevents you from submitting your information. Business information /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/checks/business-specification page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Business information When you click on **Business Information** on the left, any calculation deviations from the validation service to The Norwegian Tax Administration are displayed. Tax return /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/checks/tax-return page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Tax return When you click on **Tax return** on the left side, a login button or received validation messages from Altinn will be displayed. Internal control /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/checks/internal-control page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Internal control These are checks carried out by Period & Year. If you receive an error result during internal control, this will indicate that you will not be able to send information to The Norwegian Tax Administration for control. This must be corrected in order to have data checked against the The Norwegian Tax Administration. Reconciliation of fixed assets /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/checks/reconciliation-fixed-assets page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Reconciliation of fixed assets When you click on **Reconciliation of fixed assets** on the left side, a reconciliation model of the company\'s fixed assets is displayed on the right side. The model lists a **Specification of estimated change of temporary differences**. This includes entries from the company\'s depreciations, accounting profit/loss, profit/loss not entered in the profit/loss account, profit/loss entered in the profit/loss account and the difference between accounting and taxable cost. Estimated change in temporary differences according to specification is reconciled with RF-1217 item 3, column III Change in temporary differences. Under **Depreciations**the model lists the following entries: - Accounting depreciations - Hereof depreciation on financial leasing - Impairment of fixed assets - Taxable depreciations - Taxable linear depreciations - Taxable depreciations power plant Under **Accounting profit/loss** the model lists the following entries: - Accounting profit on sales - Accounting loss on sales Under **Profit/losses not entered in the profit-/loss account** the model lists the following entries: - Sales amount directly entered as income in the year of realization, cf. The Tax Act § 14-44 - Profit on non-depreciable fixed assets - Profit on linear depreciable fixed assets - Loss on non-depreciable fixed assets - Loss on linear depreciable fixed assets Under **Profit/losses entered in the profit-/loss account** the model lists the following entries: - Profit on non-depreciable fixed assets - Profit on depreciable fixed assets - Negative balance goodwill - Loss on non-depreciable fixed assets - Loss on depreciable fixed assets Under **Difference between accounting - and taxable cost** the model lists the following entries: - Tax-free investment subsidy - Input VAT adjustment - Reduction for adjustment of input VAT on sale - Diff. between the booked amount and the fair value at the time of the merger/demerger - Diff. tax values ​​and booked/fair value on conversion to limited company - Deduction for tax-free profit on transfer of assets to companies in the same group. - Addition for diff. between tax entry value and remuneration transferred from companies in the same group. - Activated fixed assets to be expensed for tax purposes Reconciliation of equity (personal) /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/checks/reconciliation-equity page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Reconciliation of equity (personal) When you click on**Reconciliation of equity** on the left side, a reconciliation model of the company\'s equity is displayed on the right side. The model lists an **Estimated equity 31.12. according to specification**. It specifies the change in equity between 1.1 and 31.12. If you have accounting obligation type 2 (accountable taxpayers), information from the reconciliation of equity will be submitted to The Norwegian Tax Administration. Salary and pension costs /periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed/type-5/checks/salary-pension-costs page 2024-09-13T13:35:28+02:00 # Salary and pension costs Reconciliation of salary and pension costs was in the old tax return attached in tax form RF-1022. In the new tax return and business specification, this reconciliation has been removed. When you click on**Salary and pension costs** on the left side, a separate section for the reconciliation of salary and pension costs is displayed on the right side. The data calculated here and possibly also recorded will be shown on the Wage and pension costs report in **Reports - Other year-end documents**. The accounts included in the reconciliation are the same as previously presented in form RF-1022 Salary and pension costs. It is also possible to add separate lines in the various sections of the reconciliation. It is not possible to remove accounts directly from the list, but the accounts are included based on the reference account properties. Accounts that are mistakenly included in the reconciliation are then included due to the wrong reference account, and the reference account property of accounts shown on the screen can be changed directly from the screen. If accounts that should have been included in the reconciliation are not included, you must find the account accordingly and change the account\'s reference account property. Please see the [Tax Directorate\'s notices 4/2022](https://www.skatteetaten.no/rettskilder/type/skattedirektoratets-meldinger/revisors-plikter-i-forbindelse-med-signering-av-signaturpliktige-opplysninger-i-naringsspesifikasjon-og-skattemelding/) for more information. Closing entries /periodandyear/help/taxation/closing-entries page Export closing entries to ERP or file, create closing entries, view system vouchers. 2025-02-21T16:41:02+01:00 # Closing entries Export closing entries to ERP or file, create closing entries, view system vouchers. **Closing entries** is located under both **Period closing** and **Year-end closing**. If a reconciliation difference should occur in **Reconciliation BS - Overview** or in an appendix, you can create a closing entry by clicking on the blue scale icon. You can also go to **Closing entries** and create the closing entry there. Here, a list of all closing entries that have been created is displayed. You can expand each closing entry to view the details. > [!NOTE] > You must also transfer the closing entries that you create in Period & Year to your accounting software, unless you have set them as **Not applicable for transfer** (this setting is only available in the year-end period). In that case, they will only affect the balances in Period & Year. You can edit, print or delete a closing entry by clicking on the symbols in the **Action** column. If you wish to print all closing entries, this can be done in **Report center**. If you import accounting data into Period & Year again, you will be asked if you want to set the status to **Bookkept** on the closing entries that you created in Period & Year. Entries with the status **Bookkept** are not included in the balances in Period & Year, since it's stated that they are booked in the accounting system. Only closing with the statuses **Not transferred** and **Transferred** (and **Not applicable for transfer**, if you are working in the year-end period) affect the balances in Period & Year. ## Export closing entries as an SIE file You can generate a SIE export file containing all closing entries with the status **Not transferred**. This file can be used to transfer the closing entries to other ERPs that support the import of this file type. Start the export by clicking on the button **Export closing entries as an SIE file** under **Closing entries**. If there are entries with the status **Not transferred** when you are locking a period, the system will ask you if you would like to export them as an SIE file. When the export is done, the closing entries will receive the status **Transferred**. ## Export closing entries to Visma net If you are using Visma net, you can transfer all closing entries with the status **Not transferred** to Visma net by clicking on the button **Export closing entries to Visma net** under **Closing entries**. > [!NOTE] > Export closing entries will be transferred, but not automatically updated in Visma Net. The user then has the opportunity to assign any cost units before the final update in Visma Net. If there are entries with the status **Not transferred** when you are locking a period, the system will ask you if you would like to export to Visma Net. Når eksporten er ferdig, merkes posteringene med statusen **Overført**. > [!NOTE] > Opprettelse av nye kontoer i Periode & År blir automatisk opprettet i Visma Net sammen med eksport av posteringer, men du må i etterkant av eksporten manuelt tildele kontogruppe i Visma Net på nye kontoer. ## Export closing entries to Business NXT If you are using Business NXT, you can transfer all closing entries with the status **Not transferred** to Business NXT by clicking on the button **Export closing entries to Business NXT** under **Closing entries**. > [!NOTE] > Exported closing entries are automatically bookkept in Business NXT. If there are entries with the status **Not transferred** when you are locking a period, the system will ask you if you would like to export to Business NXT. When the export is done, the closing entries will receive the status **Transferred**. ## Export closing entries to eAccounting If you are using eAccounting, you can transfer all closing entries with the status **Not transferred** to eAccounting by clicking on the button **Export closing entries to eAccounting** under **Closing entries**. > [!NOTE] > Exported closing entries are automatically bookkept in eAccounting. If there are entries with the status **Not transferred** when you are locking a period, the system will ask you if you would like to export to eAccounting. When the export is done, the closing entries will receive the status **Transferred**. ## Export closing entries to Tripletex If you are using Tripletex, you can transfer all closing entries with the status **Not transferred** to Tripletex by clicking on the button **Export closing entries to Tripletex** under **Closing entries**. > [!NOTE] > Exported closing entries are automatically bookkept in Tripletex. If there are entries with the status **Not transferred** when you are locking a period, the system will ask you if you would like to export to Tripletex. When the export is done, the closing entries will receive the status **Transferred**. ## Export closing entries to PowerOffice Go If you are using PowerOffice Go, you can transfer all closing entries with the status **Not transferred** to PowerOffice Go by clicking on the button **Export closing entries to PowerOffice Go** under **Closing entries**. > [!NOTE] > Exported closing entries are automatically bookkept in PowerOffice Go, If there are entries with the status **Not transferred** when you are locking a period, the system will ask you if you would like to export to PowerOffice Go. When the export is done, the closing entries will receive the status **Transferred**. > [!NOTE] Export of agricultural clients > Export of manual vouchers and system vouchers will also include agricultural department as part of the closing entries. For example: > > - Debit 8975.60 - Private use of business vehicle > - Credit 7099.60 - Private use of business vehicle (recognized as income) ## Export closing entries to DNB Regnskap If you are using DNB Regnskap, you can transfer all closing entries with the status **Not transferred** to DNB Regnskap by clicking on the button **Export closing entries to DNB Regnskap** under **Closing entries**. > [!NOTE] > Exported closing entries are automatically bookkept in DNB Regnskap. If there are entries with the status **Not transferred** when you are locking a period, the system will ask you if you would like to export to DNB Regnskap. When the export is done, the closing entries will receive the status **Transferred**. ## Export closing entries to Duett Økonomi If you are using Duett Økonomi, you can transfer all closing entries with the status **Not transferred** to DNB Regnskap by clicking on the button **Export closing entries to Duett Økonomi** under **Closing entries**. > [!NOTE] > Exported closing entries are automatically bookkept in Duett Økonomi. If there are entries with the status **Not transferred** when you are locking a period, the system will ask you if you would like to export to Duett Økonomi. When the export is done, the closing entries will receive the status **Transferred**. ## Export closing entries to SpareBank 1 Regnskap If you are using SpareBank 1 Regnskap, you can transfer all closing entries with the status **Not transferred** to SpareBank 1 Regnskap by clicking on the button **Export closing entries to SpareBank 1 Regnskap** under **Closing entries**. > [!NOTE] > Exported closing entries are automatically bookkept in SpareBank 1 Regnskap. If there are entries with the status **Not transferred** when you are locking a period, the system will ask you if you would like to export to SpareBank 1 Regnskap. When the export is done, the closing entries will receive the status **Transferred**. ## Export closing entries to Unimicro If you are using Unimicro, you can transfer all closing entries with the status **Not transferred** to Unimicro by clicking on the button **Export closing entries to Unimicro** under **Closing entries**. > [!NOTE] > Exported closing entries are automatically bookkept in Unimicro. If there are entries with the status **Not transferred** when you are locking a period, the system will ask you if you would like to export to Unimicro. When the export is done, the closing entries will receive the status **Transferred**. ## Export closing entries to Xledger If you are using Xledger, you can transfer all closing entries with the status **Not transferred** to Xledger by clicking on the button **Export closing entries to Xledger** under **Closing entries**. > [!NOTE] > Exported closing entries are automatically bookkept in Xledger. If there are entries with the status **Not transferred** when you are locking a period, the system will ask you if you would like to export to Xledger. When the export is done, the closing entries will receive the status **Transferred**. ## Create closing entries solely for Period & Year In the year-end period, it is possible to select entries that are not relevant to transfer back to your accounting software, by setting them as **Not applicable for transfer**. These entries will not be included in an export, which means that they will only affect balances in Period & Year. This option is only available for entries with the status **Not transferred**. Financial statements /periodandyear/help/taxation/financial-statements page Income statement and balance sheet for period- or year-end closing. 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Financial statements Income statement and balance sheet for period- or year-end closing. **Financial statements** is located under both **Period closing** and **Year-end closing**. The view **Financial statements** shows the **Income statement** and **Balance sheet** with all the updated accounting data from the reconciliation of the accounts.

The data that is shown in this view is the same that is included when you create a PDF file in Report center in Period & Year.

If the result for the period or year you are working on is yet to be booked, then a new row called **Calculated profit/loss (not bookkept)** will show in **Financial statement - Balance sheet** to avoid differences between **Total assets** and **Total equity and liabilities**. The value shown in this row will be included in **Total equity and liabilities**. If you have unbooked profit or loss and mark the balance sheet for preview or select **Download PDF** in **Report center**, then the row **Calculated profit/loss (not bookkept)** will also show in the preview or the downloaded PDF. ## Expand the level of detail in the Financial statements You can expand the level of detail in **Financial statements** by drilling down to the journal entries recorded on the accounts. Amounts that are available for drill-down are underlined and will change their colour to blue when you hover over them in the overview. Click on an amount available for drill-down to open a dialogue named **Account analysis**, which displays all the journal entries attached to that specific account. In **Account analysis**, the opening balance for the selected account and period is shown above the journal entry list, while the closing balance for the selected account and period is displayed at the bottom of the list. The journal entry list contains entry date and number, along with the current change, the closing balance after each journal entry and a transaction text. From within **Account analysis**, it is possible to select a different account in the account selector in the top left. You can also adjust the period displayed in the period selector in the top right. Click on the arrow next to a journal entry in the list to expand it and display a more detailed view of that particular entry. This view contains the debit and credit accounts, the booked amounts and the transaction text. ### View attachments in the account analysis To view an attachment to a journal entry in the account analysis, click on the paper clip icon in the **Attachments** column. Choose which document you want to preview in the dialogue box that opens. In the preview window, you can download the attached document by clicking on the **Download** button and then easily drag it into an external appendix. It is also possible to create a new external appendix, to which the document is automatically linked by selecting **Add to appendix** in viewing mode. ## Roundings in Financial statement When the **Financial statement** is transferred to the **Annual report**, roundings are handled as follows: - Each row (account group) in the **Financial statement** is calculated with decimals and rounded separately. - Up to 0,49 is rounded down, while 0,50 and up to 0,99 is rounded up. - If the value is negative, -0,50 and down to -0,99 is rounded down, while -0,49 and up to -0,01 is rounded up.

The total sums are calculated and rounded separately (and are not sums of the already rounded subtotals).

## Alternate placement of accounts Depending on whether they have a credit or a debit balance, certain accounts will be placed as either assets or liabilities in **Year-end closing - Financial statements - Balance sheet**. Those of the company\'s accounts that are connected to any of the reference accounts listed below, will automatically get this alternate placement in the balance sheet by default.

You can update these settings under Maintenance - Chart of accounts by selecting the pen icon for the corresponding row, select the Alternative reference account checkbox and set the desired account.

| Account | Account name | Alternative reference account | Account name | |----|----|----|----| | 1920 | Bankinskudd | 2380 | Kassakreditt | | 2510 | Betalbar skatt, fastsatt | 1576 | Fordring på skatt | | 2740 | Oppgjørskonto merverdiavgift | 1579 | Tilgode mervediavgift | | 2380 | Kassakreditt | 1920 | Bankinskudd | | 1576 | Fordring på skatt | 2510 | Betalbar skatt, fastsatt | | 1579 | Tilgode mervediavgift | 2740 | Oppgjørskonto merverdiavgift | Annual report /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report section Create annual report with financial statement, notes and cash flow analysis. Use templates for board report, general meeting or, declaration of completeness 2024-12-13T07:57:26+01:00 # Annual report Create annual report with financial statement, notes and cash flow analysis. Use templates for board report, general meeting or, declaration of completeness In **Year-end closing - Annual Report** you find everything you need in order to create an annual report according to the accounting act and good accounting practice for small and large businesses. A collection of different areas of the annual report is visible in the menu bar. It varies which areas are displayed depending on which accounting rules are the basis for the company. If \"Small businesses\" is selected, fewer areas will be displayed than if other accounting rules are selected, such as \"The general rules of the Accounting Act\". You can choose which areas to display at any time by clicking on the cog wheel icon at the top right and ticking the relevant areas.

Pre-populated values are updated automatically in annual report if they are changed, however if necessary you can click the refresh-icon to refresh values in annual report. Clicking the icon will start a full recalculation of values. During the process the button will be disabled but as soon as the values are updated the button will be available again.

In addition to **Areas**, **Column layout**, **Number Format** and **Language** can be selected by clicking on the cog wheel symbol. In **Column layout** you can specify which numerical material that should be included in the columns of the annual report. This is especially relevant if an extended financial year is to be reported. If the first financial year is 6 months or shorter, the company can choose to postpone reporting to the [Brønnøysund Register](https://www.brreg.no/) and include the amounts next year. It is the founding date that appears in **Settings - Company information** which manages what alternatives to the number material the system proposes for Column of numbers 1 and Column of numbers 2. In **Number format**, you can enter the format for accounts and notes. The standard number format is NOK with decimals, but you can choose whether accounts and notes should be presented in whole NOK, thousand NOK or millions NOK. In **Language**, you can change permanent language for annual report to New norwegian or English. It is the language for permanent preparation that is indicated here. If you have a temporary need to generate a translated version in another language, you can download such a file from the "Preview" tab. Submission of the annual report to Altinn is done in the menu **Year-end closing - Altinn**. ## Checklist The checklist, which is located in the side panel, is accessed by clicking on the icon in the upper right and helps you to document the work you have done. In the side panel, the task list for your selection in the left hand panel is shown. To add a comment to a task, click on the row or on the comment icon in the **Actions** column and enter your comment. To mark a task as done, click on the check mark in the **Actions** column. Click on the check mark again to undo this action. A task can be marked as **N/A**, which means that it is not applicable. You can modify the checklist to show only the tasks you want. Click on **Edit checklist** in the bottom of the side panel to do this. In this view, you can choose which tasks are active. You can add your own tasks to the checklist. This is also done in the **Edit checklist** view. The tasks you add yourself can be activated and deactivated in the same way as the standard tasks, and can also be deleted. The tasks that you have added yourself have a blue icon in the task list so that they can be easily identified. The checklist is available for print in **Year-end closing - Reports**. Choose which parts you want to include in your report in the left hand panel and select **Generate report - Download PDF**. Annual report /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/document page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Annual report **Preview** of the annual report is shown as the first of several areas under **Annual report**. Other areas under annual report are; - Financial statements - Notes - Cash flow - Annual report - General meeting - Declaration of completeness From the preview, you can export the document by selecting **Download PDF** or **Download DOCX**from the printer icon in the upper right corner.

It is possible to generate an AI-based machine translation of the previewed annual report. Click on the - icon to select language and file format. If further adjustments to the text are needed, this can be done in Microsoft Word or a similar word processing tool.

In the menu **Information to accounting register**, you will find required information for submission of RR-0002 Annual report. - Date for approval of the annual report, needs to be filled out. - Name of the company representative, who confirms that the annual report has been approved, needs to be filled out. - Email addresses for feedback from Accounting register, needs to be filled out. Financial statements /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/financial-statements page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Financial statements In the area **Financial statement**, you will find the sections **Income statement**, **Assets** as well as **Equity and liabilities** on the left-hand side. Mark the relevant part of the financial statement on the left side and the layout of the relevant part of the financial statement is displayed on the right side. It is possible to expand the layout by starting from an existing accounting line. This is done by clicking on the menu icon that appears when you hold the cursor over the field and select **Copy**.

For example, if you want to split Revenue into "Revenu cars" and "Auto repair shop", you can first copy the accounting line Revenue, edit the line text to "Auto repair shop" and then click on the arrow in front of the relevant account to push the account over to the newly created accounting line "Auto repair shop".

You can also change the order of accounting lines within a template line, for example within the template line Revenue. 1. Click on the menu icon that appears when you hold the cursor over the field. 2. Select **Move up** or **Move down** depending on which accounting line you are on. You can also choose to delete an accounting line that you have previously created. This is done by clicking on the menu icon that appears when you hold the cursor over the field and selecting **Delete**.

If you want an accounting line to always be visible in the layout, despite the fact that the balance is 0 on accounts linked to the accounting line in question, you can click on the menu icon that appears when you hold the cursor over the field and select Show always.

 Signatures /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/signatures page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Signatures By turning on **The integration to BrReg.no**, signatures can be fetched from [Brønnøysund Register Centre](https://www.brreg.no/). If necessary it is possible to edit retrieved information by turning off the integration after retrieval. As long as the integration is turned off it is possible to add or delete board members manually. Notes /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses section 2024-12-13T07:57:26+01:00 # Notes In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes**, you will find a proposal of notes that can be filled out for the company. The system generates notes that are required for small businesses in accordance with the law\'s minimum requirements, cf. amendment to the Accounting Act with effect from 01.07.2021. Some notes are required and some are generated based on registered values on reference accounts. When creating a new client, the system defaults **Small businesses** in the field for which rules are used when preparing the annual report. Notes for small businesses will therefore be visible under the Notes area.

To change this setting go to Year-end closing - Information and tax - Client information.

If **General rules of the Accounting Act** or if one of the other types of companies has been checked, notes for small companies will still be visible under Notes, but there will also be some special notes that may be relevant for large and other companies. These special notes will then appear under **Add - Numbered note**.

Since there are no machine-readable notes for large and other companies, you have the option to delete all notes, unlike some notes for small companies which are mandatory and machine-readable. The note information to be given in the annual report must be assessed individually for each individual company.

Numbered note information for items in the balance sheet and income statement is presented in the same order as the items in the balance sheet and income statement. Notes that do not have a reference to a specific accounting line are created as unnumbered notes and presented before numbered notes. Examples of unnumbered notes are Accounting principles and Uncertainty about continued operations. If needed, you can add notes that are not generated automatically by the system, by clicking on the button **Add new** on the lower left in the menu. You can choose between **Introductory (unnumbered), Numbered note** or **Closing (unnumbered)**. > [!TIP] Override note headings > You can override all default note headings by selecting *Edit*. You can delete a note by clicking on **Delete** at the bottom of the page. Gray fields contain system-generated values. You can change the value of a system-generated field by clicking on the menu icon that appears when you hold the cursor over the field. Select **Override**. Overridden fields change colours from grey to yellow. To restore the value, hold the cursor over the field again, click on the menu icon and select **Reset**. In white fields, enter values manually. If you want to know which accounts are included in fields with system-generated values, you can click on the menu icon that appears when you hold the cursor over the field and select **Show accounts.** Under **Note reference in income statement/balance sheet** at the bottom of the screen of each note, you see which accounting lines the note is linked to. Here you also see the value on the accounting line in the annual report so that you can easily compare with the total value in the note where applicable. The value field in the note reference section is displayed with the same sign as the presentation in the annual report. Note references can be edited and you can add or remove references. Start typing in the text field to search for an accounting line to which you want to refer the note to. Click on the add- or remove symbol to add more references or to remove references. The notes **Regnskapsprinsipper** and **Manuell note** can be edited and built up with the text editor functionality. You can create/edit tables, change texts and insert various variables that will contribute to more automation in the manual note. Accounting policies /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/accounting-policies page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Accounting policies In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Accounting policies**,you will find the note on applied accounting principles, so that the stakeholders of the annual report receive information about which rules and principles are used as a basis for submitting the annual report. The note is dynamic and relevant text for the company is displayed on the basis of book entries made at reference account level. If desired, the note can be edited by clicking on **Custom note** at the top right of the page. Based on the functionality in the text editor, you can create/edit tables, change texts and insert various variables that will contribute to more automation in the manual note. Number of man-years /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/manyears page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Number of man-years In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Number of man-years**, you will find the note about number of employees during the accounting year. The corresponding number that was entered in the field **Number of man-years** in **Information - Client information** will appear here. If the company has not had any employees during the accounting year, a text box will appear with a prewritten template confirming this. This template can be edited if needed. Payroll expenses /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/payroll-employees page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Payroll expenses In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Payroll expenses**, you will find a note regarding the company's payroll expenses during the year. Given that the number of employees has been entered in **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Client information**, a table with specification of salary costs for the company, including **Salary**, **Employer\'s contribution**, **Pension costs** and **Other related benefits**, will appear. The table shows system-generated values based on bookkeeping done at the reference account level. Approve the note by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**in the view to the left. Return to preview by selecting **Preview** in the lower right. Mandatory occupational pension /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/pension page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Mandatory occupational pension In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Mandatory occupational pension**,you will find the note where it is stated whether the company is obliged to have the pension rules according to the rules for mandatory occupational pension. The note is filled in manually. Fixed and intangible assets /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/fixed-intangible-asset-small-businesses page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Fixed and intangible assets In the menu **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Fixed and intangible assets**, you will find the note regarding the company's fixed assets. The note is generated automatically if the selected data source is **Fixed asset register**. Manual registration is also an alternative if you prefer to fill in the values directly in the note. If so, no values will be fetched. With data source **Fixed asset register** will the values in the note be filled out automatically if the information was filled out in **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Fixed assets register**. These values are grey in the note and can be overwritten directly in the note if needed. Read more in [Fixed asset register](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/fixed-assets-register). Approve this note by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**in the view to the left. Return to preview by selecting **Preview** in the lower right. Audit /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/audit page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Audit In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Audit**,you will find the note on fee to the auditor. The note is filled in automatically with values from book entries made at reference account level. Accounts receivable /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/accounts-receivable page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Accounts receivable In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Account Receivable**, you will find a note regarding the company's receivables. The note is filled with values based on bookkeeping done at the reference account level. Fixed assets /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/fixed-assets page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Fixed assets In the menu **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Fixed assets**, you will find the note regarding the company's fixed assets. The note is generated automatically if the selected data source is **Fixed asset register**. Manual registration is also an option if you want to enter the values manually directly in the note. Then no values are retrieved. With the data source **Fixed assets register**, the note is automatically filled in with values if information has been entered in **Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information - Fixed assets register.** In the note, these values are grey and can be overridden directly in the note. Read more in [Fixed asset register](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/basis-values/fixed-assets-register). Loans and collateral to members of governing bodies. /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/loans-and-collatteral-small-businesses page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Loans and collateral to members of governing bodies. In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes -Loans and collateral to members of governing bodies.** you will find a note regarding the company's loans to executives during the year. The note is manually filled in. Receivables /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/receivables-small-businesses page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Receivables In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Receivables**, you will find a note regarding the company's receivables. The note is filled with values based on bookkeeping done at the reference account level. Bank deposits /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/bank-deposits page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Bank deposits In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Bank deposits** you will find the note regarding the company\'s bank deposits. The note is automatically filled with values based on bookkeeping done at the reference account level. Share (with company view) /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/shares page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Share (with company view) In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Shares (with company views)**, you will find the note where the company\'s shares are specified. The note is only available with **General rules of the Accounting Act** or one of the other types of companies in **Client information** are checked. The note is filled in manually. Debt and guarantee obligations /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/debt-guarantee-obligations-small-businesses page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Debt and guarantee obligations In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Debt and guarantee obligations**, you will find a note regarding the company's debt during the year. Click **Add**and select the note in the dialog box that appears. The note is filled in manually with information. Approve this note by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done** in the view to the left. Return to preview by selecting **Preview** in the lower right. Equity /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/equity page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Equity In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Equity**, ou will find the note specifying the company\'s equity capital. The note is filled in automatically with values from book entries made at reference account level. Income tax /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/tax-expense page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Income tax In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes -Income tax**, you will find the note specifying the company\'s income tax. The note is filled in automatically with values from book entries made at reference account level. Temporary differences /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/temporary-differences page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Temporary differences In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes -Temporary differences** you will find the note specifying the company\'s temporary differences. The note is filled in automatically with values from book entries made at reference account level. Debt /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/debt page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Debt In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Debt**, you will find a note regarding the company's debt during the year. Click **Add**and select the note in the dialog box that appears. The note is filled in manually with information. Approve this note by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done** in the view to the left. Return to preview by selecting **Preview** in the lower right. Uncertainty about continued operation /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/uncertainty page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Uncertainty about continued operation In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes** you can add the note **Uncertainty about continued operation**. If there is uncertainty about the prerequisite for continued operation, it is necessary to explain this uncertainty. Click on **Add new**, and choose the note in question in the dialogue box that appears. Approve this note by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**in the view to the left. Return to preview by selecting **Preview** in the lower right. Loans and collateral to executives, shareholders, etc. /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/loans-and-collatteral page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Loans and collateral to executives, shareholders, etc. In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Loans and collateral to executives, shareholders, etc.** you will find a note regarding the company's loans to executives during the year. The note is manually filled in. Extraordinary income and expenses /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/extraordinary-income page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Extraordinary income and expenses Information shall be provided on the size and nature of extraordinary income and expenses. In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes**, you can choose to add the note **Extraordinaary income and expense**. Click **Add** and select the note in the dialog box that appears. The note is manually filled in with information. Approve this note by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done** in the view to the left. Return to preview by selecting **Preview** in the lower right. Fair value of financial instruments /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/fair-value-financial-instruments page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Fair value of financial instruments In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Fair value on financial instruments**, you can choose to add a note regarding the company's financial instruments during the year. Click **Add**and select the note in the dialog box that appears. The note is filled in manually with information. Approve this note by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done** in the view to the left. Return to preview by selecting **Preview** in the lower right. Group, associated companies etc. /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/group-associated-comapnies-small-businesses page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Group, associated companies etc. In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Group, associated companies etc**, you will find a note regarding group and associated companies. The note is manually filled in. Click **Add**and select the note in the dialog box that appears. The note is filled in manually with information. Approve this note by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**in the view to the left. Return to preview by selecting **Preview** in the lower right. Own shares and member accounts in cooperatives /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/own-shares-small-businesses page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Own shares and member accounts in cooperatives In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Own shares and member accounts in cooperatives**, you will find the note regarding the company\`s own shares shares as well as the cooperative\'s information on member accounts. The note is filled in manually. Client funds and client /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/client-funds page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Client funds and client In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Client funds and client liability**, you will find the note specifying the company\'s client funds and client liability. The note is filled in automatically with values from book entries made at the reference account level on the top line. If it is relevant to specify client funds and client liability on several lines, click on the plus sign and add a new line. When you enter values on a new line, the corresponding value will be reduced on the top line so that the total value in the note corresponds to the value in the annual report. Manual note /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/manual-note page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Manual note In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes** you can add a manual note if you need a note with a custom headline and text. Click on **Add new**, and choose **Manual note** in the dialogue box that appears. The manual note will be placed at the end. The heading of the note is editable and the note consists of an empty text box where you enter the desired text. Approve this note by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**in the view to the left. Return to preview by selecting **Preview** in the lower right. Specification of pledges and guarantees /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/specification-of-pledged-assets page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Specification of pledges and guarantees In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Specification of pledges and guarantees**you will find the note where the company\'s debt is specified both for this year and last year. The note is only available if **The general rules of the Accounting Act** or one of the other types of companies is checked in **Client information**. The note is filled in manually. Group, subsidiaries and associated companies /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/group-subsidiaries page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Group, subsidiaries and associated companies In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Group, subsidiaries and associated companies**, you can choose to add the note **Group, subsidiaries and associated companies**. Click **Add**and select the note in the dialog box that appears. The note is filled in manually with information. Approve this note by clicking on the status symbol in the column **Done**in the view to the left. Return to preview by selecting **Preview** in the lower right. Benefits for executives /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/benefits-for-executives page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Benefits for executives In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Benifits for executives**, you will find the note about benefits paid to CEO or other executives. Information is manually filled in. Inventories /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/notes-small-businesses/inventories page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Inventories In **Year-end closing - Annual report - Notes - Inventories**, you will find the note where the company\'s inventory is specified. The note is only available if **General rules of the Accounting Act** or one of the other types of companies in **Client information** is checked. The note is filled in automatically with values from book entries made at reference account level. Cash flow /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/cash-flow page 2024-12-13T07:57:26+01:00 # Cash flow A cash flow statement is a financial report that provides an overview of the company\'s cash movements during a specific time period. It provides information about the company\'s liquidity, and its ability to meet short-term obligations and cover current expenses. Large companies must include cash flow statement as part of the annual report. In the **Cash flow** area, you will find an automatically calculated cash flow statement based on figures from the accounts. **Cash flow** and **Variables** are shown on the left side of the page. Each individual line in the cash flow statement can be expanded to see in more detail the underlying values. In addition, a line with open fields is displayed where you can add information and values that the system does not take into account automatically. In addition, a line with open fields is displayed where you can add information and values that the system does not take into account automatically, if applicable.

Values entered in the manual fields are included in the main line of the cash flow statement.

Variables are shown on the left side of the page with a right side where values can be entered manually. This is applicable, for example, in cases where the company has realized operating assets or taken out new loans during the year. Values entered in the manual fields are included in the cash flow statement. > [!Tip] Note references > You can add note references to cashflow lines by selecting one or multiple notes at the bottom of the page. Board report /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/board-report page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Board report A board report is a formal report that gives a summary overview of the company\'s financial situation and activities during a financial year. Large companies must include the **Board report** as part of the annual report. In the **Board report** area, you can, if desired, use a template to design the company\'s board report. This is done by clicking on the button **Template**. The template can be edited and built up with the text editor functionality. You can create/edit tables, change texts and insert various variables that will contribute to more automation in the board report. General meeting /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/general-meeting page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # General meeting A general meeting protocol is a written record or report that documents the most important decisions, discussions and events that take place during a general meeting in a company or organisation. The general meeting is a formal meeting arena where the shareholders or members gather to make important decisions about the company\'s management, finances and other relevant matters. The general meeting protocol acts as a legal document and an important reference tool for the company. In the **General meeting** area, you can, if desired, use a template to create the company\'s general meeting protocol. This is done by clicking on the button **Template**. The template can be edited and built up with the text editor functionality. You can create/edit tables, change texts and insert various variables that will contribute to more automation in the general meeting protocol. Declaration of completeness /periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report/declaration-of-completeness page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Declaration of completeness A declaration of completeness is a statement by the accountant or auditor that they have reviewed the accounts or accounting documents of a client and that they believe the information is complete and accurate in accordance with applicable accounting standards or guidelines. In the **Declaration of completeness** area, you can, if desired, use a template to create the company\'s completeness. This is done by clicking on the button **Template.** The template can be edited and built up with the text editor functionality. You can create/edit tables, change texts and insert various variables that will contribute to more automation in the completeness statement. Submission /periodandyear/help/taxation/altinn section Submit tax return, annual report or thirdparty data and view previous submissions. 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Submission Submit tax return, annual report or thirdparty data and view previous submissions. In **Year-end closing - Submission** you will find the company\'s reporting obligations in the left menu. Before you start submission to Altinn for the first time, you need to register the datasystem in the Altinn-portal. During the registration process, the datasystem will be given an ID and in addition a password that you create. Submission of tax return to Altinn /periodandyear/help/taxation/altinn/tax-return page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Submission of tax return to Altinn 1. Click on **Tax return** in the left menu when the business information statement is ready for submission to Altinn. 2. Log in with electronic identification., if you are not already logged in to Altinn/The Norwegian Tax Administration.

The shipment is sent to Altinn, as not complete. You can add more information and attachments at the Altinn portal before doing the final signing / submission step in the Altinn portal.

3. Click on the button **Submit to Altinn** to start the submission.

After submission to Altinn you will see a message about the status of the submission.

4. Click on the button **Show on Altinn** to see the submitted tax return in Altinn. All changes to the tax return itself must be made in The Norwegian Tax Administration\'s portal. If you make changes in The Norwegian Tax Administration\'s portal, these changes will be deleted if you transfer data from Period & Year again.. Under the tab **Previous submissions** you will see a list of previous submissions to Altinn. For troubleshooting or support, it is possible to download submission data in XML format. Submission of annual report to Altinn /periodandyear/help/taxation/altinn/annual-report page 2024-12-13T07:57:26+01:00 # Submission of annual report to Altinn 1. Click on **RR-0002 Årsregnskap** in the left menu when the annual report is ready for submission to Altinn. 2. Log in with electronic identification., if you are not already logged in to Altinn/The Norwegian Tax Administration.

Under Forms, you see RR-0002 Årsregnskap automatically ticked to be included in the submission.

3. You can browse to choose attachments. The following file formats are supported: PDF, DOCX and XLSX. 4. Select the preferred shipping method: - **Complete shipment with signature** - The shipment is sent in as complete and signed. No changes can be made in Altinn after submission. - **Complete shipment** - The shipment is sent in as complete. No changes can be made in Altinn after submission, only signing. - **Not complete** - The shipment is sent to Altinn as incomplete. You can then add more attachments in the Altinn portal before the final signing / submission step in the Altinn portal. 5. Click on the button **Submit to Altinn** to start the submission.

After submission to Altinn you will see a message about the status of Altinns handling of the submission.

6. Click the button **Show on Altinn** to view the submitted annual report in Altinn. The submission to Altinn include values from **Income statement**, **Assets**, and **Equity and debt**, along with PDF-generated **Notes**. You can add more attachments in the Altinn portal before you do the final signing/submission step. Previous submission to Altinn /periodandyear/help/taxation/altinn/previous-submission page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Previous submission to Altinn Click on **Previous submissions** in the left menu to see previous submissions to Altinn.

Submissions are grouped by reporting obligation.

  • Skattemelding

  • RR-0002 Årsregnskap

  • RF-1241 Pass og stell av barn

  • RF-1321 Betalinger til selvstendig næringsdrivende

  • RF-1310 Gaver til frivillige organisasjoner etc.

  • RF-1086 Aksjonærregisteroppgaven

Click on a row to see more details about the submission. It is also possible to, - Open a submission in Altinn - Open Altinn inbox - Update a receipt - Download technical data

Different actions might be available depending on the current status of the submission.

 Submission of thirdparty information to Altinn /periodandyear/help/taxation/altinn/thirdparty page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Submission of thirdparty information to Altinn 1. Click on **Reporting obligation** in the left menu when the tasks are ready for submission to Altinn. 2. Enter the systemID and password which you received when you registered the datasystem in the Altinn-portal under **System**. 3. Select the preferred shipping method: - **Complete shipment with signature** - The shipment is sent in as complete and signed. No changes can be made in Altinn after submission. - **Complete shipment** - The shipment is sent in as complete. No changes can be made in Altinn after submission, only signing. - **Not complete** - The shipment is sent to Altinn as incomplete. You can then add more forms and attachments in the Altinn portal before the final signing / submission step in the Altinn portal. 4. Click on the button **Submit to Altinn** to start the submission.

After submission to Altinn you will see a message about the status of Altinns handling of the submission.

5. Click the button **Show on Altinn** to view the submitted information in Altinn. Reports /periodandyear/help/taxation/reports page Generate reports and save as PDF for printing or disitribution. 2024-10-14T16:23:18+02:00 # Reports Generate reports and save as PDF for printing or disitribution. **Reports** is available in both **Period closing** and **Year-end closing**. Here, you can generate reports and save them as PDF files for distribution or printing. If you select option **Documentation** all summaries and documentation will be included as default. With the **Filter**-icon![](./img/FilterIcon.JPG), however, you can specify in detail what documentation to print. From the filter dialog, you can select all documentation, all completed documentation or select single documentation to include in the report: ![](./img/AppendicesFilterOption.gif)

Note that if you include documentation in the report, and they have uploaded files, only files in PDF format are included.

If you generate a new report before you download the last one you generated, the first one will be replaced with the new one. The information that is included in **Income statement** and **Balance sheet** is the same that can be seen under **Period closing - Financial statements**. Do as follows: 1. Mark which documents you want to include in the PDF.

If you have tagged your comments you can select which comments you want to include in the report. You can choose between Untagged, To client and/or To quality assurance.

2. Click on **Generate report**.

A report is created and a preview is shown.

3. Click **Download PDF** to save the report on your computer. Transaction analysis /periodandyear/help/transaction-analysis section Run auto checks. Add and customize checks. 2024-09-02T10:37:53+02:00 # Transaction analysis Run auto checks. Add and customize checks. Period & Year has automated checks that look for deviations in the accounting. The checks can be run from the start page or from **Transaction analysis**. The check results are shown in **Transaction analysis - Check results**, as well as in the column **Auto checks** on the overview of the pages **Reconciliation BS** and **Analysis IS**. To adjust the checks, go to **Transaction analysis - Check settings**. Under **Administration - Templates for auto checks**, you can create templates for your own automatic checks that you can use for one or several of your accounting office\'s customers. Read more in the topic [Templates for auto checks](/periodandyear/help/administration/templates-for-auto-checks). Auto checks /periodandyear/help/transaction-analysis/auto-checks page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Auto checks When the checks have been run, a detailed view of the result can be seen in **Transaction analysis - Check results**. The result is also indicated in the column **Auto checks** on the overview of the pages **Reconciliation BS** and **Analysis IS**. To change the settings of a check, or to add your own checks, go to **Transaction analysis** and select **Check settings**. Read more in [Check settings](../check-settings).

A red icon indicates that the check has found something. Click on the check to get more detailed information.

An orange icon indicates that the check could not run. An example of this is that the check is supposed to compare previous periods, but there are no previous periods imported into Period & Year.

A green icon indicates that a check has been run, but nothing was found.

Divergent check results can be marked as done using the button Mark check as done. When you mark a check result as done, the icon changes its appearance and becomes grey with a green check mark in the lower right corner.

You only need to mark a check result as done once, which means that if you mark a check result for an account in the reconciliation BS as done, the same check check result will also be marked as done in Transaction analysis.

If a check result no longer is up to date due to a subsequent change, it will lose its status as done and the icon changes its appearance to indicate that the result needs to be updated.

## Refresh checks If the data in Period & Year has changed since the last time the checks were run, either from a new import of data from eAccounting, a SIE4 file or a SAF-T file, or from the creation of closing entries, the checks will need to be run again. This is shown by a refresh symbol in the status column, as well as the name of the check turning grey. This also happens if the settings of a check is changed. When the checks have been run again the check results are updated and the symbols are changed to the applicable ones. The symbol is also shown in the dialogue that opens when you click in the column **Auto checks** in the overview of the pages **Reconciliation BS** and **Analysis IS**.

If a period is locked, the checks will not be run for this period, so the results of the checks will remain the same.

## Comments It is possible to add comments to check results by selecting the comment icon in the upper right. Comments added to check results in **Auto checks** are saved together with the auto check result and not on account level. Create new comment : 1. Select the check result that you wish to add a comment to. 2. Click on the comment icon in the upper right to open the side panel. 3. Enter the comment in the text box. 4. Save the comment by pressing Enter or clicking outside the text box. :

The comment is saved in the selected period along with the name of the person who wrote it and the date it was saved. It will be displayed in the side panel next time it is opened and check result for which it was written is selected. When a comment has been added to a check result, the comment icon turns blue. If a check is deleted or disabled the check result in that period is removed. If the user have written a comment to that check result then the comment will also disappear.

Edit a comment : 1. Click on the pen icon next to a comment in the side panel to edit it.

Only comments written in the current period can be edited, if it is unlocked. A comment can only be edited by the person who wrote it.

2. Save the edited comment by pressing Enter, clicking outside the text box or clicking on the green checkmark. Regret your changes by clicking on the red cross. :

The edited comment is saved in the current period along with the name of the person who edited it and the date it was saved.

Delete a comment : Click on the trash bin icon next to a comment in the side panel to delete it. :

Only comments written in the current period can be deleted, if it is unlocked. A comment can only be deleted by the person who wrote it.

Reply to a comment : Click on the reply icon to the right of a comment to reply to it. :

Save the reply by pressing Enter, clicking outside the text box or clicking on the green checkmark. Undo your reply by clicking on the cross.

:

A reply can only be edited or deleted by the user who wrote it. If a comment has a reply, the reply must be deleted before the comment can be edited or deleted.

## Print check results Click on the **Download PDF** button found at the bottom of the screen to generate and download a PDF document of a check result. The result is displayed as a list, with all rows collapsed. To print a check result with all rows expanded, click on the arrow next to the **Download PDF** button and select **Download detailed PDF**. Bear in mind that not all check types produce results that can be expanded. It is also possible to select which rows that should be included in the print-out by switching on **Enable selection** and then marking the checkboxes next to the rows that you wish to include. Selection can be enabled for both standard and detailed print-outs. To include comments added to check results in the print, click on the arrow next to the **Download PDF** button at the bottom of the page and select one of the options **Download PDF with comments** or **Download detailed PDF with comments**. The comments are added to the last page of the PDF document. Check settings /periodandyear/help/transaction-analysis/check-settings page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Check settings The settings for the automated checks in Period & Year are found under **Transaction analysis - Check settings**. Period & Year comes with a set of default checks that are designed to search for deviations in the accounting data. The default checks cannot be changed or deleted. They can, however, be disabled. Default checks are marked with a padlock icon in the status column in the check settings view, so that they can be easily identified. You can also add your own checks, and set them to look for different things, for example unusually high amounts, the right number of transactions or amounts above or below certain values. To create your own check, click the button **Create check** and fill in the desired information. All checks can be copied and disabled, but only the ones you have created yourself can be deleted. To perform either of these things, click the icon in the column **Action** and select desired action.

If you copy a disabled check, the new one will be enabled. By default all disabled checks will be hidden. You can choose to show disabled checks.

The following check types are available: Unusually high number of transactions : Displays accounts that have an unusually high number of transactions for the current period compared with previous periods. When calculating unusually high number of transactions, an average combined with standard deviation is used. At least three accounting periods is required for this check type to calculate deviations. Unusually high amounts : Displays transactions with unusually high amount for the current period compared with previous periods. When calculating unusually high amounts, an average combined with standard deviation is used. At least three accounting periods is required for this check type to calculate deviations. Number of transactions compared to same period previous year : Compares the number of transactions in the current period with corresponding period previous year and detects accounts with deviations. No transactions allowed : Checks that there are no transactions on the accounts that you have specified. No transactions compared to previous period : Alerts when transactions are missing in the current period, if there were transactions in the previous period. Transactions missing in the end of the period : Displays the last recorded transactions on the specified accounts and alerts if there are no recorded transactions in the last three days in the period. Amount above or below value : Displays if transactions above or below a set value have been registered on the specified accounts. Balance above or below value : Display accounts with balances above or below the defined value. Debit values are considered as positive and credit values as negative. For example the setting Credit lower than 5 000 will find balances below credit 5 000 and debit balances. VAT check : Monitors that input and output VAT is recorded and with the correct amount. It is based on the settings in **Client chart of accounts**. When adding an account range, it is accounts with the settings creates input or output VAT that shall be specified. Opening balance check : The check compares the opening balance for the current year with the closing balance for the previous year and alerts if deviations are detected. Combination of accounts : Displays journal entries where accounts are in combination or not in combination, depending on the check setting. Housing /periodandyear/help/housing section Maintain owners and housing units. Complete reporting and submission of thirdparty information. 2024-12-13T07:57:26+01:00 # Housing Maintain owners and housing units. Complete reporting and submission of thirdparty information. Third party data is used for prefill in the tax return and should be submitted to the Tax administration. In **Housing** you will find pages for registration of information regarding, - Jointly owned housing property - Housing companies > [!NOTE] **Housing** is available for Company type *Condominium flat owner*, *Housing cooperative* and *Housing company (Boligselskap)* with access to **Year-end closing**. Registration of third party data for Minding and care of children, Donations to certain voluntary organization etc or Payments to self-employed persons can be found in [**Year-end closing - Information and tax - Information**](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal/information/additional-info/thirdparty-information). ## Housing company You can add Total values for the current income year in the menu **Housing company**. These values will be distributed on the housing units according to the total fraction (number of units). This is also where you add contact information that will be used in submission to the Tax administration. ## Add new owners You can add and edit owners in the menu **Owners**. 1. Click **Add owner**, the symbol at the top right to create new a owner. An owner is created in a separate tab. 2. Fill in relevant fields. > [!NOTE] Address information will be used for distribution but is not sent to the Tax administration and therefore not mandatory.

Import owners from excel

Click on the Import owners from excel –icon in the upper right corner to start the import wizard. The import requires the information to be in a specific format. A template can be downloaded from the dialog.

  1. Drop or browse for the excel file you want to import (*.xlsx or *.xls).
  2. Select Replace or add content.
  3. Click Next to load and validate data.
  4. Select the rows you would like to import and click Import.
  1. Click Close to return to the main page.
The first tab shows an overview of created owners. You can delete an owner by clicking the **Delete**button at the bottom of each tab. ## Add new buildings You can add and edit buildings in the menu **Buildings**. 1. Click **Add building**, the symbol at the top right to create new a building. A building is created in a separate tab. 2. Fill in relevant fields.

Import buildings from excel

Click on the Import buildings from excel –icon in the upper right corner to start the import wizard. The import requires the information to be in a specific format. A template can be downloaded from the dialog.

  1. Drop or browse for the excel file you want to import (*.xlsx or *.xls).
  2. Select Replace or add content.
  3. Click Next to load and validate data.
  4. Select the rows you would like to import and click Import.
  1. Click Close to return to the main page.
The first tab shows an overview of created buildings. You can delete a building by clicking the **Delete**button at the bottom of each tab. ## Add new housing units You can add and edit housing units in the menu **Housing units**. This is where the share of housing units are registered on the different owners. 1. Click **Add housing unit**, the symbol at the top right to create new a housing unit. A housing unit is created in a separate tab. The housing units share is calculated according to the registered total values in **Housing company** and the Housing units share. 2. Fill in relevant fields. > [!NOTE] Deletion task To register a \'deletion task\' you should enter 0/0 in the Share of housing unit field on the owner.

Import housing units from excel

Click on the Import housing units from excel –icon in the upper right corner to start the import wizard. The import requires the information to be in a specific format. A template can be downloaded from the dialog.

  1. Drop or browse for the excel file you want to import (*.xlsx or *.xls).
  2. Select Replace or add content.
  3. Click Next to load and validate data.
  4. Select the rows you would like to import and click Import.
  1. Click Close to return to the main page.
The first tab shows an overview of created housing units. You can delete a building by clicking the **Delete**button at the bottom of each tab. ## Submission values Submission values will give you an overview per owner on the values that will be submitted to the Tax administration. It is possible to sort data by clicking on the column header. > [!TIP] Download to excel You can also download submission data to excel by clicking on the **Download tasks to excel** - icon ![](./img/DownloadAsExcelIcon.PNG)in the upper right corner.

If you only want to use Period & Year for submission of values, not calculation, you can select Import information that should be reported, to import tasks from excel.

Import tasks from excel

Click on the Import tasks from excel –icon in the upper right corner to start the import wizard. The import requires the information to be in a specific format. A template can be downloaded from the dialog.

  1. Drop or browse for the excel file you want to import (*.xlsx or *.xls).
  2. Select Replace or add content.
  3. Click Next to load and validate data.
  4. Select the rows you would like to import and click Import.
  1. Click Close to return to the main page.
Click on **Generate PDF** to download information letter with annual statement to the share owners. Generated PDF files are downloaded according to the default download space in your browser settings. Read more about [Third party data](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/rapportering-og-bransjer/tredjepartsopplysninger/). Submission of housing information to Altinn /periodandyear/help/housing/submission page 2024-09-12T19:33:52+02:00 # Submission of housing information to Altinn In **Housing - Submission** you will find the company\'s reporting obligations in the left menu. 1. Click on **Reporting obligation** in the left menu when the tasks are ready for submission to Altinn. 2. Enter the systemID and password which you received when you registered the datasystem in the Altinn-portal under **System**. 3. Select the preferred shipping method: - **Complete shipment with signature** - The shipment is sent in as complete and signed. No changes can be made in Altinn after submission. - **Complete shipment** - The shipment is sent in as complete. No changes can be made in Altinn after submission, only signing. - **Not complete** - The shipment is sent to Altinn as incomplete. You can then add more forms and attachments in the Altinn portal before the final signing / submission step in the Altinn portal. 4. Click on the button **Submit to Altinn** to start the submission.

After submission to Altinn you will see a message about the status of Altinns handling of the submission.

5. Click the button **Show on Altinn** to view the submitted information in Altinn. Group consolidation /periodandyear/help/group-consolidation section Create clients. Set up group structure. Manage eliminations. Prepare annual report. Generate reports and submit the annual report. 2025-03-05T17:27:27+01:00 # Group consolidation Create clients. Set up group structure. Manage eliminations. Prepare annual report. Generate reports and submit the annual report. For companies preparing consolidated financial statements, the Period & Year feature allows the preparation of consolidated financial accounts. Get started with group consolidation /periodandyear/help/group-consolidation/get-started section 2025-03-05T17:27:27+01:00 # Get started with group consolidation To get started with **Group consolidation** a new client must be created. Once this is done you can set up the group structure, manage chart of accounts and eleminations. Create client /periodandyear/help/group-consolidation/get-started/create-client page 2025-03-05T17:27:27+01:00 # Create client A distinct client must be established for the consolidated financial statements, requiring the parent company to have two clients, one for the tax return and another for the consolidation of the group accounts. The consolidation client is created in the client registry, and under **Company Category**, select *Group consolidation*. The **company type** will then automatically be set to *Group consolidation*. Once the consolidation client is created, click on the client to access the **Start page**. Select **Start period** to enter the relevant financial year. Group Structure /periodandyear/help/group-consolidation/get-started/group-structure page 2025-03-05T17:27:27+01:00 # Group Structure ## Set up the Group Structure Under the menu **Companies** in the group, add the relevant companies to be included in the consolidated financial statements. You may **Add companies from Period & Year**, **Manually register** a company with an Excel import, or convert a client from **Finale Konsolidering**. * **Add Company - Companies from Period & Year** Tick the relevant client names in the Add Companies from Period & Year dialog box and click Add. * **Add Company - Manually Registered** Enter the company's registration number, company name, and click OK. * **Add company - Finale Konsolidering**

Export from Finale Konsolidering to Period and Year

Automatic update of Finale Konsolidering v37

Finale Konsolidering version 37 will, starting with update 3, include a function to export data to Period and Year. To receive automatic updates, it is enough to log in to the program. A message will appear stating that the update has been downloaded and is ready for installation. After this, it is necessary to close the program and start it again, in order to activate the update.

Finale Konsolidering can produce an exportfile (zip-file) with data from an opened client in Finale konsolidering. The file is automatically named by Finale Konsolidering as follows:

EXPnnnnn - yyyy - ‘client name’ - Finale Konsolidering.zip

nnnnn - is the client number in Finale Konsolidering
yyyy - is the year exported ‘client name’ - is the name of the client

To export the client, do the following:

  1. Open the client in Finale Konsolidering.
  2. Select Company - Export to Period and Year.
  3. Select the destination directory for the export file.
  4. Click on Export and wait for feedback that the client has been exported.
Created companies are displayed on the left of the screen. When a company is selected on the left side of the screen, the tabs Settings, Imported values, and Chart of Accounts are displayed. Under the **Settings** tab, the company's registration number and name are shown. > [!NOTE] If an imported client's registration number matches the registration number entered in the group consolidation client, it will be automatically checked as the parent company. Chart of accounts /periodandyear/help/group-consolidation/get-started/chart-of-accounts page 2025-03-05T17:27:27+01:00 # Chart of accounts ### Group Chart of Accounts The group has its own chart of accounts, which is automatically set up when establishing the financial year. The reference chart of accounts is automatically generated as the chart of accounts for the group, where all accounts in the group chart of accounts are automatically created. It is possible to change the group's chart of accounts subsequently, for example, where it is necessary to split an account into several parts for presentation in the annual report. ### Individual Company Charts of Accounts A significant change from Finale Consolidation is that Period & Year draws in the chart of accounts from the individual companies for both reports and eliminations. The chart of accounts operates at three different levels: * Company's account (linked to a group account) * Group account (linked to a reference account) * Reference account (controls the proposal for the accounting line in the annual report) Each account is automatically linked to a group account, but this linkage can be changed if needed, for example, if an account needs to be presented individually on an accounting line or if the automatic linkage does not become accurate. When importing companies from a client in Period & Year, the reference account from the client is used to assign a link to the group account. The affiliation may change in the group consolidation. When importing a chart of accounts from an Excel spreadsheet, the connection to a group account is assigned automatically based on the account number, but can be changed after importing the account. ### Importing Accounting values from Individual Companies Under the **Imported values** tab, the client's imported balances are displayed. The parent company will show the current year, the previous year, and the year before that balance if applicable. Subsidiaries will only show the import of the current year's trial balance. The **Chart of Accounts** tab shows the company's imported client account, reference account, and related group account according to the group chart of accounts, as well as the reference account for the group account. The relevant accounting line in the annual report is also displayed. Group accounts in the group chart of accounts are editable in this view so that the user can reassign a different group account if desired. Eleminations /periodandyear/help/group-consolidation/get-started/eleminations page 2025-03-11T07:43:19+01:00 # Eleminations ### Elimination Types The following elimination types are available in group consolidation: * Manual elimination * at group account level * at company chart of accounts level * Automatic elimination * at group account level * at company chart of accounts level * Minority Interests * Acquisitions and Excess Values ### Manual Elimination Manual elimination is direct registration of eliminations where an elimination is carried out with a fixed amount on a fixed account. Manual eliminations have the following options for carryforward to a new period: * Do not carry over to a new period * Carry over to new period with reset amounts * Carry over to a new period Manual elimination at company level involves selecting the company and then one of the company’s accounts on each posting line. The elimination will appear as part of the company's balance figures in the trial balance structure. The posting line will follow the company’s account. If the company's account is linked to another group account, the posting will follow the company’s account and affect the new group account. ### Manual Elimination at Group Account Level This elimination type is equivalent to manual elimination in Finale Consolidation. Upon import from Finale Consolidation, manual eliminations will be assigned this elimination type. The elimination is carried out directly in the group structure and will not be displayed as part of the balance figures for the individual group companies in the trial balance function. ### Automatic Elimination Automatic eliminations read the balance on the chosen account/company and nullify this by creating an elimination against a selected contra account. If the balance changes on the chosen account/company, the elimination automatically changes. The balance figures used for the elimination are the imported balance before eliminations. Automatic eliminations have the following options for carryforward to a new period: * Do not carry over to a new period * Carry over to new period Please note the following: An automatic elimination uses imported balance figures before all eliminations without considering other eliminations against the same account or group account. If automatic eliminations are set to use balance figures for an account, and another elimination is set up using balance figures from the same account, the same balance can be eliminated multiple times. ### Automatic Elimination at Company Level This elimination type involves choosing the company and then one of the company's accounts on each posting line. The elimination will appear as part of the company's balance figures in the trial balance structure. The posting line will follow the company's account. If the company's account is linked to another group account, the posting will follow the company's account and affect the new group account. The balance figure used is the company's balance before eliminations on the specified account. ### Automatic Elimination at Group Account Level This elimination type is equivalent to automatic elimination in Finale Consolidation. Upon import from Finale Consolidation, automatic eliminations will be assigned this elimination type. The elimination is carried out directly within the group structure and will not be displayed as part of the balance figures for the individual group companies in the trial balance function. By selecting a company on the elimination line, the elimination will use the account balance of this company. The amount will consist of the balance on all the company's accounts linked to the chosen group account. By not selecting a company on the elimination line, the elimination will use the account balance for all accounts linked to this group account for all companies within the group. The amount will consist of the balance on all company accounts linked to the selected group account. ### Elimination of minority interests Elimination of minority interests is done automatically based on the company accounts of the subsidiary by doing the following: * State that there are minority interests in the subsidiary * On the Minority interests tab, the minority's share in percentage of annual profit and equity is recorded. Based on this registration, an elimination is created, which is also shown on the Minority interests tab. ### Elimination of acquisitions and surplus values This elimination is based on a registration of: * Additional value in amount * Undepreciated surplus value at the beginning of the year * Depreciation of surplus value in percentage or annual amount * Tax percentage * Minority's share of surplus value Based on this information, an elimination is created. Please note that the counterpart entry to the elimination is equity. This means that, for example, when you create an elimination of the share value in a subsidiary with surplus value, you eliminate the share value as it will be when the surplus value is fully depreciated, i.e. against equity, so that the elimination of shares and acquisition transactions must be seen in context. ### Elimination of changes in dispositions and allocations When registering eliminations, a profit effect may occur that must be taken into account in order to make the allocation appropriate the entire annual profit and to make the balance sheet balance. An example of an elimination that can create such a difference is the elimination of intragroup profit if this is eliminated credit fixed assets and debit gain on disposal. This elimination creates an elimination with these two accounts involved: * Account with reference account 2050 Other retained earnings * Account with reference account 8960 To/from other retained earnings Trial balance /periodandyear/help/group-consolidation/trial-balance page 2025-03-05T17:27:27+01:00 # Trial balance ### General Under the menu point **Trial Balance**, the balance before and after eliminations for the entire group and each company within the group is displayed. This overview makes it easier to keep control over eliminations both at the company level and the group level. By clicking on the balance number on an account line, the specification of the balance and eliminations affecting the selected line can be viewed. ### Group Balance, Current Year's Figures Here the group chart of accounts shows the following columns: * Account number and account name from the group chart of accounts * Reference account * Balance before eliminations * Eliminations * Balance after eliminations ### Group Balance - Previous Year's Figures Under **Group Balance, consolidated** figures for previous years (and potentially two years back) are added by selecting the applicable year in the drop-down menu on the menu line. Click **Show All** to display manual fields where values can be entered. Importing consolidated balance from Excel is also an option if desired. It is only relevant to add previous year figures the first time it is used, since the figures will be rolled over to the following year. By exporting the balance figures first, an import file to Excel with columns is also generated for: * Account number * Account name * Line in the annual report * Balance for the year Thus, data can be registered at the financial line level by displaying the financial line on the account. ### Company Balance values Here only the balance figures for the current year at company level are displayed, with balance before eliminations, eliminations, and after eliminations. Here, it can be chosen whether the overview should be at the group account level or the account level of the individual account in the company. Balance figures for previous years are not displayed. By clicking the balance, a specification of the balance figures allocated to account number and eliminations can be viewed. Annual report /periodandyear/help/group-consolidation/annual-report page 2025-03-05T17:27:27+01:00 # Annual report Under the menu point **Annual Report**, it mainly displays the same elements you are accustomed to working with in the annual settlement module in Period & Year. However, some elements are specially adapted for the group consolidation module. **Settings for Annual Report** (gear icon) - new tab Group settings, where settings for the presentation of the annual report, internal order of notes, and selection of accounting rules are chosen. Under the tab Column Setup, there is a choice of what to present in the number columns for both the group and the parent company. Under settings, accounting principles are also selected for both the company and consolidated financial statements separately. **Financial Statements** - if a common financial statement layout for the group and parent company is chosen, the work view will show the composition of current and previous year's columns for both consolidated figures and the company's financial statements for the parent company. **Notes** - If a joint financial statement arrangement is chosen for both the consolidated financial statements and the company financial statements, each note can be adapted to indicate which part of the financial statements the note relates to. In the case of a separate consolidated financial statement, the note function will only apply to the consolidated statements. Furthermore, the note function generally includes the same functionalities as for the company financial statements in Period & Year. When preparing notes, it can be chosen for each note: * Common for the company's financial statements and consolidated financial statements * Specific information for the company's financial statements and consolidated financial statements respectively * Only for the company's financial statements * Only for consolidated financial statements **The cash flow statement** has functionality for both the parent company and for consolidated financial statements separately. If a common financial statement layout for consolidated figures and the company's financial statements is chosen, the work view will show the cash flow statement and variables for both consolidated figures and figures for the company's financial statements on the left side of the screen. The cash flow statement is presented collectively in the financial statements, while work on the cash flow statement is done separately for the company's financial statements and consolidated figures. It is possible to choose that the company's financial statements are performed separately on the parent company client along with the tax return, and that only the group company's financial statements are prepared in the group consolidation. Read more about [Annual report in year-end closing.](/periodandyear/help/taxation/annual-report) Reports /periodandyear/help/group-consolidation/reports page 2025-03-05T17:27:27+01:00 # Reports The following reports can be created for consolidated figures, possibly the company's financial statements and consolidated figures collectively: * Front page for the financial statements * Income statement * Balance sheet; assets * Balance sheet; equity and debt * Notes * Cash flow statement * Annual report * General assembly * Completeness declaration Other annual statement documents specifically for group consolidation and parent company: * Account specified annual report consolidated * Account specified annual report company's financial statements * Detailed cash flow statement consolidated * Detailed cash flow statement company's financial statements * Consolidated group overview * Consolidated group overview account specified * Eliminations * Eliminations per group account * Balance figures group companies * Balance figures group companies group chart of accounts * Account specification with eliminations * Submission to the Register of Financial Statements Submission /periodandyear/help/group-consolidation/submission page 2025-03-05T17:27:27+01:00 # Submission ## Submission to the Register of Company Accounts A company that has group consolidation will have two clients in Period & Year, one client for the tax return and one client for group consolidation. The submission of the annual financial statements is always done from the client for group consolidation. > [!NOTE] Separate accounts > It is possible to separate the parent company's statutory accounts and consolidated accounts and create reports separately. > >The submission of the annual financial statements to the register of company accounts is then done in the group consolidation client, but notes and the annual financial statements for the parent company's statutory accounts must be attached manually as file attachments in such cases. Read more about [Submission of annual report to Altinn.](/periodandyear/help/taxation/altinn/annual-report) Share register /periodandyear/help/share-register section Maintaining shareholders. Generate a book of shareholders. Reporting and submission of shareholder register statement. 2024-09-02T10:37:53+02:00 # Share register Maintaining shareholders. Generate a book of shareholders. Reporting and submission of shareholder register statement. Shareholder register is a function for maintaining a register of shareholders in a limited company. The information is used to generate a book of shareholders, as well as completing and reporting the forms RF-1086 and RF-1086U to Altinn. Get started with the share register /periodandyear/help/share-register/get-started section 2024-08-14T17:00:37+02:00 # Get started with the share register The shareholder register consists mainly of two main elements: - Share classes - Shareholders The maintenance of the information consists of recording events in the form of transactions on the share classes. Shareholder book and forms are automatically generated based on the recorded transactions. ## Get started 1. [Create class of share](/periodandyear/help/share-register/get-started/create-class-of-share). 2. [Register shareholders](/periodandyear/help/share-register/get-started/create-shareholders). 3. [Establish share capital](/periodandyear/help/share-register/get-started/establish-share-capital) with the transaction type **Foundation** (possibly **History**, if the whole history of the share class is not known). 4. [Record other events on the stock](/periodandyear/help/share-register/get-started/other-changes) such as buy / sell, dividend, etc. Create your first class of shares /periodandyear/help/share-register/get-started/create-class-of-share page 2024-08-14T17:00:37+02:00 # Create your first class of shares 1. Go to the **Share capital**section. 2. Select **Create Class of shares**. 3. Select the share class name from the **Name** drop-down list. 4. Record the denomination per share in the **Denomination** field. 5. Click on **Create**. The first transaction **Set denomination** appears in the list of transaction for the share class. To create multiple stock classes, select the plus symbol to the right of the new class of share, at the top left of the pane. Create shareholders /periodandyear/help/share-register/get-started/create-shareholders page 2024-12-05T10:02:21+01:00 # Create shareholders New shareholders are created in the **Shareholders** section. 1. Click on **New shareholder**. 2. Register the name of the shareholder. This can be a person or a company. 3. Register organisation number/personal identity number. 4. Register address, phone number and email. You can download shareholders to excel by clicking on the **Download shareholders to excel** - icon ![](./img/DownloadAsExcelIcon.PNG)in the upper right corner.

Import shareholders from excel

Click on the Import shareholders from excel –icon in the upper right corner to start the import wizard. The import requires the information to be in a specific format. A template can be downloaded from the dialog.

  1. Drop or browse for the excel file you want to import (*.xlsx or *.xls).
  2. Click Next to load and validate data.
  3. Select the rows you would like to import and click Import. Only valid rows can be selected. To fix an error, edit the excel file and open the import dialog again.
  4. Click Close to return to the main page.
> [!NOTE] First-time registration of foreign shareholders must be done manually in the shareholder register in Period and Year. Establishing of share capital /periodandyear/help/share-register/get-started/establish-share-capital page 2024-08-14T17:00:37+02:00 # Establishing of share capital ## Foundation This transaction is used when the whole history of the ownership of the share is known 1. Select **New transaction**. 2. Select the **Foundation** transaction. 3. Enter the date and time of foundation. 4. Enter the number of shares.

In the lower section, shareholders who own the share are registered.

5. Select shareholder in the **Shareholder** drop-down box. If the shareholder is not registered, this can be done by typing the name of the shareholder in the field and choosing **Create shareholder** in the menu that appears. 6. Indicate how many shares the shareholder owns in the **Increase in number of shares** field. 7. Enter cost price in the **Cost price** field. Share premium is calculated automatically. 8. Register multiple shareholders by pressing the green plus to the right. 9. Select **Save transaction** to save the transaction. ## History Use this transaction to start from a time when one knows the number of shares, share capital and ownership. Other changes in share capital / ownership / number of shares /periodandyear/help/share-register/get-started/other-changes page 2024-12-05T10:02:21+01:00 # Other changes in share capital / ownership / number of shares ## Purchase / sale of shares {#purchase-sale-of-shares} 1. Go to the **Share capital** section. 2. Select **New transaction**. 3. Enter the date of the transaction. 4. Enter the seller by selecting it from the drop-down list in the **Seller** field. 5. Enter the buyer by selecting it from the drop-down list in the **Buyer** field. 6. Enter the number of shares sold in the **Number of shares** field. 7. Select **Save transaction** in the lower right corner. If a shareholder sells to multiple buyers, multiple rows can be created with the same seller. The same applies if there are several who sell to the same shareholder. Touch the green plus icon to the right to create more rows in the lower section. ## Dividend 1. Go to the **Share capital** section. 2. Select **New transaction**. 3. Enter the date of the transaction. 4. Specify total yield. a. If there is an evenly distributed dividend (broken down by ownership), select **Update distribution table**. A list of all the shareholders of the share class in the lower section will be created and the amount of each shareholder will be calculated automatically (**Dividend amount** field). b. If there is a dividend to be distributed otherwise, specify the shareholders who will receive dividends in the lower section, as well as the type of dividend and amount. Click on the green plus symbol on the right to create new rows in the lower section. 5. Specify the type of dividend (usually **Dividend payout**). 6. Select **Save transaction** in the lower right corner. ## Pledge 1. Go to the **Share capital** section. 2. Select **New transaction**. 3. Enter the date of the transaction. 4. Select shareholder and enter number of shares to be pledged. 5. Enter information about the mortgagee. 6. Click on **Create distribution table** to create a list with all series the shareholder have. 7. Select **Save transaction** in the lower right corner. ## Other transactions The shareholder register offers functionality for the most common movements. To find the right transaction type, you can use the search function in the **New transaction** function. 1. Go to the **Share capital** section. 2. Select **New transaction**. 3. Type in the search box to search for transaction types. The list of transactions is updated as you type. 4. Select the desired transaction and fill in the required information. 5. Select **Save transaction**. ## Delete transaction 1. Go to the **Share capital** section. 2. Select the transaction to delete. 3. In the details pane, select **Delete transaction** in the bottom left. ## Change of previously registered transactions If an earlier transaction changes, later transactions must be approved again. A yellow alert triangle will appear on the first transaction that must be approved. If there are several subsequent transactions, all must be re-approved in order. If a change causes a subsequent transaction to contain errors, such as a shareholder selling a share that he or she does not own, a red warning icon appears on the transaction, so the transaction must be changed or recalculated. Book of shareholders /periodandyear/help/share-register/book-of-shareholders page 2024-12-05T10:02:21+01:00 # Book of shareholders ## View and download Shareholder book for today\'s date in PDF format 1. Go to the **Reports** section. 2. In the left pane, select **Shareholder** book. The date of the day is set as default. 3. Select **Download** in the lower right corner. A PDF file is downloaded to the browser\'s download area. The file name will be "Shareholder Book per yyyy-mm-dd.pdf, where yyyy-mm-dd is the chosen date. It is possible to produce a shareholder book for a date other than today\'s. If so, enter the desired date at the top of the list of reports and forms. Select **Detailed shareholder book** to see a shareholder book with some more details. Form RF-1086 / RF-1086U /periodandyear/help/share-register/forms page 2024-08-14T17:00:37+02:00 # Form RF-1086 / RF-1086U Each class of shares forms the basis for an instance of RF-1068. In addition, for each share class there will be one instance of RF-1086 per shareholder. The collection of form instances shown in the list applies to the year specified in the left-hand summary in the **Reports** section. ## View an instance of a form 1. Go to the **Reports** section. 2. In the left pane, select the desired form instance. The current tax year is standard, but it can be changed by typing another year in the box to the right of RF-1086 Shareholder Register Statement. ## Enter contact for RF-1086 1. Go to the **Reports** section. 2. Select **Contact person** in the overview to the left. 3. Enter the contact information. It is also possible to specify an alternate contact person in the same registration image, but this is not required when reporting to Altinn. Submission /periodandyear/help/share-register/altinn page 2024-08-14T17:00:37+02:00 # Submission ## Submit RF-1086 and sub-form RF-1086U to Altinn 1. Go to the **Submission** section. The list on the left shows the reporting obligations that are available for reporting to Altinn. 2. Select the current task in the list on the left. 3. Enter the **Computer SystemID** and associated **Password**. This information is obtained by registering in the Altinn portal. See guidelines for this in the portal. 4. Select the preferred shipping method: 5. **Complete shipment with signature** - The shipment is sent in as complete and signed. No changes can be made in Altinn after submission. 6. **Complete shipment** - The shipment is sent in as complete. No changes can be made in Altinn after submission, only signing. 7. **Not complete** - The shipment is sent to Altinn as incomplete. You can then add more information in the Altinn portal before the final signing / submission step in the Altinn portal. 8. Select **Send to Altinn**. 9. Wait for feedback from Altinn. In case of errors in the shipment, feedback is given. Settings /periodandyear/help/settings section Edit accounting year. Import year-end closing data. Maintain chart of accounts. Change company settings and reconcilication period. 2024-09-02T10:37:53+02:00 # Settings Edit accounting year. Import year-end closing data. Maintain chart of accounts. Change company settings and reconcilication period. Choose the area you want to learn more about. Settings /periodandyear/help/settings/import-data page 2025-04-25T12:17:37+02:00 # Settings You can import accounting data into Period & Year by clicking on the button **Import accounting data** on the start page, or on the page **Settings - Settings**. >[!TIP] >When you import accounting data from **Settings - Settings** you can also choose to **Drag and drop** a SIE, Excel or SAF-T file to start the import.. > This page also shows you the status of the import. When an import is complete, you will see this in the column **Status** in the grid. ## Financial years On the **Financial years** page, all existing financial years for the customer are displayed. Here, you can create, edit and delete financial years. The financial years are created automatically when you import the accounting data. You can edit the start and end date of a financial year by selecting **Edit**. This can be useful for example when the financial year is changed in the ERP system or if the company is to be liquidated. >[!NOTE] Forhåndsfastsetting >If a company is to be liquidated, a preliminary determination can be made in Period & Year. > >This is done under **Settings - Financial years**. Click on the edit pen for the period to be pre-determined, enter the current end date and check the box for the company to be pre-determined. Please note that periods after the specified date will be deleted permanently. > >The date for preliminary determination must be set before opening the Year-end closing period. > >- Start date can be changed for the first financial year > >- End date can be changed for the last financial year > >- If you have only one year you can edit both the start and end date, but not at the same time If you want to delete a financial year, select **Delete**. When deleting a financial year all data connected to that year will be removed. You can only delete the last year. ## Reset accounting data If you need to reset the accounting data, you can do that here. This enables you to experiment and try the different functions of the service freely, and then easily restore the company to the original version without having to set up the company again. When you reset the data all accounting data is deleted and you need to import the original data again from desired import source, such as eAccounting, a SIE4 file or a SAF-T file. Manually added data, for example journal entries, checks or appendices, will be permanently deleted. To reset the data click the button **Reset**. The status can be seen in the grid. Once the resetting of the data is complete, you can import the original data again.

Only users with admin user privileges can reset client data. Read more about User administration.

## Import year-end data from previous year When you start a new year-end closing period, relevant information in **Information and tax**, **Tax forms** and **Annual report** will automatically be imported to the new year. This mainly concerns the outgoing values that are needed for the coming year and relevant information that is reused from the previous year. You can check that the import is complete by clicking on **Activity Log** in the left menu to see that it has status done. If the period has already been started, you can select **Import year-end data from previous year**, **Period & Year** and click on the **Import** button to import relevant information. ## Import year end data from Altinn (New format) You can import year-end closing data from Altinn in Period & Year. This mainly concerns outgoing values ​​that are necessary for the coming year and relevant information that is reused from the previous year. Read more about [Import of historical data on new clients](/periodandyear/help/client/client-companies/startguide-import). Information from the following topics in the tax return and business specification will be imported. Any manually registered data in Period & Year will be overwritten during import. Tax return/Company tax return - Income and deficit - Loss carryforward (Limited company) - Group contributions (Limited company) - Business - Client information/Primary industries (Sole proprietorship) - Business income distribution (Sole proprietorship) - Personal income (Sole proprietorship) - Specification of matters relevant to taxation - Financial products (Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Rights to forest property (Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Information about tax subject/company with participant determination - Various information, Client information (Sole proprietorship, Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Power plant - Hydroelectric plant (Sole proprietorship, Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Real estate - Property (Limited company) - Method for avoiding double taxation -Credit deduction (Limited company) - Wealth and income in a company with participant determination - Participant in a partnership (Aksjeselskap mv og Deltakerfastsatt (ANS, DA, KS mv)) - Shipping tax scheme - Shipping company taxation (Limited company) - Limitation of interest deductions within the group and between related parties - Limitation of interest deduction (Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Ownership - Participant (Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) Busienss specification - Specification of fixed asset - Taxable depreciation (Sole proprietorship, Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Profit- and loss account (Sole proprietorship, Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Use of car (Sole proprietorship and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Separate fixed assets in hydroelectric power plants (Sole proprietorship, Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Fixed assets under construction (Sole proprietorship, Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Other specification of balance sheet - Conditionally allocated gain (Sole proprietorship, Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Difference between accounting and tax value - Values ​​for temporary differences (Sole proprietorship, Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Business - Client information (Sole proprietorship, Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Specification of working capital - Accounts receivable (Sole proprietorship, Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Goods (Sole proprietorship, Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Other conditions - Accommodation and public house (Sole proprietorship, Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Taxi and cargo transport businesses (Sole proprietorship, Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) - Forestry - Forestry information and timber account (Sole proprietorship) - Aquaculture business - Aquaculture (Sole proprietorship, Limited company and Participant-taxed (ANS, DA, KS etc.)) ### Import from Altinn 1. Import Accounting data. Read more about [Import accounting data](/periodandyear/help/start-page/import). 2. From the start page, start the year-end closing period you want to import to. 3. Go to **Settings - Import data - Import year-end data from previous year**. 4. Select source **Altinn**. 5. Click on the button **Set** to setup your Altinn credentials. 6. Click **OK** 7. Click **Search Altinn archive**.

To search the Altinn archive for company type Sole proprietorship, you also need the proprietor social security number.

8. Select submissions to import and click **Import**. 9. After completed import year-end data from Altinn will be available in **Information and tax**. Read more about [Information and tax for impersonal company category](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal) / [Information and tax for personal company category](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal) / [Information and tax for particiapant taxed company category](/periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed). ## Import year end data from other systems (RF-forms) > [!WARNING] Import from old format (RF-tax forms) > Import from old format is not supported in year-end closing 2024. > > Except information from: > >- Share register - Share classes, shareholders, number of shares and nominal value (if Share Register in Period & Year has not been used previously). >- Housing - Housing information (Condominium flat owner and Housing cooperative). > > Import in new format is only supported with import source Altinn. You can import year-end closing data from other systems to Period & Year. This mainly concerns the outgoing values that are needed for the coming year and relevant information that is reused from the previous year. Read more about [Import of historical data on new clients](/periodandyear/help/client/client-companies/startguide-import). Information from the following tax forms/additional information is imported. Any manually registered data in Period & Year will be overwritten. - RF-1028 - Specification of housing and housing units in housing associations, Forward losses (Limited companies) - RF-1084 - Taxable depreciations (Sole proprietorships and limited companies) - RF-1098 - Property (Limited companies) - RF-1016 - Forest property (Limited companies) - RF-1167 - Goods, Account receivables, Auditor, Accounting office (Sole proprietorships and limited companies) - RF-1175 - Goods, Account receivables, Auditor, client information/Primary industries, Business income distribution (Sole proprietorships) - RF-1122 - Accommodations- and restaurants (Sole proprietorships and limited companies) - RF-1124 - Personal income (Sole proprietorships) - RF-1125 - Use of car (Sole proprietorships and limited companies) - RF-1151 - Power plant owner -- summary for all power plants (Limited companies) - RF-1152 - Specific fixed assets in power generation facilities -- depreciations and upgrades (Limited companies) - RF-1153 -Taxation of hydropower plants (Limited companies) - RF-1177 - Forestry information and timber account (Sole proprietorships) - RF-1206 - Group contribution (limited companies) - RF-1217 - Specification of differences between accounting and tax values (Sole proprietorships and limited companies) - RF-1219 - Profit-/loss account (Sole proprietorships and limited companies) - RF-1223 - Taxi and cargo transport businesses (Sole proprietorships and limited companies) - RF-1359 - Financial products (Limited companies) - Fixed asset register - (Sole proprietorships and limited companies) - Shareholder register - Share classes, shareholders, number of shares and face value (if the shareholder register in Period & Year has not been used before.) - Housing - Housing information (Condominium flat owner and Housing cooperative)

Before you can start an import, you must create the correct accounting year in Period & Year. Read more about Import accounting data.

To import data, go to **Settings - Import data - Import year-end data from previous year**. Read more about [Import of historical data on new clients](/periodandyear/help/client/client-companies/startguide-import). ## Visma Finale (RF-forms) 1. Import Accounting data. Read more about [Import accounting data](/periodandyear/help/start-page/import). 2. From the start page, start the year-end closing period you want to import to. 3. Go to **Settings - Import data - Import year-end data from previous year**. 4. Select source **Visma Finale**. 5. Click on the button to select **Visma Finale Backup file** for import.

The name of the file is on the form ‘EXPnnnnn.ZIP’, where nnnnn is the number of the client in Visma Finale Årsoppgjør. The file is located in the destination folder for the backup files.

6. Click on the button **Import** to start the import.

You can check that the import is complete by clicking on Activity Log in the left menu to see that it has status done.

7. After completed import, year-end data from Visma Finale will be available in **Information and tax**. Read more about [Information and tax for impersonal company category](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal) / [Information and tax for personal company category](/periodandyear/help/taxation/personal) / [Information and tax for particiapant taxed company category](/periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed). ## Visma Total (RF-forms) 1. Import Accounting data. Read more about [Import accounting data](/periodandyear/help/start-page/import). 2. From the start page, start the year-end closing period you want to import to. 3. Go to **Settings - Import data - Import year-end data from previous year**. 4. Select source **Visma Total**. 5. Click on the button to select **Visma Total common file** for conversion.

The name on the file is ‘fellesdata21.twd21’ for import to year-end closing 2022.

>[!TIP] The Visma Total files are located in the client folder of the current client you want to convert. If you are unsure where Visma Total is installed on your machine, you can right-click on the client in the client register and select "Explorer". You will then automatically be navigated to the correct installation area for the client folder to see where the current files are located. 6. Click on the button to select **Visma Total client file** for import.

The name of the file is ’totas21.twd21’ or ’totpn21.twd21’ for conversion to year-end closing 2022.

7. Click on the button **Import** to start the import.

You can check that the import is complete by clicking on Activity Log in the left menu to see that it has status done.

8. After completed import, year-end data from Visma Total will be available in **Information and tax**. Read more about [Information and tax for impersonal company category](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal) / [Information and tax for personal company category](/periodandyear/help/taxation/personal) / [Information and tax for particiapant taxed company category](/periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed). Chart of accounts /periodandyear/help/settings/chart-of-accounts page 2025-04-25T12:17:37+02:00 # Chart of accounts In the clients chart of accounts, you can see which accounts that have been imported into Period & Year, and to which reference account it has been linked. You also set the VAT type and VAT percentage. When adding a new account, the program will suggest the appropriate settings for the account after mapping it to a reference account. > [!NOTE] Mapping of reference account with ERP import > Period & Year automatically suggests linking to a reference account with different priorities depending on whether a client account has been manually created in Period & Year, or whether it is imported from an import source. > >When manually creating a client account in Period & Year, the reference account is linked based on the following priority: > >1. Reference chart of accounts >2. Import source mapping >3. Period & Year mapping > >Read more about [Import of accounting data.](/periodandyear/help/start-page/import) If you wish to change the settings, click on the pen icon in the column **Edit**. ## Alternate placement of accounts Depending on whether they have a credit or a debit balance, certain accounts will be placed as either assets or liabilities in **Year-end closing - Financial statements - Balance sheet**. Those of the company\'s accounts that are connected to any of the reference accounts listed below, will automatically get this alternate placement in the balance sheet by default. | Account | Account name | Alternative reference account | Account name | |----|----|----|----| | 1920 | Bankinskudd | 2380 | Kassakreditt | | 2510 | Betalbar skatt, fastsatt | 1576 | Fordring på skatt | | 2740 | Oppgjørskonto merverdiavgift | 1579 | Tilgode mervediavgift | | 2380 | Kassakreditt | 1920 | Bankinskudd | | 1576 | Fordring på skatt | 2510 | Betalbar skatt, fastsatt | | 1579 | Tilgode mervediavgift | 2740 | Oppgjørskonto merverdiavgift | You can update these settings under **Maintenance - Chart of accounts** by selecting the pen icon for the corresponding row, select the **Alternative reference account** checkbox and set the desired account. ## VAT settings for transaction analysis | VAT type | Description | |----|----|----|----| | Creates output VAT | Accounts that generate output VAT (for example sales). When an account with this setting is in a journal entry, another account with setting **Output VAT** shall also be in the journal entry. The amount on the account with setting **Output VAT** shall be a certain percentage of the amount booked on the account with setting **Creates output VAT**. If 0% is entered, the account is handled as exempt from VAT.| | Creates input VAT | Accounts that generate input VAT (for example purchases). When an account with this setting is in a journal entry, another account with setting **Input VAT** shall also be in the journal entry. The amount on the account with setting **Input VAT** shall be a certain percentage of the amount booked on the account with setting **Creates input VAT**. If 0% is entered, the account is handled as exempt from VAT.| | Output VAT | Accounts defined as output VAT. | | Input VAT | Accounts defined as input VAT. | | VAT reconciliation | A journal entry that includes an account with this setting shall be ignored by the VAT check. When an account with this setting is included in a journal entry, it is not a sale or a purchase, but an accounting entry that always is recorded at the end of the reconciliation period.| | No VAT | **No VAT** is used for accounts with one of the standard VAT types, that should not be included in the VAT check for a particular customer. When **No VAT** is selected, the VAT type is removed.| Company information /periodandyear/help/settings/company-information section 2024-09-30T16:52:08+02:00 # Company information Under **Settings - Company information** you find general information about the customer, such as customer name, customer type and address information. You can also change reporting period here. This is also where you can change selected accounting obligation or edit setting for generating system vouchers.

By disabling the system voucher functionality, all vouchers created by Period & Year will be deleted for the ongoing period.

 Change reporting period /periodandyear/help/settings/company-information/change-reporting-period page 2025-04-25T12:17:37+02:00 # Change reporting period Under **Settings - Company information** you can change reporting period. It is possible to change reporting period from **Monthly**, which is the default option, to **Bimonthly**, **Quarter** or **Four-month period** when working with period closing in Period & Year. Note that the reporting period always is **Year** if you only have activated year-end closing. If that is the case, there are no settings for changing the reporting period under ****Settings - Company information****. How to change reporting periods: 1. Go to **Settings - Company information**. Choose for instance **Bimonthly** under **Reporting period**. 2. Click on **Save**. If the period is ongoing, the change will be valid from the nextcoming two month period. If you, for example, have started January and then change to bimonthly reporting, the change will take effect in Q2, starting in March. When the financial year is equal to the calendar year and bimonthly reporting is selected, the reporting periods will be January-February, March-April, May-June, July-August, September-October and November-December.

Note that the VAT period will be updated accordingly when you change reporting periods.

If you select bimonthly reporting, the VAT period will also be changed to bimonthly (if it is not already selected).

Important

By selecting quarterly or four-monthly period, the menu option VAT & fees will be hidden as these reporting periods cannot always be combined with the VAT periods reported on the client.

If you are working with shortened and broken financial years and select bimonthly reporting, the reporting periods will coincide with the calendar year (January-February, March-April, May-June, July-August, September-October and November-December). Impersonal non-taxable companies /periodandyear/help/settings/company-information/non-taxable-companies page 2024-12-13T07:57:26+01:00 # Impersonal non-taxable companies Impersonal businesses that are not liable for tax and therefore do not need to complete and submit tax return with business specification and supporting documentation, but that still may need to prepare and submit annual report/public accounts with notes can use a simplified user interface. Companies that this relates to can be, for example: - Housing cooperatives - Condominium flat owner - Association/Club/Organisations - Certain companies are exempt from tax liability under specific provisions in the Tax Act In **Settings - Company information** the **Tax rate** can be changes to *Not taxable (0%)*. Period & Year will then get a simplified user interface where all items related to tax values and calculations are hidden. >[!NOTE] > This option is reversible so that areas will reappear if the company’s tax status is changed back to taxable. This means that the following main elements are removed on the specific company: In Tax Information: - Various information - Area selector (all areas except the Fixed Assets Register are removed) - Tax calculation - Financial statements - Wealth - Tax return In Checks: - Tax return - Business specification - Reconciliation of fixed assets - Reconciliation of equity - Taxes and allocations In Reports: - The entire section for tax returns and business specifications - Account-specific financial statements (business specification) - Temporary differences - Tax calculation for limited liability companies - From book value to taxable result - Wealth - Checklist for tax information In Innsending: - Skattemelding The Fixed Assets Register can only be used for accounting treatment of assets when this setting is activated. It is not possible to link objects in the fixed assets register to forms for tax depreciation. Administration /periodandyear/help/administration section Create accounting office templates for automatic checks and reconciliation plan. 2024-09-30T16:52:08+02:00 # Administration Create accounting office templates for automatic checks and reconciliation plan. In **Administration** you can do actions for multiple customers in your accounting office. You go there by clicking the **Person** -icon in the top right corner and select **Administration**. ![](./img/administration.JPG) In **Administration - Templates**, you can create templates for your own automatic checks or manage templates for reconciliation that you can use for one or several of your accounting office\'s customers. Templates for auto checks /periodandyear/help/administration/templates-for-auto-checks section 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Templates for auto checks In **Administration - Templates for auto checks** you create and maintain templates for your own sets of auto checks that you want to use for your customers. You can base your templates on standard checks for either impersonal or personal (**Company category**) or a customers setup of auto checks (**Customer**). Once you have created a template, you select the checks to include and what customers should be connected to the template. When you create the template, a number of standard checks are included which you can choose to have active or inactivate but you can also create your own auto checks. You can also set a default template for new customers. In the table on the page, the name of the template is displayed, along with the customer type and the number of customers currently using it. On the right hand side, in the **Status** column, the template status is displayed. The icons indicates the following: | Icon | Description | |--------------|-------------| | Red icon | The template has not been applied for all customers. There are customers added to the template but the template isn’t applied so therefore the template is not in use on these customers. | | Orange icon | The template is not updated for all customers. There are changes made to the template and those are not updated for the customers that use the template. | | Green icon | The template is updated for all customers. | By clicking the template name in the **Name** column, you will enter an edit mode where you can see more information about the template. When clicking a row in the **Number of customers** column, the customers currently using the template are displayed. Create template /periodandyear/help/administration/templates-for-auto-checks/create-new-template page 2024-09-30T16:52:08+02:00 # Create template 1. Select **Administration - Templates - Templates for auto checks**. 2. Select **New template**. 3. Name the template. 4. Select if you want to base your template on either **Company category** or **Customer**.

For Company category, you can select either Impersonal ,Personal or Participant taxed. Depending on what type of category you select, you will get different sets of auto checks. The list of auto checks is displayed to the right.

If you select Customer you will get the same customer type as on the customer and the default checks and the autochecks that was created on the customer will be included in the template.

5. Select **Save** or **Save and edit**. When **Save** option is selected, the list of templates is displayed. If **Save and edit** is selected, the **Auto checks** tab will open and you can edit the template riqht away. When you have created a template the next step is to set the checks to include in the template and what customers it should be used for. To edit a template, you click the template name in the template list. A screen is displayed with the tabs **[Auto checks](/periodandyear/help/administration/templates-for-auto-checks/edit-template-autochecks)**, **[Customers](/periodandyear/help/administration/templates-for-auto-checks/edit-template-customers)** and **[Properties](/periodandyear/help/administration/templates-for-auto-checks/edit-template-properties)**. Auto checks, templates /periodandyear/help/administration/templates-for-auto-checks/edit-template-autochecks page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Auto checks, templates In the **Administration - Templates - Templates for auto checks - Auto checks** tab, you can see all checks that the template contains. The default checks that is a part of the program are marked with a padlock. In the template you can adjust which of the default checks that you want to use by disabling the ones that you don't find useful. You do this by selecting the icon in the **Action** column and select **Disable**. From here, you can also copy an existing check. To create your own check for this template, select **Create check**. In the appearing screen, you enter the check type, name and a description. When clicking **Next**, you will be prompted to enter information depending on the type of check it is. The checks you create by yourself are possible to delete from the template.

In the topic Check settings, you can read about what check types are available.

The auto checks created in the template cannot be changed or deleted when they are visible for a customer.

 Customers, templates /periodandyear/help/administration/templates-for-auto-checks/edit-template-customers page 2024-09-30T16:52:08+02:00 # Customers, templates In **Administration - Templates - Templates for auto checks - Customers** tab, you select what customers the template should be connected to. The icons in the **Status** column indicates the status of the template for each customer. | | | |:------------|:---------------------------------------------------| | Red icon | The template has not been applied to the customer. | | Orange icon | The template is not updated on the customer. | | Green icon | The template is updated on the customer. | ## Connect the template to a customer 1. Select **Show all customers** in the upper right corner. All customers with the same company type as the template will be displayed in the list. 2. Select one or several customers you want to connect the template to. 3. Select **Add**. The customer will be added to the list of customers that uses the template. 4. Select **Apply**. When applying the template to the selected customers, the auto checks in the template are pushed out to these customers. They are added to the current and future financial years. The following happens: - Default checks that are disabled in the template will also be disabled for the customer under **Transaction analysis - Auto checks - Check settings**. The default checks are included in the program and read only. - The auto checks that are added in the template are added on the customer under **Transaction analysis - Auto checks - Check settings**. These are read only and administered by the accounting office when they are visible on the customer. - The auto checks that are added on the customer are not affected by the template (Custom auto checks). - When the template is in use for a customer, it will not be possible to change the check status from enabled to disabled on the customer. This can only be changed under **Administration - Templates - Templates for auto checks**. ## Remove the template from a customer 1. Select the customer for which you want to remove the template. 2. Select **Remove**.

A control question is displayed where you must confirm that you want to remove the template from the customer/customers.

The default auto checks and auto checks created on the customer (custom auto checks) are not affected.

 Properties, templates /periodandyear/help/administration/templates-for-auto-checks/edit-template-properties page 2024-08-14T17:00:37+02:00 # Properties, templates In **Administration - Templates - Templates for auto checks - Properties** tab, you will see general information about your template. Here, the template name, the type of customer it is used for and how many customers it is connected to is displayed. If desired, you can change the name of the template here. If you want the template to be used as default for new customers, select **Default template for new customers**. It is only possible to delete a template when it is no longer connected to a customer. If any customers are connected to the template, **Delete** in the bottom left of the page will be inactive. Templates for reconciliation plan /periodandyear/help/administration/templates-for-reconciliation section 2024-09-30T16:52:08+02:00 # Templates for reconciliation plan The purpose of the reconciliation plan is to allow users to define how frequently an account should be reconciled. This is done using various reconciliation templates that are linked to different clients, and thus providing users with a reconciliation plan per client. The following system templates are included in Period & Year: - System template (impersonal) - System template (personal) - System template (participant-determined) The system templates are read-only and maintained by Visma Software. To access and manage templates, an **Admin user** can log in to any Period & Year client and click on the **Person** -icon in the top right corner and select **Administration**: ![](./img/administration.JPG) Manage templates /periodandyear/help/administration/templates-for-reconciliation/manage-templates page 2024-09-30T16:52:08+02:00 # Manage templates Under **Reconciliation**, you will be able to create new templates, edit existing ones, and link different templates to different clients. When opening for the first time, only system templates will be visible. Here you can click **New Template** to create custom templates.

Startguide - select reconciliation plan on new clients

When setting up new clients, the startguide will suggest a predefined template. This can be overridden to ‘None’ or one of the other available templates.

As you create more templates and link them to clients, the **Overview** of all templates will show information about the company category and the number of clients linked per template. Each template has 3 tabs: **Reconciliation Template**, **Clients**, and **Properties**. ### Reconciliation Template Each reconciliation template is divided by functionality for frequency and display options at the account group and/or account level. There are 4 options for frequency: - Monthly - Bi-monthly - Semi-annual - Annual (last accounting month of the fiscal year) > [!NOTE] The year-end period does not use the reconciliation template. There are 4 display options: - **Balance changed** - The balance has changed since the previous period. - **Balance or movement** - The balance may be the same, but there has been movement in the account during the period specified as the frequency. - **Always** - The account is always displayed. - **Never** - The account is never displayed. (If there is a balance, the account will be visible during the year-end period.) > [!NOTE] New reference accounts will automatically be updated into the accounting office’s custom templates. ### Clients In this view, you can see an overview of all clients linked or not linked to a template. Note that there are various filter options to make it easier to filter and move multiple clients between templates. This workspace is also used to remove a client from a template. ### Properties Under **Properties**, you will find general information about the template. You can set the template to inactive, provided that it is not linked to any clients. You can also allow transaction analysis to override which accounts should be displayed for reconciliation in **Reconciliation BS**. This means that if the transaction analysis detects a deviation in an account that is not defined in the reconciliation plan, it will become visible in the reconciliation window, marked with a red circle and exclamation point. > [!NOTE] *Preselected template* for new clients can only be activated for one template per company category.\ A preselected template is the one suggested when creating a new client from the startguide. Read more about [Reconciliaiton plan.](/periodandyear/help/taxation/reconciliation-bs/overview/reconciliation-plan) Client registry /periodandyear/help/client section Create client companies. Up-/downgrade clients. Administration of users and groups. Update year-end status. 2024-09-02T10:37:53+02:00 # Client registry Create client companies. Up-/downgrade clients. Administration of users and groups. Update year-end status. The client registry in Period & Year gives you an overview of all client companies that you are working with. You can easily access an existing client in Period & Year by searching and clicking on the company name to start it. This is also where you can create new client companies and where you add new users and administrate user access. Read more in the topics below: Client companies /periodandyear/help/client/client-companies section 2025-04-07T14:35:23+02:00 # Client companies In **client companies** you will find all Period & Year clients that you have access to. You can search by company name at the top of the page to locate a specific client.

You can download client companies to excel by clicking on the Download client companies to excel –button in the upper right corner.

To go to the start page in Period & Year, click on the link on the company name. ![](./img/Clientcompanies.PNG) Create client company : You can create client companies in Period & Year by clicking on the **Create client company** button in the menu **Client companies**.You can choose between **Manually\...** or **Based on Altinn\...**. : If you select manually a dialogue will open and you can choose to create the client by, : - searching in **brreg.no**. - creating the client manually. :

If the client is created by searching in brreg.no, client information will be filled according to registered information in brreg.no after you select a company and click next.

: If you select **Based on Altinn** a dialogue will open where you are asked to log in with your Altinn username (SSN) and Altinn password to be able to select which clients that should be created. : ## Package type : Depending on which Period & Year functionality your client company need, you can select and activate different packages. : The following packages are available, : - Year end - Year end plus - Period closing - Complete :

The available package type is controlled by the selected company type. This means that some company types within the same category, due to differences in reporting, only have access to Period closing.

: Read more about our [packages.](https://www.periodear.no/priser/) : ## Assigned groups : If you are using other groups than, All clients it is optional to assign a new client company to one or multiple groups when you create it. :

New clients is by default always added to the group All clients.

: Groups can be created by admin users in **Group administration**. : Read more about [groups.](/periodandyear/help/client/my-accounting-office/group-administration) Edit client company : To edit a client company, simply hover over the client company in the list with clients in menu **Client companies** and click the ![](./img/16_edit.png)pen-icon. : A dialogue will open and you can edit the selected clients information. : ## Terminate agreement on existing clients : For admin users the package type drop-down is enabled. By selecting Terminate agreement in the package type drop down. You will be able to end the Period & Year subscription for the selected client. If you terminate an agreement, you will have read only access to previous data. But you will be unable to edit any data on this client. ![](./img/TerminateAgreementDialog.PNG) Click **Terminate Period & Year** to confirm the change and finally click **Save** to complete the termination. : To see terminated clients in the **Client companies** menu, select Include inactive at the bottom right corner to also show clients that has been terminated. : ## Choose a different package type on existing clients : For admin users the package type drop-down is enabled. By selecting a different package type on your client, you will downgrade to a smaller package or upgrade to a larger one. :If you upgrade, you will gain access to the new functionality immediately. If you downgrade, you will still have read only access to previous work. But you will be unable to access the more advanced features in newer periods. ![](./img/ChangePackageType.png) Click **Change package** to confirm the change and finally click **Save** to complete the downgrade/upgrade. : Read more about our [packages.](https://www.visma.no/regnskapsbyra/arsoppgjor/pakker-og-priser/) Import of historical data /periodandyear/help/client/client-companies/startguide-import page 2025-03-20T15:39:56+01:00 # Import of historical data You can import historical data based on the tax return and business specification from Altinn into Period & Year by selecting import source in the start guide on new clients. In addition to a simple chart of account and trial balance based on the business specification for previous year, will information from the tax return and business specification be converted. Read more in [Settings.](periodandyear/help/settings/import-data/#import-year-end-data-from-altinn-new-format)

The imported trial balance can be edited by opening Import status and clicking on Edit balances on the start page.

## Altinn 1. From the start guide select historical import source **Altinn**. 2. Log in to the id-portal and accept that Period & Year can read content in archive. 3. Click **Search Altinn archive**.

To search the Altinn archive for company type Sole proprietorship, you also need the proprietor social security number.

4. Select submissions to import and click **Continue**.

A small chart of accounts and trial balance for previous year is automatically imported into Period & Year and when the import is completed you will see a locked year with historical data on the start page. The accounting year is locked automatically but imported data will be used in the year-end rotation.

5. Click on **Set up import source** to select ERP source for the current year. Read more about [Import accounting data.](/periodandyear/help/start-page/import) 6. After completed import and once the year-end period is started, data from Altinn will be year rotated and available in **Information and tax**. Read more about [Information and tax for impersonal company category](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal) / [Information and tax for personal company category](/periodandyear/help/taxation/personal) / [Information and tax for particiapant taxed company category](/periodandyear/help/taxation/participant-taxed). Client with deviating fiscal years /periodandyear/help/client/client-companies/deviating-accounting-year page 2024-09-30T16:52:08+02:00 # Client with deviating fiscal years In Period & Year, deviating fiscal years are only solved with one client, which is used both for preparing annual financial statements and later submission of tax information. This is in contrast to Total, which used two different clients to achieve the same. ## Steps ### Submission of tax information based on previously prepared annual financial statements (2022/2023) This step consists of: - Importing previous information from Finale or Total in the start guide - Verification / adjustment of tax information - Submission of tax return and business specification > [!NOTE] If this step is to be carried out, it is necessary for it to be completed BEFORE the preparation of a new annual financial statement begins. ### Preparation of a new year-end closing (2023/2024) This step consists of: Locking of previous year-end closing : Before starting the process for 2023/2024, the existing annual financial statements (2022/2023) must be locked. This is done on the start page. It can be unlocked later if necessary. Setting ERP source and importing 2024 : If Finale or Total were used as the data source for the 2023 annual financial statements, a new ERP system must now be specified, for example, Visma Business. Then, you can import via the import button on the start page. : The ERP system defines the subsequent fiscal year upon import. It is therefore assumed that the ERP contains the correct definition of the fiscal year, for example, 01.03.2023 - 29.02.2024. If the ERP does not contain the correct fiscal year and this cannot be adjusted, file-based Excel import must be used instead. The fiscal year\'s division (date from to) is specified there. : Read more about [Import accounting data.](/periodandyear/help/start-page/import) Year rotation of historical data : During the initial setup of the year-end closing after importing ERP data, the year rotation of historical data from the previous year\'s year-end closing will be performed. This process may take some time and occurs in the background after entering the client. Preparation of year-end closing : The preparation of year-end closing is carried out in the usual manner. : Read more about [Information and tax for impersonal company category.](/periodandyear/help/taxation/impersonal) Submission of annual reports : Submission of annual report is done in the usual manner once the year-end closing is finalized. > [!NOTE] Further future work with tax return > > When the Tax Administration has completed the tax return and industry specification for 2024 at a later date (in January 2025), and Period & Year opens for the submission of this, the same client that has been worked on should also be used for this purpose.\" > > An upgrade of the tax images to the 2024 version will then be performed. In normal cases, this will happen automatically, but some control work should be expected to ensure that areas that have been revised by the Tax Administration remain correct after the upgrade. Additionally, any program enhancements in Period & Year for the new annual version may have some impact.\" #### Transition from/to deviating fiscal year There are different regulations related to the length of fiscal years in annual financial statements and tax returns/industry specifications. Even if the fiscal year of the entity exceeds 12 months, the industry specification cannot cover more than 12 months. This means that the entity, in such cases, must submit an industry specification even if an annual financial statement has not been established. View various examples at the Tax Administration here: [Avvikende regnskapsår -- Når må det sendes søknad til Skattedirektoratet?](https://www.skatteetaten.no/rettskilder/type/uttalelser/prinsipputtalelser/avvikende-regnskapsar--nar-ma-det-sendes-soknad-til-skattedirektoratet/) In Period & Year, fiscal years must be divided so that both necessary tax returns/industry specifications and annual financial statements can be prepared. When preparing annual financial statements, if desired, numerical information from different fiscal years can be combined in the presentation. Example from calendar year to deviating | Period | Type | |----------------------|---------------| | 01.01.2022 - 31.12.2022 | Calendar year | | 01.01.2023 - 28.02.2023 | Short year | | 01.03.2023 - 28.02.2024 | Deviating | Example from deviating to calendar year | Period | Type | |----------------------|---------------| | 01.10.2022 - 30.09.2023 | Deviating | | 01.10.2023 - 31.12.2023 | Short | | 01.01.2024 - 31.12.2024 | Calendar year | > [!NOTE] > When submitting the tax return for the short transition period, it is important to include an attachment under the category \'Change of fiscal year,\' so that the Tax Administration can differentiate between these and years of more ordinary length. > > ![](./img/DeviatingYearSubmissionAttachmenttype.JPG) Read more about [Deviating fiscal year.](/periodandyear/help/start-page/import/deviating-accounting-year) My accounting office /periodandyear/help/client/my-accounting-office section 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # My accounting office Admin users will find the group and user administration pages in the menu **My accounting office** in the client registry. Read more in the topics below: User administration /periodandyear/help/client/my-accounting-office/user-administration page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # User administration The user administration page is split in two parts. The user list to the left and details about selected user to the right. If you have many users you can use the search field at the top of the page to find the user. ![](./img/UserAdmin.PNG) ## Create new user You can create a new user in Period & Year by clicking on the **Add user** button in the top right corner in the menu **My accounting office - User administration**. A dialogue will open and you can fill in user details such as Email, First name and Last name. When you click **Create** a welcome email will be sent to the user.

As an admin user you can:

  • Add and edit users

  • Administrate groups

  • Downgrade and upgrade client companies.

  • Reset client data (Settings - Reset data)

A new user that is added, will start without access to any clients. Access is given by adding the user in one or multiple groups. For each group you can specify read or write access to this groups clients. ## Group access for users Group access is given to a user by selecting a user on the left side to open the user information for the selected user. A user can be member of one or multiple groups. If a user doesn't belong to any group the client company page will be empty.

The group All clients contains all client companies in that accounting office.

You can choose which access level the user should have to the client companies in the selected group. - Read - Write ## Edit members in existing groups You can change access for a user in a group. You can also remove a user from a group by clicking Remove in the column **Actions** ![](./img/Editusergroup.png) ## Add a user in a group You can add a user in a group by typing the group name in the group search box to the right. You can add a user to multiple groups at the same time. You then choose which access level the user should have before you click the button **Add to group**. You can also remove a user from a group by clicking Remove in the column Action. Read more about [group administration.](/periodandyear/help/client/my-accounting-office/group-administration) ## Exclude access to specific clients It is possible to deny access to one or multiple client companies for a specific user. This applies to clients that the user have access to through group membership. By adding client companies to the denial access list the user will have no access to these clients and will not see these clients in the **Client companies** menu. Read more about [client companies.](/periodandyear/help/client/client-companies) Group administration /periodandyear/help/client/my-accounting-office/group-administration section 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # Group administration The group administration page can be found in the menu **My accounting office - Group administration** and is split in two parts. The list with groups is available to the left and details about the selected group to the right. Groups are used to manage which client companies different users should be able to access and with what access level. ![](./img/GroupAdministration.PNG) ## The group \'All clients\' Period & Year has ha default group called \'All clients\'. Every client that is created in the system will belong to this group. This is a default group which can't be deleted. If you only have need for simple access control, you will manage with this group, by giving users read or write access to the group.

You can change a users access level to this group from user or group administration.

## Add a new group You can create a new group by clicking on the **Add group** button in the top right corner in the menu **My accounting office -Group administration**. A dialogue will open and you can fill in group details such as a group name and a description of the group.

A group that is created will by default not have access to any clients. You can add client companies to the group from the client search box in the Clients tab.

Access to the group is given by adding users as members in the group. For each user you can select read or write access to the clients in this group. ## User access for a group User access is given to a user by selecting a group on the left side to open the group details for the selected group. On the right side you will see which users that have access to the group and read or write access for each user.

You can also give a user access to a group from the menu User administration.

## Edit existing user membership You can edit user access for members in the group by changing access level in the **Users** tab in Group details. You can also remove a user from the group by hovering over the row and click remove. ![](./img/Editgroups.PNG) ## Add user in a group You can add one or multiple users in a group by typing the users name in the search box to the right. Select access level and add the users to the group by clicking the **Add to group** button. Read more about [user administration.](/periodandyear/help/client/my-accounting-office/user-administration) Year end status /periodandyear/help/client/year-end-status page 2024-09-02T10:37:53+02:00 # Year end status **Year end status** gives you an overview of Altinn submissions. The list is based on information fetched from the Altinn portal and is shared within the accounting office. After logging in and updating status, persons and companies that you have access to in Altinn will be displayed in the overview. Submissions made with Period & Year and other systems will appear gathered in the list. You can search by company name or organization number/social security number at the top of the page. It is also possible to sort data by clicking on a column header.

You can download submissions and status to excel by clicking on the Download submissions to excel –button in the upper right corner.

Update status : 1. Click on **Update status**in the upper right corner. 2. Click **Next** and select task types and time filter. - Tax return - Annual report - Share holder statement

The time filter checks the date in the column 'Status updated' before updating any new status.

3. Click **Next** to log in to the id-portal and accept that client registry can read content in Altinn inbox and archive.

All persons and companies that you have access to in Altinn will be displayed in the overview. This means that you might see reportees that is no longer relevant. It can be changed in Altinn if needed.

4. Reportees and status on submissions will be updated and displayed in the overview. :

You can also update status on one reportee in the overview by clicking on the refresh icon on a specific row. In this case status for all reporting obligations will be updated.

 How Visma protects you and your information /periodandyear/help/how-visma-protect-information page 2024-08-14T17:00:37+02:00 # How Visma protects you and your information **Visma has been offering internet solutions since 2007, and over the years we have established processes, methods and technologies to meet our customers\' needs for security, privacy and accessibility.** The nature of threats is constantly changing, so security awareness is a natural part of our development process and we constantly strive to become even better. For many reasons, we cannot reveal details of our security processes, but here are some examples of how we work to ensure that you, our customers, can feel safe and secure. ## How do we ensure that your customer information is safe in Visma's hands? - All our staff are covered by confidentiality agreements. - Our staff only have access to the systems and functions they need to perform their tasks. - Access to your stored information is limited to a few people in operations and technical support. Other support staff can only see your information when you actively approve it, for example via a support login. ## How do we ensure that your services are up and running? - Backups are taken several times daily and copies are stored geographically separate from the operating environment. - Redundant (at least two independent) connections to the data centre. In case of a service interruption there is an automatic transfer to a functioning connection, usually without the service being affected. - Redundant (at least two independent) network and server units. In case of a fault, the connection is automatically transferred to a functioning unit, usually without the service being affected. ## How do we protect and monitor data traffic? - Automated systems to detect, deter and prevent intrusion and abuse. - Anycast networks for DNS services. ## How do we protect your information against cyber-attacks? - We perform security audits and penetration testing using both internal and external experts. - Passwords are never stored as text, but are always "hashed and salted". This means that not even staff at Visma can find out what your password is. If you lose your password, you must generate a new one. - Communication is run via an encrypted connection. - Our services are tested to handle recurrent attacks from, for example, SQLi, XSS and CSRF, session hijacking, and other threats. ## How do we physically protect your information? - Our data centre is locked and the alarms are set following Protection Class 2 regulations. - Video monitoring and traceability of access to the premises. - Redundant climate control with environmental monitoring of gas, moisture, heat and water. - Fire alarm with automatic firefighting equipment. - Uninterruptible power supply, regularly tested against fictional power outages. - Some of our services use Microsoft Azure and its data centres in northern Europe for storage of information. These data centres run around the clock and ensure operations by protecting against power outage, physical intrusion and network outage. They conform to recognised industry standards of physical security and reliability, including ISO/IEC 27001:2005. ## Glossary | | | |----|----| | Redundancy | A method to increase reliability by allowing two or more units (e.g. network or hardware) to work in parallel with the same information, providing a reflection of each other. If one of them breaks down, the other one takes over. | | Anycast network | An industry standard for addressing name resolution traffic (DNS) over the internet, which gives servers the highest possible availability across the world and also prevents cyber-attacks. | | Penetration testing | A way of attempting to identify security weaknesses by penetrating security systems. | | Hashing | A hashing function is an algorithm or mathematical function that can, for example, transform a password to a kind of fingerprint that cannot be decrypted. | | Salting | A method to prevent hacking by adding information before or after the hashed password. | | SQLi | SQL injection is a way to exploit security vulnerability in applications working with a database. The idea is to make a direct database query that circumvents the login system, and allows the manipulation of data. | | XSS | Cross-Site Scripting is a method whereby code is embedded in a site\'s input data, thereby changing its functionality or appearance. | | CSRF | Cross-Site Request Forgery is when an attacker aims to gain control of your web application to perform the functions as if it were an authorised user. | | Session hijacking | A method where an attacker steals a logged in, open, user connection and thereby can execute commands. | Read more about how Visma protects your information at [Visma Trust Centre](https://www.visma.com/trust-centre/). GDPR in Period & Year /periodandyear/help/gdpr-in-your-program page 2024-09-19T15:50:46+02:00 # GDPR in Period & Year The General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), may seem overly complicated. To help you get a better overview, we have gathered information about what you can do to comply with GDPR when working in Period & Year. The information on this page refers to the usage of Period & Year in its basic format. If you have any extensions or integrations with other services you should also look into how GDPR affects those. ## What is GDPR? The General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) is a EU regulation which replaced 95/46/EC and other national regulations that previously regulated how personal data was managed. On the 25th of May 2018, the new General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) was implemented for all members of the EU. For EEA member states, including Norway, GDPR came into force in July 2018. GDPR replaced the Data Protection Directive 95/46/EC and other national regulations which previously regulated how personal data should be managed. The basic GDPR regulations: - You may only manage personal data if you comply with all the requirements of the regulation. - You may only collect personal data for specified purposes. - You may only collect personal data that is necessary in order for you to fulfil the specified purposes. - If you are in possession of personal data, the data must be continuously updated and correct. - When the specified purposes have been fulfilled, the data should be deleted. - Personal data must be stored securely to prevent them from being altered or stolen. - You must be able to prove that your processing of personal data complies with the GDPR regulations. At [visma.no](https://www.visma.no/programvare/a/gdpr/) you will find more general information about GDPR. ## Work according to GDPR in Period & Year Below, you can read more about what you can do to meet the demands for managing personal data according to GDPR. Disclose registered personal data : An individual has the right to ask you if you have any personal information about them. If that is the case, you must be able to share the information with the individual. The easiest way to do this in the program is to generate a PDF file, which contains these data, in **Report center**. Delete personal data : The accounting data stored in Period & Year must be kept for a minimum of five years according to the Bookkeeping Act. This includes any personal data entered in appendices, tax forms and annual report documents, which means that the Bookkeeping Act overrides GDPR in these cases. : Therefore, these personal data cannot be anonymized or \"pseudonymized\" for as long as the Bookkeeping Act has precedence over GDPR. External appendices : It is possible to upload external appendices for reconciliation purposes in Period & Year. You need to make sure that any personal data in these appendices have a clear purpose related to your bookkeeping. ## Personal data collection Personal data include any information which, directly or indirectly, may identify a natural person. Please note that a sole proprietorship also class as a natural person. According to GDPR you may only collect personal data for specified purposes. These purposes may differ between companies, depending on what business they conduct. One purpose could for example entail storing address information in order to invoice a customer.

Examples of personal data include information such as name, address, telephone number and personal identity numbers. However, since the law states that personal data can be any information that directly or indirectly can be linked to a natural person, such data may also include photos or a description of the distinguishable features of a person.

According to GDPR, the person whom you have collected personal data about has the right to access to the following information: - who you are - the purpose of the data collection - what legal grounds that support it - whether the information is shared with others - how long the data will be stored The person whom you have collected personal data about has the right to request access to the data. In the program you find personal data in fields that have a fixed purpose, such as name, phone number and address. If a customer requests access to any information that has been stored about them, this data can easily be compiled. Besides fields with a fixed purpose, personal data can also be stored in other parts of the program, such as in free text fields and comments. We recommend that you avoid entering personal data in these fields since it is difficult to locate, analyse and compile this kind of information. ## Personal data in Period & Year In Period & Year, personal data are stored in certain appendices, in tax forms and in documents in the annual report. The purpose of gathering these personal data in Period & Year is based on legislation. Free-form text fields, which are used for comments etc, could be used to enter personal data or information that could be associated with individuals. Avoid entering sensitive information in these fields. Appendices : Certain appendices related to for example salaries, loans and receivables in **Reconciliation BS** contain fields used for personal data, such as name and monthly pay. This is information that must be provided according to the Bookkeeping Act. : When uploading external appendices, make sure that any personal data in these have a clear purpose related to your bookkeeping. Tax forms and annual report : In **Year-end closing - Tax forms** and **Year-end closing - Annual report**, personal data are entered into certain forms and documents. : Below, different types of personal data that can be entered in these parts of the service are listed: On a corporate level : - Company information - Accountant\'s information - Auditor\'s information - Role in company/board of directors - Shareholder information On an individual level : - Name and address - Date of birth - Organisation number/Personal identity number - Phone number - E-mail address ## Personal data storage Period & Year is a cloud based service, which means that the personal data you enter in the program are stored on our infrastructure supplier's servers as well as on Visma's servers. More information about data storage in Visma's cloud based services can be found in [www.visma.com/trust-centre](http://www.visma.com/trust-centre). If you have generated reports in Period & Year, personal data could also be stored locally on your computer or in another storage location.

Please note that you always are the controller for the data that you have collected and that GDPR applies regardless of how the data have been stored and distributed.

 License terms - Period & Year /periodandyear/help/license page 2024-08-14T17:00:37+02:00 # License terms - Period & Year Here you can read our [terms and conditions](https://www.visma.com/trust-centre/terms-of-service).